HUE UNIVERSITY COLLEGE OF FOREIGN LANGUAGES DEPARTMENT OF ENGLISH ------***------

NGUYEN VAN TUAN

TRANSLATION 1&2

HUE - 2006

INTRODUCTION
An increasing number of universities in Vietnam have added courses in translation to their curricula; however, the textbooks available for such courses are few. This unit has been written with these courses in mind. The unit is designed to provide the learners with some basic principles of translation which will be generally useful to translation courses in universities and colleges, to help the learners avoid some errors they may encounter when they translate a text, to provide the learners with essential English sentence patterns that could be very useful for the learners in learning and practicing translating and to provide the learners 20 assignments related to the theory they have learned. The desire of the author is to make available the principles of translation which have learned through personal experience in translation and teaching translation, and through interaction with colleagues involved in translation projects in many universities in Central Vietnam. Since it is assumed that the students will be speakers of Vietnamese language, many of these exercises involve translating from or into their mother tongue. The material is presented in a way that it can be used in a self-teaching situation or in a classroom. An attempt has been made to keep technical terms to a minimum. When technical vocabulary is used, every effort is made to clarify the meaning of such vocabulary or to provide its meaning in Vietnamese. This has been done so that the unit can be used by any student translator, even though his exposure to linguistic and translation theory has been minimal. This is an introductory unit. The lessons give an overview presenting the fundamental principles of translation and the rest of the unit illustrates these principles. The overriding principle is that translation is meaning-based rather than form-based. Once the learner has identified the meaning of the source text, his goal is to express that same meaning in the receptor/target language. Many examples of cross-language equivalence are used to illustrate this principle. Since the coursebook has been written for the students to learn either by themselves in their distant learning course or in class with a teacher, there will be a coursebook and 20 assignments. By the end of the course, the students will be able to: 1. obtain general knowledge of the principles of translation . 2. get familiar with and effectively use the English sentence patterns in their translations. On the completion of this coursebook, I would like to express my deep gratitude to Dr. Ton Nu Nhu Huong for her encouragement. I would also like to be grateful to Dr. Tran Van Phuoc and other colleagues of the College of Foreign Languages and the English Department for their kind help. Errors are unavoidable in this coursebook. Therefore, I appreciate and welcome any criticism on the course book. Hue, June 24th, 2001 Nguyen Van Tuan

CHAPTER 1:
LESSON 1:
1.What is translation?

THEORY OF TRANSLATION
FORM AND MEANING

1.1. Translation is the expression in another language (target language) of what has been expressed in one language (source language), preserving semantic and stylistic equivalencies. (By Roger T. Bell). 1.2. Translation is the replacement of a representation of a text in one language by a representation of an equivalent text in a second language. (By Roger T. Bell). The author continues and makes the problems of equivalence very plain: Texts in different languages can be equivalent in different degrees (fully or partially different), in respect of different levels of presentation (in respect of context, of semantics, of grammar, of lexis, etc.) and at different ranks (word-for-word, phrase-for-phrase, sentencefor-sentence). However, languages are different from each other; they are different in form having different codes and rules regulating the construction of grammatical stretches of language and these forms have different meanings. To shift from one language to another is, by definition, to change the forms. Also, the contrasting forms convey meanings which cannot but fail to coincide totally; there is no absolute synonym between words in the same language, why should anyone be surprised to discover a lack synonym between languages. Something is always lost (or might one suggest gain?) in the process and translators can find themselves being accused of reproducing only part of the original and so betraying the authors intentions. Hence the traitorous nature ascribed to the translator by the notorious Italian proverb: Traduttore traditore. Faced by a text in a language, we are able to work out not only the meaning of each word and sentence but also its communicative value, its place in time and space and information about the participants involved in its production and reception. We might take, as a light-hearted model of the questions we can ask of the text, the first verse of a short poem by Kipling. I keep six honest serving men; (They taught me all I knew); Their names were What? And Why? And When? And How? And Where? And Who? What? is the message contained in the text; the content of the signal. Why? orients us towards the intention of the sender, the purpose for which the text was is used. (Informing, persuading, flattering, etc.) When? is concerned with the time of communication realized in the text and setting in its historical context; contemporary or set in the recent or remote past or future.

3 Where? is concerned with the place of communication, the physical location of the speech event realized in the text. How? refers to whether the text is written in a formal or informal way. Who? refers to the participants involved in the communication; the sender and receiver. 1.3. Translation is rendering a written text into another language in a way that the author intended the text. (By Bui Tien Bao- Hanoi National University) Translators are concerned with written texts. They render written texts from one language into another language. Translators are required to translate texts which arrange from simple items including birth certificates or driving licences to more complex written materials such as articles in journals of various kinds, business contracts and legal documents. (Bui Tien BaoHanoi National University). 1.4. Translation, by dictionary definition, consists of changing from one state or form to another, to turn into ones own or anothers language. (The Merriam-Webster Dictionary, 1974). Translation is basically a change of form. When we speak of the form of a language, we are referring to the actual words, phrases, sentences, paragraphs, etc. The forms are referred to as the surface structure of a language. It is the structural part of language which is actually seen in print or heard in speech. In translation the form of the source language is replaced by the form of the receptor/target language. But how is this change accomplished? What determines the choices of form in the translation? The purpose of this lesson is to show that translation consists of transferring the meaning of the source language into the receptor language. This is done by going from the form of the first language to the form of the second language by a way of semantic structure. It is meaning that is being transferred and must be held constant. Only the form changes. The form from which the translation is made will be called the source language and the form into which it is to be changed will be called the receptor language. Translation, then, consists of studying the lexicon, grammatical structure, communication situation, and cultural context of the source language text, analyzing it in order to determine its meaning, and then reconstructing this same meaning using the lexicon, grammatical structure which are appropriate in the receptor language and its cultural context. Let us look at an example. Assume that we are translating the Vietnamese sentence Cm n bn gip ti tn tnh. into English. This Vietnamese sentence has the verb gip tn tnh, but to convey the same meaning in English one would use a noun phrase: your kind help. To do effective translation one must discover the meaning of the source language and use the receptor language forms which express the meaning in a natural way. It is the purpose of this unit to familiarize the learners with the basic linguistic and sociolinguistic factors involved in translating a text from a source language into a receptor language, and to give them enough practice in the translation process for the development of skills in cross-language transfer.

2. Characteristics of language which affect translation

There are certain characteristics of languages which have a very direct bearing on principles of translation. First, let us look at the characteristics of meaning components. Meaning components are packaged into lexical items, but they are packaged differently in one language than in another. In most languages there is a meaning of plurality, for example the English -s. This often occurs in the grammar as a suffix on the nouns or verbs or both. In Vietnamese, however, plurality is expressed in an isolated word nhng/cc. Many times a single word in the source language will need to be translated by several words. For example, a projector was called the thing that shows pictures on the wall by the Chipara Bolivia.

Second, it is characteristic of languages that the same meaning component will occur in several surface structure lexical items. In English, the word sheep occurs. However, the words lamb, ram and ewe also include the meaning sheep. They include the addition meaning components of young (in lamb, adult and male in ram and adult and female in ewe. In Peru, lamb would need to be translated by sheep its child, ram by sheep big and ewe by sheep its woman. Third, it is further characteristic of language that one form will be used to represent several alternative meanings. This again is obvious from looking in any good dictionary. For example, the Readers Digest Great Encyclopedic Dictionary gives 54 meanings for the English word run. Most words have more than one meaning. There will be a primary meaning-the one which usually comes to mind when the word is said in isolation-and the secondary meaningthe additional meanings, which a word has in context with other words. In English, we can say the boy runs, using run in its primary meaning. We can also say the motor runs, the river runs, and his nose runs, using runs in its secondary meanings. This principle is not limited to lexical items for it is also true that the same grammatical pattern may express several quite different meanings. For instance, the English possessive phrase my house may mean the house I built, the house I rent, the house I live in, or the house for which I drew up in my plans. Only the larger context determines the meaning. Notice the following possessive phrases and the variety of meanings: my car my brother my foot my singing my book my village my train ownership kinship part-whole action ownership or authorship ( the book I own, or, the book I wrote) residence ( the village where I live) use

5 (the train I ride on) Whole sentences may also have several functions. A question form may be used for a nonquestion. For example, the question: Mary, why dont you wash the dishes? has a form of a question, and may in some context be asking for information, but it is often used with the meaning of command rather than a real question. A simple English sentence like He made the bed. May mean either He made (as a carpenter would make) the bed, or He put the sheets, blanket, and pillows in neat order on the bed. Just as words have primary and secondary meanings, so grammatical markers have their primary function and often have other secondary functions. The preposition on is used in English to signal a variety of meanings. Compare the following uses of on with the corresponding form used in Vietnamese. John found the book on the floor. nh. John found the book on mathematics. mn ton. John found the book on Tuesday. th Ba. John found the book on sale. ang by bn. John tm thy cun sch trn sn John tm thy cun sch vit v John tm thy cun sch vo John tm thy cun sch

Compare also the following uses of by John was stopped by the policeman. John was stopped by the bookstand. In the first, by is used to signal the meaning that the policeman is the agent of the action. In the second, by is used to signal that the bookstand is the location. We have seen that one form may express many meanings. On the other hand, another characteristic of languages is that a single meaning may be expressed in a variety of forms. For example, the meaning the cat is black may be expressed by the following: the cat is black, the black cat, and, the cat, which is black, depending on how that meaning relates to other meanings. In addition, the meanings of Is this place taken? Is there anyone sitting here? and May I sit here? are essentially the same. Also, the meaning is essentially the same in the following English sentences: Others blamed John because of the difficulty. Others blamed John for the difficulty. Others blamed the difficulty on John. Others said John was responsible for the difficulty.

6 Others accused John of being responsible for the difficulty. We have seen that even within a single language there are a great variety of ways in which form expresses meaning. Only when a form being used in its primary meaning or function is there a one-to-one correlation between form and meaning. The other meanings are secondary meanings or figurative meanings. Words have these extended meanings and in the same way grammatical forms have extended usages (secondary and figurative function). This characteristic of skewing; that is, the diversity or the lack of one-to-one correlation between form and meaning is the basic reason that translation is a complicated task. If there were no skewing, then all lexical items and all grammatical forms would have only one meaning and a literal word-for-word and grammatical structure-for- grammatical structure translation would be possible. But the fact is that a language is a complex set of skewed relationship between meaning (semantics) and form (lexicon and grammar). Each language has its own distinctive forms for representing the meaning. Therefore, in translation the same meaning may have to be expressed in another language by a very different form. To translate the form of one language literally according to the corresponding form in another language would often change the meaning or at least result in a form which is unnatural in the second language. Meaning must, therefore, have priority over form in translation. It is meaning that is to be carried over from the source language to the receptor language, not the linguistic forms. For example, to translate the English sentence he is cold hearted i.e. His heart is cold (meaning he is unfeeling, has no emotional sympathy.) literally into Mambila in Nigeria would be understood to mean, he is peaceful, not quick-tempered. And if translated literally into Cinyanja in Zambia, it would mean, he is frightened. The nature of language is that each language uses different forms and these forms have secondary and figurative meanings which add further complications. A word-for-word translation which follows closely the form of the source language is called a literal translation. A literal translation does not communicate the meaning of the source text. It is generally no more than a string of words intended to help someone read a text in its original language. It is unnatural and hard to understand, and may even be quite meaningless, or give a wrong meaning in the receptor language. It can hardly be called a translation. The goal of a translator should be to produce a receptor language text (a translation) which is idiomatic; that is one which has the same meaning as the source language but is expressed in the natural form of the receptor language. The meaning, not form is retained. The following is a literal translation of a story first told in the Quiche language of Guatemala: It is said that being one man not from here, not known where the his or the he comes where. One day the things he walks in a plantation or in them the coastlands, he saw his appearance one little necklace, or he thought that a little necklace the very pretty thrown on the ground in the road. He took the necklace this he threw in his mouth for its cause that coming the one person another to his behind ness, for his that not he encounters the one the following this way in his behindness not he knows and that the necklace the he threw in his mouth this one

7 snake and the man this one died right now because not he knows his appearance the snake or that the he ate this not this a necklace only probably this snake. Now compare the above with the following less literal translation of the same story: It is said that there once was a man not from here, and I do not know his town or where he came from, who one day was walking in a plantation (or in the coastlands). He saw a little necklace, or rather, what he thought was a very pretty little necklace, lying on the road. He grabbed this necklace and threw this into his mouth because there was someone coming along behind him, and he did not want the other person to see it. He did not know that the necklace he threw into his mouth was really a snake. The man died in short order because he did not recognize from its appearance that it was a snake. He did not know that what he had put in his mouth was not a necklace, but rather a snake. In the first, each quiche word was replaced by the nearest English equivalent. The result was nonsense. In the second translation, the natural forms of English lexicon and grammar were used to express the meaning of the Quiche story. Below the story is again rewritten in a more idiomatic English style. I am told that there once was a stranger from some other town who was walking in a plantation along the coast. As he walked along he suddenly saw a very pretty little necklace lying on the road. He snatched up this necklace and threw this into his mouth because there was another person walking behind him and he did not want him to see the necklace. The stranger did not know that the necklace was really a snake. The man died immediately. He died because he did not realize that it was a snake. He did not know he put a snake into his mouth rather than a necklace. Anything which can be said in one language can be said in another. It is possible to translate. The goal of the translator is to keep the meaning constant. Wherever necessary, the receptor language form should be changed in order that the source language meaning should not be distorted. Since a meaning expressed by a particular form in one language may be expressed by quite a different form in another language, it is often necessary to change the form when translating.

3. Notes
Form-based translation: Meaning-based translation: chuyn ti Source language: Receptor language: Context: Principle of translation: Meaning component: dch da vo hnh thc hay cu trc dch da vo ngha, da vo ni dung cn ngn ng gc ngn ng dch vn cnh/ ng cnh nguyn tc dch/k thut dch thnh t ngha

8 Lexical: Surface structure: Deep structure: Meaning/ sense: Primary meaning: Secondary meaning: Literal translation: One-to-one correlation: Figurative meaning: Function: Idiomatic translation: (thuc v) t vng cu trc b mt cu trc su/cu trc ng ngha ngha ngha chnh/ngha gc ngha phi sinh dch tng t mt quan h mt i mt ngha bng chc nng dch ng, dch st nghi

4. Self-study
4.1 Questions for discussion 1. What is translation? What definition do you think is the most appropriate? Can you give your own definition of translation? 2. What is a literal translation? Can you give some examples of literal translations? 3. What is an idiomatic translation? Give some examples of idiomatic translations. 4. What characteristics of language affect translation? 5. What are the secondary meanings? Give ten sentences, each of which contains a word used in a secondary sense. 6. What is the primary meaning? Give ten sentences, each of which contains a word used in a primary sense. 4.2 Exercises A. Identify change of meaning versus change of form. Some of the following pairs of sentences differ in their form. Some differ in meaning. Indicate if the primary change is in the form or in the meaning. Example: They robbed the old man. The old man was dropped by them. Answer: Change of form 1. The students like to study translation. The students like studying translation. 2. I bought a pair of horseshoes. I bought a pair of leather shoes. 3. He saw the bird. He heard the cat.

9 4. Phillip went walking. Phillip took a walk. 5. Go to bed. I want you to go to bed. 6. I came; I saw; I conquered. I came, saw, and conquered. 7. Two weeks later he came. After two weeks he came. 8. There is a table in the book. There is a book on the table. 9. The young man had an English grammar book stolen. An English grammar book was stolen from the young man. 10. He was awaken by a thunderclap. A thunderclap awakened him. B. List as many grammatical forms as you can which realize the same meaning as the one given below. Then put the same meaning into a language other than English in as many forms as you can. Example: the cat is black the black cat the cat, which is black 1. the jug water 2. John bought a car 3. a hot day 4. mothers long blue dress 5. Peters house C. All of the following have the same grammatical form. With the change of lexical items, there is a change of meaning which is signaled by that lexical item, apart from the referential meaning of the word itself. What meaning is signaled in each of the following possessive phrases? Answer by restating. How can that meaning best be expressed in another language which you speak? Example: The mans car - the man owns the car The mans eye - the eye is part of the man 1. the doctors office 2. the doctors patient 3. the doctors book 4. the doctors brother

10 5. the doctors hand 6. the doctors house D. For each pair of sentences, state whether the two sentences are 1. the same in meaning or 2. different in meaning. Example: (a) It rained all night. (b) Rain fell all night. (a) There is a book on the table. (b) There is a table on the book. 1. (a) John was very surprised when he heard the news. (b) The news very much amazed John when he heard it. 2. (a) It was a hot day. (b) The day was hot. 3. (a) Peters house (b) The house that belongs to Peter 4. (a) He remained silent. (b) He did not say anything. 5. (a) I bought cloth to make Mary a new dress. (b) I bought a new dress for Mary. 6. (a) I bought vegetables in the market. (b) I bought tomatoes and onions in the market. 7. (a) My parents are well. (b) My mother and father are well. 8. (a) John is ill: he has a bad case of malaria. (b) John is very ill indeed. 9. (a) There are four rooms in the house. (b) The house has four rooms and a kitchen at the back. 10. (a) In my opinion, the government is doing well and making many improvements in the country. But there are many people who do not agree that this is so. (b) Opinions are divided concerning the government. Some say they are doing well and making many improvements in the country. Others do not agree.

LESSON 2:

KINDS OF TRANSLATION

1. Literal versus idiomatic

11 Because a given text has both form and meaning, as discussed in the previous lesson, there are two main kinds of translation. One is form-based and the other is meaning-based. Form-based translations attempt to follow the form of the source language and are known as literal translation. Meaning-based translations make every effort to communicate the meaning of the source language text in the natural forms of the receptor language. Such translations are called idiomatic translations. An interlinear translation is a completely literal translation. For some purposes, it is desirable to reproduce the linguistic features of the source text, as for example, in a linguistic study of that language. Although these literal translations may be very useful for purposes related to the study of the source language, they are of little help to speakers of the receptor language who are interested in the meaning of the source language text. A literal translation sounds like nonsense and has little communication value. For example: Vietnamese: Literal translation: Mi bn v nh ti chi Invite friend about house me play.

This literal translation makes little sense in English. The appropriate translation would be: Would you like to come to my home? If the two languages are related, the literal translation can often be understood, since the general grammatical form may be similar. However, the literal choice of lexical items may the translation sounds foreign. The following bilingual announcement was overheard at an airport ( Barnwell 1980:18) Literal English: Madame Odette passenger with destination Domda is demanded on the telephone. This English version is a literal translation of the French. French: Madame Odette, passager destination de Domda, est demande au telefon. An idiomatic translation into English would be: Miss Odette, passenger for Domda. You are wanted on the phone. Except for interlinear translation, a truly literal translation is uncommon. Most translators who tend to translate literally actually make a partially modified literal translation. They modify the order and grammar enough to use acceptable sentence structure in the receptor language. However, the lexical items are translated literally. Occasionally, these are also changed to avoid complete nonsense or to improve the communication. However, the result still does not sound natural. Notice the following example from a language in Papua New Guinea: Ro abombo ngusifu pamariboyandi. I my heart fastened-her. (literal) (modified literal) I fastened her in my heart.

12

The modified literal translation changes the order into English structure. However, the sentence still does not communicate in clear English. An idiomatic translation would have used the form: I never forgot her. Or Ive kept her memory in my heart. A person who translates in a modified literal manner will change the grammatical forms when the constructions are obligatory. However, if he has a choice, he will follow the form of the source text even though a different form might be more natural in the receptor language. Literal and modified literal translations consistently err in that they choose literal equivalents for the words, i.e. lexical items being translated. Literal translations of words, idioms result in unclear, unnatural, and sometimes nonsensical translations. In a modified literal translation, the translator usually adjusts the translation enough to avoid the nonsense and wrong meanings, but the unnaturalness still remains. Idiomatic translations use the natural forms of the receptor language, both in the grammatical constructions and in the choice of lexical items. A truly idiomatic translation does not sound like a translation. It sounds like it was written originally in the receptor language. Therefore, a good translator will try to translate idiomatically. This is his goal. However, translations are often a mixture of a literal transfer of the grammatical units along with some idiomatic translation of the meaning of the text. It is not easy to consistently translate. A translator may express some parts of his translation in very natural forms and then in other parts fall back into a literal form. In one translation, the source text said, Nhiu du khch n-c ngoi gii thiu cho chng ti v khch sn H-ng Giang. It was translated, Many foreign tourists have introduced us about Huong Giang Hotel. It would have been translated idiomatically, Huong Giang Hotel has been recommended to us by a number of foreign tourists. The translators goal should be to reproduce in a receptor language a text which communicates the same message as the source language but using the natural grammatical and lexical choices of the receptor language. The basic overriding principle is that an idiomatic translation reproduces the meaning of the source language in the natural form of the receptor language.

2. Translating grammatical features

Parts of speech are language specific. Each language has its own division of the lexicon into classes such as nouns, verbs, adjectives and so on. Different languages will have different classes and subclasses. It will not always be possible to translate a source language noun with a noun in the receptor language. For example, English has many nouns which really refer to actions while Vietnamese prefers to express actions as verbs rather than nouns. In one translation, the source text said, There is a general agreement that the government has given top priority to education. It was translated, C mt s ng chung rng chnh ph dnh nhiu s -u tin cho gio dc. This would

13 have been translated idiomatically, Ai cng ng rng chnh ph dnh nhiu -u tin cho gio dc. Similarly, a translator in Papua New Guinea was asked to translate the Eight Point Improvement Plan for Papua New Guinea. One point reads, Decentralization of economic activity, planning and government spending, with emphasis on agricultural development, village industry, better internal trade, and more spending channeled through local and area bodies. Such sentences are very difficult for translators who want to translate into the native language of the country. Words such as Decentralization, activity, planning, government spending, emphasis development, trade would have to be rendered by verbs in most languages. When verbs are used, then, the appropriate subject and object of the verb may need to be made explicit also. The form in the receptor language is very different from the source language form and yet this kind of adjustment, using verbs rather than using nouns, must be made in order to communicate the message. An idiomatic translation was made which used verbs as in the following. The government wants to decrease the work it does for businesses and what it plans and the money it spends in the capital, and wants to increase what people and groups in local area do to help farmers and small businesses whose owners live in the villages, and help people in this country buy and sell things made in this country and to help local groups spend the governments money. Most languages have a class of words which may be called pronouns. Pronominal systems vary greatly from language to language and the translator is obliged to use the form of the receptor language even though they may have very different meanings than the pronouns of the source language. For example, if one is translating into Kiowa (USA), the pronouns will have to indicate a different between singular, dual and plural person even though the source language does not make this three-way distinction. Or if a translator is translating into Balinese, he must distinguish degrees of honor even though nothing in the source language indicates these distinctions. He will need to understand the culture of the Balinese and the cultural context of the text he is translating in order to choose correctly. In English, the first plural pronoun we is often used when the real meaning is second person you. The reason for the use of we is to show empathy and understanding. The nurse say to the sick child, Its time for us to take our medicine now. Or the teacher says, Were not going to shout, quietly to our well walk places. Clearly , the pronouns do not refer to the nurse or the teacher but to the children whom she is addressing you. In translating these pronouns into another language, a literal translation with first person plural would probably distort the meaning. The translator would need to look for the natural way to communicate second person and the feeling of empathy carried by the source language. Grammatical constructions also vary between the source language and the receptor language. The order , for example, may be completely reserved. The following simple sentences from Vietnamese is given with a literal English translations: Ch sng u? You live where ?

14 C y th-ng mc o s mi vi silk mu xanh c nh.

She often wears a shirt silk blue small. It will readily be seen that understandable translations into English requires a complete reversal of the order: She often wears a small blue silk shirt. It is not uncommon that passive constructions will need to be translated with an active construction or vice versa, depending on the natural form of the receptor language. For example, Vietnamese people tend to use active constructions to express their ideas whereas English people prefer to use passive constructions. English: Vietnamese: (active) English: A: What has happened to all your money after the will was settled and the business was sold? (passive) B: The usual thing, false friends, fast-living style and bad investment. Vietnamese: A: Chuyn g xy ra vi ton b s tin m bn c -c sau khi gii quyt xong chuyn chc th- v bn i c sn nghip. (active) B: Cng l th-ng tnh thi, bn b gi di, n chi hoang n v u t- sai ch. The above translated sentences are only examples to show some types of grammatical adjustments which will result if a translator translates idiomatically in the source language. Certainly, there will be times by coincidence they match, but a translator should translate the meaning not concern himself with whether the forms turn out the same or not. Nguyen Du is considered to be a great poet. ( passive) Ng-i ta xem Nguyn Du l mt nh th v i.

3. Translating lexical features

Each language has its own idiomatic way of expressing meaning lexical items. Languages abound in idioms, secondary meanings, metaphors, and other figurative meanings. For example, notice the following ways in which a fever is referred to ( literal translations are given to show the source language form): Greek: Aguaruna: Vietnamese: The fever left him. He cooled. He cooled. Or: The fever was no more in him.

15

Ilocano:

The fever was no more in him.

The English translations of all six would be : His fever went down, or His temperature returned to normal. All languages have idioms, i.e. a string of words whose meaning is different than the meaning conveyed by the individual words. In English to say that someone is bullheaded means that the person is stubborn. The meaning has little to do with bull or head . Similarly, in Vietnamese to say that someone is cng u cng c means that the person is stubborn. The meaning has little to do with u or c. Languages abound in such idioms. The following are a few English idioms using in and into: run into debt, rush into print, step into a practice, jump into a fight, dive into a book, stumble into acquaintance, fall in love, break into society. In spite of all these combinations, one cannot say the following break into debt, fall into print, rush into a fight, dive into debt, etc. The combinations are fixed as to form and their meaning comes from their combination. A literal word-for-word translation of these idioms into another language will not make sense. The form cannot be kept, but the receptor language word or phrase which has the equivalent meaning will be the correct one to use in the translation. The following idioms occur in Vietnamese. In the first column is a literal translation from Vietnamese. In the second is an idiomatic translation. The literal English is misleading. LITERAL I dont have my eye on you. He is as strong as a buffalo. I have buried my head into my business. IDIOMATIC I dont remember you. He is as strong as a horse. I have been busy with my work.

Translators who wants to make a good idiomatic translation often find figures of speech especially challenging. A literal translation of strong as a horse might sound really strange in a language where the comparison between a strong person and a horse has never been use as a figure of speech. In Vietnamese it would be more natural to say strong as a buffalo. Similarly, a literal translation of blind as a bat might sound really strange in a language where the comparison between a blind person and a bat has never been use as a figure of speech. In Aguaruma it would be more natural to say blind as a fox. There is a legend in which the sun borrowed the foxs eyes and then returned to heaven taking the foxs good eyes with him and leaving the fox with the suns inferior eyes. That is why they say, when the fox is trying to see, he stretches back his head and looks with his throat. Figures of speech are often based on stories or historical incidents. Names of animals are used metaphorically in most languages. But the comparison is often different and so the figure will be misunderstood unless some adjustment is made. For example, when someone is called a pig in English, it usually means he is dirty or a greedy eater. In Vietnamese, it has different meanings. It could means that the person is stupid or that the person is a greedy. Care would need to be taken if pig were used metaphorically or a wrong meaning might result in the receptor language.

16 Some lexical combinations of the source language may be ambiguous. The meaning is not clear. For example, It is too hot to eat, could mean any of the following: The food is too hot to eat; the weather is too hot for us to feel like eating; the horse is too hot after running a race and does not want to eat. In the process of making an idiomatic translation, such ambiguities must often be resolved and only the intended meaning communicated.

4. Conclusion
It is obvious that translation is a complicated process. However, a translator who is concerned with transferring the meaning will find that the receptor language has a way in which the desired meaning can be expressed even though it may be very different from the source language form. Considering the complexity of language structures, how can a translator ever hope to produce an adequate translation? Literal translation can only be avoided by careful analysis of the source language: by, first of all, understanding clearly the message to be communicated. A translator who takes the time to study carefully the source language text, to write analysis of it, and then to look for the equivalent way in which the same message is expressed naturally in the receptor language, will be able to provide an adequate, and some times brilliant translation. His goal must be to avoid literalisms and to strive for a truly idiomatic receptor language text. He will know he is successful if the receptor language readers do not recognize his work as a translation at all, but simply as a text written in the receptor language for their information and enjoyment.

5. Notes
Form-based translation : Meaning-based translation: Literal translation: Idiomatic translation: Interference : Mother-tongue interference: To make adjustments: Translating grammatical features: Parts of speech: Subclass: Indo-European language: Pronominal system: dch da vo hnh thc dch da vo ngha dch tng t mt dch ng ngha s can thip s can thip ca ting m hiu nh/ iu chnh c tr-ng ng php dch t loi nhm nh ngn ng n-u h thng i t

6. Self-study
6.1 Questions for discussion 1. What are the differences between a literal translation and an idiomatic translation? 2. What should you do to translate a text idiomatically?

17 3. What grammatical features should be considered when you translate a text? Give some examples to support your ideas. 4. What lexical features should be considered when you translate a text? Give some examples to support your ideas. 5. Why do you have to take the time to read the source language text carefully before translating it? 6.2 Exercises A. In each of the following pairs of sentences, which is more idiomatic English, a or b? How would the meaning be expressed idiomatically in the language you speak? 1.(a) The storekeeper said that we will refund your money. (b) The storekeeper promised to refund our money. 2.(a) A certain boy told me this little story at a party. (b) He is one boy. He told the one little story. This is a game he said. 3.(a) An International Alphabet would inevitably bring about a spelling reform as well. How many children have shed hot tears about spelling? (b) An International Alphabet would inevitably bring about a spelling reform ,too. And how many hot childrens tears have not been shed on spelling? 4.(a) He then reported his misfortune to the police, who are searching diligently for the thief. (b) He then his mishap reported to the police, who are the thief searching intensively B. Look for literalisms in the following translations into English and underline the words or phrases that do not sound natural in English. Suggest a more idiomatic way of saying it. All of these examples are from published translated material. 1. The third-year students often visit the schools in the city for the attendance of the class. 2. Foreign tourists usually at Kinh Do Hotel for their friends have introduced to them very much about this hotel. 3. Since the USA abolished the embargo against Vietnam, many foreign countries have been investing in Vietnam. 4. After saying lies many times, he lost our belief in him. 5. Hue is famous about its delicious dishes and beautiful landscapes. 6. The participants discussed about the causes of pollution environment. 7. Every time my mother goes to work , I feel my house absent anybody. 8. One thing makes me proud of my village is a large green field that provides one part of life for people. 9. A robbery took place of a motorcycle rider at Kampung early yesterday morning. 10. I left my village for three years, a time not long but like a century. C. Each of the following are sentences written by some Vietnamese who are not yet fluent English speakers. The forms used shows examples of how their mother-tongue language

18 structures have been carried over into English. The same information is then given in parenthesis in idiomatic English. What changes were made in correcting the English? These changes point out some of the differences between Vietnamese and English. 1. Sir, the problems of before dont forget. ( Sir, please dont forget the problems we discussed before.) 2. If there is any means, send me a letter to Saigon. (If there is any way to do so, send a letter to me in Saigon.) 3. I will think you time to time day and day. ( I will be thinking about you often every day.) 4. I am very grateful to inform you with this letter. ( I am very happy to be able to send/write you this letter.) 5. I am a man who has been to Hanoi for 12 years. ( I have now lived in Hanoi for 12 years.) D. Translate the following Vietnamese sentences as idiomatically as possible. 1. Ch may o s mi ny u vy? 2. Cha ng ta ung n-c sng Hng, sng , sng Cu Long v sng cht vi sng n-c ny. Cc bn th ngh xem rt t ngn ng trn th gii li c s thng nht nh- ting m ca chng ta. Trong ting Vit, th n-c (trong sng, trong h, trong bin....) li ng ngha, ng m vi n-c trong ngha t quc qu h-ng. - cha ng: ancestors

- thng nht : uniformity - ng ngha : synonym/ synonymous - ng m : homonym - trong ngha : to mean/ to signify - t quc qu h-ng: homeland/ fatherland/ motherland - sng cht: to try hard to protect them/ to spare no pain to protect them 3. Lt chim c mt vng t rng trn cao nguyn Lm Vin, xung quanh ton l ni i hng v. - chim c : take up/ to be situated/ to occupy - cao nguyn : plateau - xung quanh: to be surrounded by/ with 4. S pht trin kinh t ca Vit Nam phi -c xt trong hon cnh chin tranh ko di. Hon cnh chin tranh y gy ra

19 nhiu thit hi v sinh mng v ti sn cng nh- cc cng trnh cng cng v ti nguyn. - s pht trin kinh t : the economic development - -c xt : to be viewed/ to be considered/ to be taken into account - hon cnh chin tranh ko di : in the context of the long period of war - gy ra thit hi : to cause damage to - ti sn : property - cng trnh cng cng : public facilities - ti nguyn : resources 5. Mc d a v ca ph n c nhng b-c tin k diu, nh-ng ng-i ta phi thc hin nhiu chuyn khc ci thin tnh trng sc kho, dinh d-ng v gio dc cho ph n. - a v : status - c nhng b-c tin k diu: to be dramatically improved - dinh d-ng : nutrition 6. Mng l-i truyn hnh ang xy dng rng khp c n-c. Ngoi nhng i truyn hnh t-ng i hin i, c t lu i nh- i truyn hnh H Ni v Thnh Ph H Ch Minh, cn c 25 i thuc cc tnh -c thnh lp vo nm 1988. Nhng i truyn hnh ny s truyn nhng ch-ng trnh quan trng ca i truyn hnh trung -ng v pht ch-ng trnh ca i mnh. - mng l-i : network - i truyn hnh : television station - lu i: long-standing - thnh lp : to establish/ set up - truyn nhng ch-ng trnh : to relay the transmissions - pht: to broadcast 7. Ngy nay th gii ang -ong u vi nhiu vn nghim trng cho d c nhiu b-c tin ng k trong lnh vc khoa hc, cng ngh v tri thc. Mt trong nhng vn l s bng n dn s, c bit cc n-c ang pht trin. Dn s ang tng theo cp s nhn trong lc sn xut hng ho li tng theo cp s cng. - -ng u : to face - vn nghim trng : serious problem - c nhiu b-c tin ng k : to take great strikes

20 - s bng n dn s : population explosion/ population boom - tng theo cp s nhn : to grow in geometric progression - tng theo cp s cng : to grow in arithmetic progression - sn xut hng ho : the production of goods 8. Charles Dickens l mt trong nhng nh vit tiu thuyt ln nht th gii, thuc tr-ng phi hin thc ph phn th k 19. iu m chng ta nh gi cao v nhng tc phm ca Dickens l s ph phn v ti c v s t-ng phn gia giu v ngho ca x hi t- sn Anh lc by gi. Th gii m ng ta miu t l th gii ca giai cp trung l-u v h l-u Lun n. - nh vit tiu thuyt : novelist - tr-ng phi hin thc ph phn : the school of critical realism - nh gi cao : to value/ highly appreciate - s ph phn : criticism - ti c : evil - s t-ng phn : contrast - giu v ngho : wealth and poverty - x hi t- sn Anh : the English boutgeois society - giai cp trung l-u v h l-u : the middle and lower classes 9. Hi Lin Hip Ph v ch tch hi -c Hi ng B Tr-ng iu l lin quan n N Vit Nam -c c i din Quc Hi quyn tham d cc cuc hp th-ng k ca by t quan im ca Hi v ngh nhng ph n.

- Hi Lin Hip Ph N Vit Nam : The Vietnams Women Union - c i din : to be represented - Quc Hi : the National Assembly - -c quyn lm g : to have the right to do something - cuc hp th-ng k : regular meeting - Hi ng B Tr-ng : the Council of Ministers - by t quan im : express ones points of view - iu l : regulations 10. Gia nh Vit Nam chu nh h-ng r rt ca nn vn minh nng nghip. Do chnh sch m ca, nn vn minh cng nghip ang tc ng tng ngy, tng gi vo cuc sng gia nh Vit Nam. - chu nh h-ng : to be affected by

21 - nn vn minh nng nghip : agricultural civilization - chnh sch m ca : the open-door policy - tc ng tng ngy tng gi : to have daily and hourly impact /influence on

LESSON 3:

STEPS IN A TRANSLATION PROJECT

Before beginning an actual translation, it is important to have in mind the total translation project and what is involved in producing a good translation. Each of these steps will be elaborated on in more detail in the last section of the book.

1.Establishing the project

Before one considers beginning a translation project, there are a number of matters which need to be clearly understood by all who will be involved. These can be summarized under four Ts- the text, the target, the team, and the tools. The text refers to the source language document which is to be translated. The desirability of translating a particular text must be determined. Texts are chosen to be translated for various reasons. Most often it is to communicate certain information to people speaking another language, or it may be to share the enjoyment of the source text. The translator should examine his reasons for choosing the text and the potential for its use by the receptor language audience. The target refers to the audience. For whom is the translation prepared? The form of translation will be affected by questions of dialect, educational level, age level, bilingualism, and peoples attitudes towards their languages. Will it be used in school, in business, or read orally in a meeting or at home? The team refers to the people who will be involved in the project. If a person is a competent speaker of both the source language and the receptor language, it may be that the project can be done completely by one person. But even so there should be other available for evaluation and consultation. Most translation projects require a team, a number of people who are going to contribute to the translation at some stage in the project. The working relationship between these people needs to be established before the project gets underway. It may, however, also change as the project moves along and new factors come into focus. There are certain essentials to any translation project. Not all these need to be found in one person. There are various kinds of programs which may be set up depending on the abilities and backgrounds of those who will be involved. The team may consist of 1. co-translators, where one is a specialist in the source language and the other a specialist in the receptor language, or 2. a translator with capability to handle both source language and receptor language matters and an advisor or consultant, or 3. a committee working together with specific responsibilities delegated to each one. Which kind of program is developed will depend on who is available and qualified to determine the meaning of the source language, who is most skilled at drafting in the receptor language, and who has an understanding of translation principles. The team may include the translators, a consultant, testers, and reviewers.

22 Tools refer to the written source materials which will be used by the translators as helps. These include, in addition to the document to be translated, any dictionaries, lexicons, grammars, cultural descriptions. etc.. .. of both the source language and receptor language which are available. The team will want as much in formation available as possible while translating. All of these tools should be brought to the translation site in preparation for the project. For some projects, there will be a wealth of materials that can be used to help in interpreting the source language text and in finding equivalents in the receptor language. For other projects, there may be a scarcity of such material, but whatever is available should be there to make the work easier.

2. Exegesis
Exegesis is used to refer to the process of discovering the meaning of the source language text which is to be translated. It is the step which includes the preparation and analysis which must be done before anything at all can be written in the receptor language. The text must be understood completely. This is the process which takes place in moving from the source language form to the meaning of the text. The translator should begin by reading the text several times, then by reading other materials that may help in understanding the culture or language of the source text. As he reads the text, he will be looking for the authors purpose and the theme of the text. He will look for the larger groupings or sections. He may want to outline the text. The purpose is to understand the text as a whole. Once he has done this, he is ready to work on the material a section at a time. The analysis of the source text will include resolving ambiguity, identifying implicit information, studying key words, interpreting figurative senses, recognizing when words are being used in a secondary sense, when grammatical structures are being used in a secondary function, etc. It will involve doing the kind of analysis which this book is all about. The goal of exegesis is to determine the meaning which is to be communicated in the receptor language text. The translator carefully studies the source language text and using all the available tools, determines the content of the source language message, the related communication situation matters, and all other factors which will need to be understood in order to produce an equivalent translation. 3. Transfer and initial draft After a careful analysis of the source language text, as indicated above, the translator begins drafting piece by piece, section by section. The transfer results in the initial draft. In preparing this draft, the translator is transferring from the source language into the receptor language. As he does so, he must always keep his target audience in mind. Before any extensive drafting can be done, the key terms must be determined. Every text has a set of words which re crucial to the content and correct communication of the theme. These need to be decided upon and may need to be checked with other speakers of the receptor language. There are two ways of approaching the transfer and initial draft. Some translators prefer to do a quick rough translation so that the material flows naturally. Then they go back and tighten up the details to be sure that there is no wrong information, and no omissions or additions. In this way, the receptor language text is more apt to be in the natural style of the receptor language. Others prefer to prepare a proposition-like semantic draft, being sure that all the information all the information is accounted for, and then reword it for naturalness; that is,

23 reword it in the idiomatic form of the receptor language. Either method will lead to an idiomatic translation if careful work is done. It may be necessary to rework the initial draft several times before the team is satisfied that all the adjustments needed have been made, that no information is wrong or omitted, that the text communicates clearly in the receptor language, and that the form chosen will communicate to the desired audience. While making and reworking this draft, the audience must always be kept in mind. Once the translation team has sufficiently reworked the initial draft, they arrange for copies to be made so that adequate evaluation. 4. Evaluation The purpose of evaluation is threefold: accuracy, clearness, and naturalness. The questions to be answer are: 1. Does the translation communicate the same meaning as the source language? 2. Does the audience for whom the translation is intended understand it clearly? 3. Is the form of the translation easy to read and natural receptor language grammar and style? Those helping with the evaluation should be mother-tongue speakers of the receptor language. There are a number of kinds of evaluations which need to be done. The translator will want to compare the translation with the source text at several points during the translation process to be sure no additions, deletions or change of in formation have crept in . Others may help with this work. It is especially advantageous to have a consultant check over the material. The translator will want to have receptor language speakers read the text and then tell back what the text communicated to them. As they read, there will be parts that are hard to read or hard to understand. Any time there is an indication of a problem in reading , this should be noted for further checking . Another way to check is by asking questions of those who read the text , or to whom it is read. Questions need to be carefully formed so that they bring out the theme, the authors purpose , and the relevant facts of the text. Any wrong understanding should be noted and then checked with others as well. It is best to have someone who has not worked on the translation, but know both the source language and receptor language, translate back from the receptor language into the source language without the reference to the original source language text. Does the back translation carry the same information as the original source language text? Any difference will need to be checked further. It is very important that sufficient time and effort be given to evaluation. If many of the people who will eventually be using the receptor language text can be involved in the evaluation process, this will also create interest in the translated material when it is finally published.

5. Revised
After evaluation is done carefully, there will need to be a revised draft made on the basis of the feedback received. Those with whom the translator has checked may have suggested many rewordings, may have expressed misunderstanding, etc. The translation team now works through this material , honestly accepting the evaluation , and rewording the material accordingly. If any key words are changed, the text will need to be checked carefully for consistency in the change made. If some parts were hard for people to read, they may need to be made easier by more redundancy( or less redundancy in another language), by adding more information to clarify participants or theme or whatever. How much re-drafting will be needed will vary depending on the results of the evaluation.

6. Consultation

24 In many translation projects, there are advisors or consultants who are willing to help the translator. The translator(s) will expect that the consultant is interested in three matters:1.accuracy of content 2. naturalness of style, and 3. effect on the receptor language audience. It is important that translators check their materials with a trained consultant after completing a section or two of a long document. If they continue , and do large amounts of translation work without this kind of a check, they will miss out on the training which a consultant can give as they go over the material together. Asking a consultant to work through the material with him will give the translator insights which will not only help his final draft of the material being worked on, but will help him do better transfer drafts on the sections of the document remaining to be done.

7. Final draft
The translator incorporates into the translated text the suggestions made by the consultant, checks them again with mother-tongue speakers to be sure they are warranted, and makes any other minor changes which have come to his attention. However, before he prepares the final draft, decisions about format need to be discussed with the whole translation team, the consultant, the potential publisher and those who will promote distribution. Some matters may need special testing before the final draft is prepared. If the publication is to include pictures, these will need evaluation. If a special size of print is being recommended, it will need to be tested. A final editing for spelling and punctuation will need to be made. When all matters are cared for, a number of copies should be prepared and distributed for proofreading by various people before the actual printing takes place. Every translator wants his final copy to be as accurate as possible. The time spent in careful checking and preparation of the final draft will improve quality and will make the translation more acceptable to the audience for whom it is being prepared.

8. Notes
Target: Target language audience: Dialect: Educational level: Bilingualism: To come into focus: Co-translator: Specialist: Tools: Lexicon: Exegesis: Initial draft: Revised draft: c gi ng-i c bn dch ph-ng ng trnh hc vn song ng ch / tp trung ng-i cng dch chuyn gia ti liu tham kho khi dch t in t vng hiu ngha vn bn tr-c khi dch bn tho u tin bn tho d-c hiu nh

25

9. Self-study
9.1 Questions for discussion 1. Name and discuss the four Ts of a translation project. 2. Explain what is meant by exegesis. 3. What are the goals of the translator as he prepares the initial draft? 4. What is the purpose of the evaluation? 5. What kinds of evaluation checks can be made? 6. What is the consultant concerned about when he checks a translation? 7. How will the final draft be different from the revision draft done earlier? 8. How is the revision draft different from the initial draft? 9.2 Exercises A. Read the English text and answer the questions.

DEFORESTATION
Population growth is one factor in rainforest destruction. However, it is a myth to assume that the expansion of subsistence agriculture to feed more mouths is the main factor. The majority of deforestation in Latin America, South-east Asia and the Pacific is caused by clearing land to grow cash crops for export and by commercial logging operations, and not by shifting cultivators or landless peasants. Each year commercial logging eliminates 45000 square kilometers of forest, much of the timber being exported to the United States and Japan. No clearer connection between deforestation and the demands of affluent societies can be found than in Central America and Brazil, where tropical forest has been converted to grazing land because cattle raising offers export earnings that help with external debt payments. These heavy payments, which affect the poor the most, have arisen largely from external loans taken out to finance the purchase of luxury items and arms by military and governing elite. The establishment of large ranch-style cattle grazing properties is the principal reason for the elimination of 20000 square kilometers of rainforest each year in Central or South America. The cleared land is mainly devoted to the export of beef for the fast-food industries in North America, Europe and Japan- the aptly named hamburger connection. 1. What is the authors purpose of writing this text? 2. What is the text about? 3. How many times have you read the text to understand it completely? 4. Do you have any difficulty in finding the Vietnamese meaning of the English words : subsistence agriculture, cash crops, commercial logging operations, shifting cultivators, landless peasants, affluent society, external debt payment, military and governing elites, ranch-style cattle grazing property, hamburger connection ? 5. Do you have any difficulty in finding the equivalent Vietnamese structures of the following English sentences? a. However, it is a myth to assume that the expansion of subsistence agriculture to feed more mouths is the main factor.

26 b. No clearer connection between deforestation and the demands of affluent societies can be found than in Central America and Brazil, where tropical forest has been converted to grazing land because cattle raising offers export earnings that help with external debt payments. 6. Translate the text into Vietnamese. B. Read the Vietnamese text and answer the questions.

NON NC
Cha ng ta ung n-c sng Hng, Sng , Sng Cu Long v tng sng cht vi sng n-c ny. Cc bn th ngh xem rt t ngn ng trn th gii li c s thng nht nh- ting m ca chng ta. Vit Nam th n-c( trong sng, h, bin.) li ng ngha, ng m vi n-c trong ngha t quc qu h-ng. Sng n-c v con ng-i y kt hp vi thin nhin v lch s nh- mt khi bt t bt dit bi mt th xi mng tr-ng tn. l lng yu n-c th-ng ni ca dn tc Vit Nam. Trn th gii, c nhiu quc gia t tnh n sang tnh kia ni l khng hiu nhau ri. Nh-ng Vit Nam, d bt k u, ng-i Nam k Bc, h gp nhau ln u ni l hiu nhau ngay. 1. What is the authors purpose of writing this text? 2. What is the text about? 3. How many times have you read the text to understand it completely? 4. Do you have any difficulty in finding the English meaning of the Vietnamese words : cha ng, sng cht, s thng nht, kt hp cht ch, xi mng tr-ng tn, lng yu n-c th-ng ni, hiu nhau? 5. Do you have any difficulty in finding the equivalent English structures of the following Vietnamese sentences? a. Cc bn th ngh xem rt t ngn ng trn th gii li c s thng nht nh- ting m ca chng ta. b.Nh-ng Vit Nam, d bt k u, ng-i Nam k Bc, h gp nhau ln u ni l hiu nhau ngay. 6. Translate the text into English.

27

LESSON 4:

STRATEGIES FOR TRANSLATORS

The following strategies have been suggested by translators, commissioners of translations, and others involved in translating as ways to approach difficulties in translations from English into Vietnamese.

1. STRATEGY 1 : How to deal with non-equivalence at lexical level

It is often the case that no direct equivalents can be found in Vietnamese for English words. It may be that the concept or idea is new to Vietnamese translators, as in the case of gender, which is, in fact, a relatively new concept in general, and a very difficult concept to understand and explain in many languages. It may also be that the concept is known or understood but there is no specific word in Vietnamese used to express it. Another difficulty is that, in addition to their concrete meaning, some words have special connotations that are not conveyed by the Vietnamese word for the same thing. The strategies listed below can be used to handle cases of non-equivalence. 1.1 Translating by a more specific word In some cases, it may be appropriate or necessary to use a more specific word to translate an English word into Vietnamese. This usually involves choosing among several different words, as there may be many Vietnamese words that correspond to the general category or meaning expressed by English word. For instance, Vietnamese has many words that mean to carry with distinction being made depending on the size and shape of the object; its animate ( e.g. a child as opposed to a box); and how it is carried (e.g. in the hand, or in the arms...). Similarly, the English word for rice can be translated by many different Vietnamese words, depending on whether one is planting it, harvesting it, cooking it, or eating it. In these cases, the English word alone is not enough to determine the appropriate Vietnamese translation, and it is necessary to examine the English context. 1.2 Translating by a more general word In other cases, it may be appropriate to use a more general word to translate an English word with no specific Vietnamese equivalent. For example, English makes distinctions among mopeds, scooters, and motorcycles, the latter having larger wheels and engines than both mopeds and scooters. Vietnamese, on the one hand, refers to all two-wheel, motorized vehicles as xe my. Similarly, the English words paw, foot, or leg may all be translated by the Vietnamese word chn, which does not suggest any problems of comprehension in Vietnamese, as it should be clear from the context which of these words is meant. Another example can be found in a manual on community development, which translates the word matrix by the Vietnamese word ma trn. However, in Vietnamese, ma trn has a specific use in mathematics only, and does not have the additional sense of a model or a plan according to which something is developed. In this example, matrix is better translated bn, which is a more general word used to classify a written plan or formula. 1.3 Translating by cultural substitution This strategy involves replacing a culture-specific item or expression with one of the different meanings but similar impact in the translated text. Because of their self-described respect

28 for the original text, most Vietnamese translators object to this strategy and tend to translate directly, even though it is in appropriate. For example, a farmers manual that has been translated into Vietnamese suggests the planting of different types of fruit trees which are not even grown in Vietnam. The original manual, which was developed in other parts in Asia, was not modified at all for the Vietnamese context. Though some translators argue that it is not the responsibility of the translator to chance the text in this way, the translator is in fact playing an important role in this task. Translators should be encouraged to consider the appropriateness of the documents they are translating and suggest changes to make them more culturally appropriate. However, this is not only the burden of the translator, but also of the commissioners of the translation and the editor. 1.4 Translating by using a loan word plus explanation There is some objection to this strategy in Vietnam, as many translator prefer to coin new words in Vietnamese rather than borrow English words. However, this strategy is very useful when the translator deal with concepts or ideas that are new to Vietnamese audience, culturespecific items, and proper names of diseases or medicines that are widely known in English names. For instance, HIV and AIDS are two loan words that are frequently used in Vietnamese, as they are referred to by their English names in almost every part of the world. Because these words have been in common used in Vietnam for a long time, they are often used without any accompanying explanation. Whenever a loan word is used , it is better to give an explanation. Another example is the acronym for oral dehydration salts, or ORS, which is printed on every package and hence easily recognized; this is normally written in English with an explanation in Vietnamese : ORS (mui b mt n-c) 1.5 Translating by using a paraphrase This strategy can be used when we translate an English word or concept that does not exist in Vietnamese, or when the Vietnamese term for it does not include all the meanings conveyed by the English term for the same concept. For example, in the sentence: Pregnant women should avoid alcohol., the English alcohol includes all alcoholic drinks in its meaning. The Vietnamese word ru does not include beer in its definition, so the Vietnamese translation should add the word beer to reflect the full meaning of the source language sentence. Another example is that the English words abuse and neglect signify a whole range of behaviors, some of which are not conveyed by the Vietnamese words alone. As a result, the English sentence: Children should be protected from abuse and neglect. cannot be translated as simply as tr em nn -c bo v khi s lm dng v l l.. This translation does not account for their full meaning , which must be unpacked for better understanding. This can be done by paraphrasing as a translator has attempted in the following translation: tr em cn bo v chng li mi hnh thc bo lc, gy tn th-ng hay xc phm, b mc hoc xao nhng trong vic chm sc. Back translated roughly into English, this sentence reads, : Children must be protected from all forms of violence causing harm or offense, and from abandonment and negligence in their care. 1.6 Translating by omission Though some translators may reject this strategy as too drastic, it is sometimes appropriate to omit words or phrases that are not essential to the meaning or impact of the text. This is especially true for words that would require lengthy explanations, awkward paraphrases, or literal and unnatural translations, which would interrupt the flow of the text and could distract

29 the reader from the overall meaning. For example, the sentence Much can be done even without being physically present in the meeting. is best translated into Vietnamese by, nhiu vic c th lm ngy c khi khng c mt ti cuc hp which omit the word physically in the translation. The difference in meaning between being physically present and being present is so minimal that it does not justify translation into Vietnamese, which cannot easily express the slight emphasis implied here by the author, and would not do so by emphasizing the physicality of a persons presence.

STRATEGY 2 : How to deal with idioms and set expressions

Idioms and set expressions can be dealt with in the ways similar to those mentioned above. With idioms, however, there is another difficulty that the translator may not realize that s/he is dealing with an idiomatic expression, since more idioms may make sense when translated literally. 2.1 Using an idiom or a set expression of similar meaning and form It is sometimes possible to find a Vietnamese idiom or expression with a similar meaning to an English idiom or expression, and which is expressed in the same way. One example is the idiom to fight like cats and dogs, which is expressed using the same words in Vietnamese: ci nhau nh- ch vi mo.; another is Better than never., which is translated : Th mun cn hn khng n. It is ideal if such a match can be found, but this kind of correspondence is not common, and it is usually necessary to use other strategies in dealing with idioms and set expressions. 2.2 Using an idiom or a set expression of similar meaning but different form It is possible and easy to find a Vietnamese idiom with a similar meaning for an English idiom or set expression. A good example can be found is the translation for to carry coals to Newcastle: Ch ci v rng." ,which is translated as to carry firewood to the forest. The meaning here is clearly the same for both idioms- to bring something to a place that has an abundance of that thing- but the way in which each language expresses is bound to be the culture of that language. It is far more cumbersome to translate this idiom literally into Vietnamese with an explanation that Newcastle is a well-known coal-producing city in England (as was suggested by some Vietnamese translators), which would unduly interrupt the flow of the text and greatly diminish the idioms impact. By substituting a similar Vietnamese idiom, then, the flow and the impact of the source text are retained in the translation. 2.3 Translating by paraphrasing When Vietnamese equivalents cannot be found, paraphrasing may be the best way to deal with an idiom or set expression in English. A good example can be found in an article on maternal mortality, which includes the sentence, But before the new estimates replace the old as a way of packaging up the problem, it should be said that a mistake has been made in allowing statistics such as these to slip into easy language. The expression packaging up the problem caused the problems in translation, as it was misinterpreted to mean assembling or gathering. However, even if this phrase were clearly understood, it would be difficult to find a precise equivalent in Vietnamese. In fact, it would be difficult to restate concisely in English. This phrase is best dealt with by paraphrasing, which in English could be understood as something like summing up the problem by referring to it simply as a number, which does

30 not reflect its true magnitude or impact. The expression to slip into easy usage is problematic for the same reasons, and is also best dealt with by paraphrasing, as a literal translation into Vietnamese would be meaningless. 2.4 Translating by omission This strategy could be used when we translate words or phrases that would require lengthy explanations, awkward paraphrases, or literal and unnatural translation. This strategy has also be used when we translate phases which has two meanings one of the meanings may be sacrificed for the other. For instance, a book entitled Being Positive-Living with HIV/AIDS causes problems in translate because of the double meaning of being positive. The meaning of the phrase could be that a person is suffering from positive HIV and that s/he should have an optimistic outlook on life. This may be clear to the translator , who may interpret the phrase to mean that this book is for and about people who are HIV positive. However, the double meaning should be made clear through collaboration with the commissioner, after which a choice must be made between the two meanings, for it would not be possible to translate both meanings by one Vietnamese phrase. As the emphasis is on positive outlook on life but not on the fact of being HIV positive, one translator has suggested the translation: Hy Sng Yu i D Nhim HIV. This translation expresses the notion of being positive about life without mentioning anything about being HIV positive status.

STRATEGY 3 : How to deal with voice, number and person

2.1 Voice The passive voice is used very often in English and poses some problems in Vietnamese translation. Passive voice can be translated from English into Vietnamese in the following ways: a. English : Vietnamese: A is/was/has been done by B (i) A -c+ ng t+(bi B) A -c/do+(B)+ng t (ii) A b +ng t + bi B

A b +(B) + ng t Example: This house was built by Frank in 1930 NgI nh ny do Frank xy nm 1930

Tom is given a present by Mary Tom -c Mary tng mt mn qu

31

Tom was attacked by a stranger last night Tom b mt k l mt tn cng ti hm qua

b.English : Vietnamese:

A is/was/has been done. (i) (ii) (iii) A -c+ ng t A b+ ng t Ng-i ta/ai + ng t + A

Example: Tom has been promoted recently. Tom mi -c bt gn y. The CD has been broken. Chic a CD b v/ Ai lm v chic a CD. The positive and negative connotation is not often conveyed in English, so it is difficult to know what way used to translate into Vietnamese. Example: The children were given injections.

Vietnamese translation : Cc chu -c tim., or Cc chu b tim. depending on whether the receiving injection is considered a positive or negative experience. On the other hand, when the positive or negative connotation of the sentence is clear it is more appropriate to retain the passive voice in Vietnamese. Example: The HMong people do not like to be called Meo. They prefer to be called HMong. Vietnamese: Mo. H Ng-i dn tc H Mng khng thch b gi l dn thch -c gi l dn tc H Mng. tc

In Vietnamese, there are some cases where one can see the words -c/b but they are not translated into English passive sentences at all. Example: - Anh y b ng. : - Ch Lan b ho. : He fell. Lan has a cough.

- Hm nay chng ta -c nh chn no n.

32 We had and enormous meal today. 2.2 Number Though both languages have similar notions of number and countability, each language has its own way to express these notions. In English, number is expressed as a grammar category; that is, there are different grammatical forms for singular and plural nouns. In Vietnamese, however, no such distinction is grammatically made. Example : Ph n: can mean either woman or women

In Vietnamese, some plural markers such as cc, nhng, tt c, mi" ,mi can be used in addition to the noun. cc generally means all of the given category of things, whereas nhng refers only to some of the total number of things being discussed. Mi emphasizes the identity of the individual member of the category without indicating anything of their totality; mi expresses both the individuality of the items and the totality of the category. If it is clear from the English context which of these plural markers should be used in the Vietnamese, then the translator should choose accordingly. 2.3 Person Participants roles and forms of address are expressed in Vietnamese through a very complicated system of personal pronouns based largely on kinship terms. Unlike English pronouns, Vietnamese pronouns bear a number of semantic components depending on the relationship within a family, age, sex, familiarity, social status, and even ones particular mood or attitude in a given situation. These distinctions are not always explicitly expressed in English and can usually be determined by the context in which the language operates. If it is not possible to determine the distinctions of the English pronouns, the attention should be focused on the tone and the overall purpose of the text to be translated. Example: A book on health-care contains many sections written especially for children and adults. In the sections for children the pronoun you is translated as em or cc em. In the sections for adults, you should be translated as chng ta .

4. STRATEGY 4 : How to deal with non-subject sentences ( Vietnamese- English translation)

The following techniques could be used to translate the non-subject sentences in Vietnamese texts: 4.1. Passive voice 4.2. It + to be + Adj + to infinitive 4.3. There + to be... 4.4. Use the subject that is found in the previous sentence(s) Example: Cn y mnh cng nghip ha, hin i ha.

33 Industrialization promoted. Or: It is modernization necessary to promote industrialization and and modernization should be

Vn ch-a c cch cha khi bnh AIDS. There has been no cure for AIDS.

5. STRATEGY 5 : How to deal with newspaper headlines

Some main follows. characteristics of newspaper headlines are as

5.1. Present tense = past events 5.2. Present participle = event in progress 5.3. To infinitive = future events 5.4. Past participle = passive voice 5.5. Nouns 5.6. Verb + noun Example: 1. Chinese Professors Turn To Business Cc gio s- Trung Quc chuyn sang kinh doanh 2. US President Visiting Vietnam Tng thng Hoa K ang thm Vit Nam 3. Oil Price To Rise? Gi du s tng 4. 5. 6. Three More Investment Projects Licensed This Year Investment Boom See You In Court Hn gp ti ta Thm ba d n u t- na -c cp giy php trong nm nay Bng n u t-

LESSON 5:

PATTERNS AND SOURCES OF ERRORS MADE BY VIETNAMESE TRANSLATORS

What is mother tongue interference in translation? In the narrow definition, interference in translation takes place when apparently, any feature of the source language notably a syntactic structure, a lexical item, and idiom, a metaphor,

34 word order or culture is carried over or literally translated as the case may be into the target language(TL) text. In a wider definition, interference includes cases when sentence length, punctuation, proper names, culture words are evidently transferred in the translation in fact all cases where the language of the translation is manifestly affected whether appropriately or not by the language of the original. When the mother tongue interference is an error, a false friend, a sign of the translators ignorance, a mark of the effect of the source language (SL) or the SL culture, it can be categorized as follows.

1. LINGUISTIC ERRORS
The linguistic errors can be divided into the following groups:

35

1.1 Lexical Errors Lexical interference traps are common enough but more invidious are innocent looking collocations which appear to make sense until one asks oneself what they mean in particular context. E.g. in English to cook an account translated as nu s sch is meanigless and it must be translated as gi mo s sch. Lexical interference is very dangerous because it can distort the meaning of a sentence. 1.1.1 Context The context itself determines the meaning of words. Therefore, their meaning should be solved in the context. It is commonly known that a word may have equivalents and accordingly the analysis of its meaning has to be made carefully in order to pick out the most appropriate word. There are many ways of translating of some nouns related to professions, classes, fields in society. For example, in a text written about Buddhism in which there are two words clergy and death. Some translated transferred clergy as gio s and death as ci cht for Buddha. It sounds strange and funny. In fact, clergy translated as gio s for Catholicism but gii tng for Buddhism. The word death is normally translated as ci cht but vua bng h in Kings death and as for Buddhism this word should be translated as vin tch. When translators are asked to translate these sentences into English a. Kha Lun B tm ra Tn th gii vo nm 1842. b. Ti ang tm cun sch. c. Michael Faraday tm ra my pht in. Obviously, there are many equivalents in English for the word tm such as seek, look for, search for, find, find out. In addition, there are two more words related to this meaning: to invent and to discover. However, in sentence (1) the word tm has an equivalent in English as discover. In sentence (2) the word tm is understood as look for, search for or seek. In sentence (3) the word tm has an equivalent as invent. The three above-mentioned sentences can be translated as follows. 1. The New World was discovered by Christopher. 2. I am looking for my book. 3. Michael Faraday invented the generator. It is characteristic of word that a single lexical item may have several meanings. For example, the word head in isolation means something like the upper part of the body. But the same word used in the context of talking about a company or an organization has nothing to do with the human body though the idea of the upper position of something still remains. Example: 1. He is the former head of the Chemistry Section of the Australian Atomic Energy Commission. ( leader) 2. Although he is the head of the company, he has no head. ( leader-intelligence)

36 The following examples show that the translators do not treat words in context but rely on the meaning in dictionary: 1. In 1999, some major commodities were stockpiled because of poor quality. It is not accurate at all when stockpiled was translated l-u tr. In fact, due to poor quality, major commodities were not sold out leading to stockpile. Therefore, the sentence should be translated as Nm 1999 mt s mt hng ch yu b tn kho do cht l-ng km. 2. The Prime Minister has also assigned relevant agencies to formulate a law on industrial zones to provide a complete legal background/frame for the operation of Izs and EPZs in Vietnam. was translated Th t-ng b nhim nhng chnh sch thch hp -a ra lut v khu cng nghip cung cp mt bi cnh hon ton hp php cho cc hot ng ca khu cng nghip, khu ch xut Vit Nam. . This translation is quite vague in Vietnamese. In fact, a word in source language has many equivalents in target language. The word assign is equivalent with phn cng/ b nhim; relevant with thch ng, thch hp, c lin quan; agency with i l, c quan, chi nhnh; foundation nn mng, nn tng, c s. For this reason, in this context it should be chosen the most appropriate equivalents to create an idiomatic translation: Th t-ng giao cho cc c quan c lin quan ban hnh b lut v khu cng nghip nhm cung cp mt s c s php l hon chnh cho vic hot ng ca khu cng nghip v khu ch xut Vit Nam. In brief, the translators have a habit of translating literally and depending largely on the meaning in dictionary due to the mother-tongue interference. In order to avoid committing errors of context, words should be solved in context and the analysis of their meaning has to be made carefully to pick out the most appropriate equivalent. 1.1.2 Word collocation Word collocation consists of the associations a word acquires on account of the meanings of words which tend to occur in its environment. Each of language has its own principle in word collocation. For example, the word pretty often goes with girls and women, while the word handsome often goes with boys or men. Some translators do not realize this, which leads to wrong and funny collocation. For instance, in Vietnamese the word ung (drink) can go with many different kinds of liquid including water, beer, alcohol, medicine and even poison. However, in English these are clear distinction as follows: Drink beer/ water/ wine/ coffee. Take medicine/ poison. Another example indicates that in Vietnamese the word ni (say) can be collocated with li tm bit goodbye, li cho hi hello, di a lie, s tht the truth, ting Php French. However, in English it is quite different. Say hello/ goodbye/ yes/ no. Tell a lie/ the truth/ a story.

37 Speak English/ French/ Chinese. In Vietnamese, the word n can be collocated with many different nouns such as c(fish) chim ( bird), s- t (lion), gia sc (cattle). On the contrary, in English there are many words meaning n as follows. A flock of birds/ sheep: n chim/ cu A herd of cattle/ buffaloes: n gia sc/ tru A pack of dogs/ calves: n ch/ b A school of fish/ chickens: n c/ g A pride of lions/ deer : n s- t/ nai Similarly, the word decision can be collocated with many word such as to make/ to reach/ to arrive at/ to come to... a decision. The following examples show the wrong collocations of some translators: 1. Chnh ph tin thc hin nhiu bin php nhm ngn chn vic bun lu ma ty. (The government has made many measures to stop the drug smuggling.) 2. Chng ti phi hon thnh nhim v tr-c khi t kim tra cht l-ng sn phm. ( We have to complete our duty before the investigators control the product quality.) 3. Sau khi nghin cu th tr-ng, chng ti quyt nh -a ra th tr-ng mt sn phm gy n t-ng c sc cnh tranh vi hng ngoi nhp. (After making a market research, we decided to launch an impressive product which can compete against the imported ones.) 4. T khi M b lnh cm vn Vit Nam, nhiu n-c trn th gii x u t- vo cc lnh vc khc nhau. (Since the USA abolished the embargo against Vietnam many foreign countries have been investing in many different fields.) It is the mother tongue interference that leads to the mechanic collocation which is unacceptable in target language. In fact, each language has its own principles of word collocation. Neither English nor Vietnamese is an exception. As a result, the above-mentioned examples should be translated more accurately and idiomatically as follows. 1. The government has made many measures to stop the drug smuggling. should be corrected as The government has taken many measures to stop the drug smuggling. 2. We have to complete our duty before the investigators control the product quality. should be corrected We have to fulfill our duty before the investigators control the product quality.

38 3. After making a market research, we decided to launch an impressive product which can compete against the imported ones. should be corrected After doing a market research, we decided to launch an impressive product which can compete against the imported ones. 4. Since the USA abolished the embargo against Vietnam many foreign countries have been investing in many different fields. should be corrected Since the USA lifted the embargo against Vietnam many foreign countries have been investing in many different fields. In a word, it is inevitable for the translators to obey the principles of English and Vietnamese word collocations. In order to avoid this type of errors, the translator should read as many English books and magazines to take notes of collocated words under the English standard. 1.1.3 Misuse of personal pronouns and prepositions In Vietnamese, there are many ways to express the thoughts and feelings or attitude which differ from those in English. The social status, age, sex, and the family order are distinguished clearly and systematically. This is reflected in a distinguished clearly and systematically. This is reflected in a number of words for addressing such as c, ng, b, bc, c, ch, thm, d, d-ng, cu, anh, ch, ngi, qu v, my, em, .. such words are generally expressed by English people in one word you. The following examples show clearly that the translator sometimes do not master the relationship between the speaker and the hearer leading to a funny translation. A mother was taking care of her child in hospital. She said: I love you very much, dear. Which was translated as Em yu anh lm , c-ng . instead of M yu con lm, c-ng . In Vietnamese, each preposition has a fixed meaning which does not change regardless of the noun, adjective or verb proceeding it. On the contrary, the meaning of a preposition in English depends on its preceding word. This difference leads to errors in using prepositions of TL. For example, the Vietnamese preposition v can be expressed by different prepositions in English: a talk on history : be disappointed in : be interested in : lay emphasis/ stress on : be worried about : be proud of/ take pride in : be famous for : mt cuc ni chuyn v lch s tht vng v quan tm v nhn mnh v lo lng v t ho v ni ting v

instead of disappointed about, proud about, famous about as the translator may use. These are the typical errors made by the translators: 1. According to Mr Thien, his plant currently produces lubricants under the API (American Petroleum Institute) standards (Theo ng Thin th hin nay nh my ca ng ang sn xut du nhn d-i tiu chun ca

39 Vin xng du M.) 2. It is so easy to be misunderstood when talking on the phone. ( Ni chuyn trn din thoi th d b hiu nhm.) 3. Ta n Nhn Dn quyt nh kt n chng 15 nm v ti bun lu ma ty. (The Peoples Court decided to condemn them to 15 years imprisonment about the drug smuggling.) 4. L gio vin -u t trong nhiu nm, ng Nam c nhiu kinh nghim v vic ging dy hc sinh. (As a qualified teacher for many years, Mr.Nam is experienced about educating and teaching the pupils. 5. Chng ti thnh tht chia bun v vic ra i ca b bn. (We really condole with you about the loss of your father. As can be seen from the above-mentioned examples, the translators tended to choose the English prepositions basing on Vietnamese meanings without paying attention to their variations. These errors could be corrected as follows. 1. According to Mr Thien, his plant currently produces lubricants under the API ( American Petroleum Institute) standards should be translated (Theo ng Thin th hin nay nh my ca ng ang sn xut du nhn theo tiu chun ca Vin xng du M.) 2. It is so easy to be misunderstood when talking on the phone. is equivalent with (Ni chuyn qua in thoi th d b hiu nhm.) 3. Ta n Nhn Dn quyt nh kt n chng 15 nm v ti bun lu ma ty. should be translated (The Peoples Court decided to condemn them to 15 years imprisonment for the drug smuggling.) 4. L gio vin -u t trong nhiu nm, ng Nam c nhiu kinh nghim v vic ging dy hc sinh. should be translated (As a qualified teacher for many years, Mr Nam is experienced in educating and teaching the pupils. 5. Chng ti thnh tht chia bun v vic ra i ca b bn. should be translated (We really condole with you for the loss of your father. Due to the mother tongue interference, the translators found themselves in a confusing situation when they use prepositions n English. In order to avoid this type of errors the translators should learn the prepositions going with nouns, adjectives or verbs by heart. If they do not know how to use prepositions exactly, they tend to the Vietnamese ones into English or vice versa. As a result, the translators should be provided with as many structures with

40 prepositions systematically as possible to help them take notes and draw out the formation and rules. 1.1.4 Misuse of synonyms Some translators depend largely on the meaning in dictionary picking out the synonyms without paying much to the context. In fact, the pairs of synonyms share at least one sense in common but do not share all their senses. To some extent, they can hardly substitute for each other. The misuse of synonyms makes the meaning of one of the following sentences unacceptable. You have my deep/ profound sympathy.( acceptable) The river is deep.( acceptable) The river is very profound. (unacceptable) Another example shows that some translators do not realize the connotational meaning, which leads to the distorting of the meaning of the sentence. Take famous(ni ting) and notorious (kht ting) as an example. While famous means well-known/ celebrated, and therefore contains some features of positive meaning, notorious means well-known especially for unfavorable reason & negative meaning. The following can be seen as the misuse of the synonyms by some of the inexperienced translators. 1. Cu b ny rt b-ng bnh. (This boy is very stubborn/unyielding.) ( right) 2. Ng-i Vit Nam c tinh thn bt khut. (The Vietnamese people are really stubborn.) (wrong) 3. Chnh ph c k hoch xy hng ngn ngi nh cho ng-i v gia c-. (The government plans to build thousands of homes for homeless people.) ( wrong) In Example 1 stubborn synonymous to unyielding means cng u/b-ng bnh in Vietnamese. In Example 2 stubborn fails to evoke the features of positive meaning which praises the Vietnamese people on their heroism expressing the speakers admiration. In contrast, it expresses the speakers anger and discontent. In Example 3 home and house are places where one lives, meaning nh in Vietnamese. However, in terms of the connotational meaning they are quite different. House refers to the building or structure while home refers to the atmosphere or feeling found in the house. Example: - There is no place like home. (Chng c ni u nh- nh.) - Home is where the heart is. (Nh l ni con tim tr ng.)

41 Most of the synonyms have the same meaning in certain context. If a translator use synonyms without referring to the context,(s)he can make wrong & funny for his readers. In order to avoid the misuse, the translator should carefully take the synonyms into consideration before using them. In addition, it would be better for the translator to consider the differences of the pairs of synonyms when translating. 1.1.5 Idioms & terminologies The meanings of idioms are not definitely related to grammatical rules or the lexical meaning of each word because they feature the metaphor and figures of speech. For example, wet blanket should be translated ng-i ru r instead of ci chn -t or to read ones palm translated as xem ch tay instead of c ci g lng bn tay. In fact, idioms can be translated satisfactorily by considering the context, if not, it is difficult to find the exact meaning. An English idiom must be translated into Vietnamese by an equivalent one. It is very important to be aware that we must not choose the equivalents of every word forming the idiom but we do find the equivalent ways of expression which exist in both languages. If we stick to each word, the meaning becomes strange, unnatural and funny. For instance, to sell like a hot cake is usually translated as bn t nh- tm t-i. Instead of bn nh- bnh nng. There is no time like present. is usually translated as vic hm nay ch ngy mai instead of khng c thi gian nh- by gi. Live and learn is usually translated as cn sng cn hc instead of sng v hc. The following errors were found in some of the translated texts and should be corrected. 1. Every time, we have our childrens birth certificates signed at the local Peoples committee, we have to go though a lot of red tape. was translated as Mi khi nh h k giy khai sinh ti y ban nhn dn ph-ng, chng ti phi i qua nhiu bng . 2. At first we intended to stay at home. On the second thought, we decided to go out. was translated as Thot u chng ti c nh nh. Trong ln suy ngh th hai chng ti quyt nh i ra ngoi. 3. She rarely saves her time to do her homework. She often lets the grass grow under her feet. was translated as C y him khi tit kim thi gian lm bi tp nh. C th-ng c mc d-i chn. The above-mentioned translations could be improved as follows. 1. Every time, we have our childrens birth certificates signed at the local Peoples committee, we have to go though a lot of red tape. should be translated as Mi khi nh h k giy khai sinh ti y ban nhn dn ph-ng, chng ti phi lm nhiu th tc giy t r-m r. 2. At first we intended to stay at home. On the second thought, we decided to go out. should be translated as Thot u chng ti c nh nh. Sau khi suy i tnh li, chng ti quyt nh i ra ngoi.

42 3. She rarely saves her time to do her homework. She often lets the grass grow under her feet. should be translated as C y him khi tit kim thi gian lm bi tp nh. C th-ng n-c n chn mi nhy. In addition to this, due to the limited knowledge of social background and some special fields, some translators mistranslated the terminologies causing vagueness, inaccuracy to readers. It is not very easy for some translators to translate the following terminologies if they are not familiar with business texts. - cash flow: - insurance policy: - acknowledgement: - credit terms: - hard currency: - marginal: gi bn) - total working capital: - sales promotion campaign: l-u l-ng tin mt hp ng bo him giy bo cho bit nhn -c nhng iu khon tn dng ng tin mnh bin t chnh lch gia gi mua v

tng s vn l-u ng chin dch khuyn mi

In conclusion, some inexperienced translators committed the lexical errors mentioned above including those of context, word collocation, prepositions, synonyms and idioms & terminologies. They are committed by those who have little knowledge of both source language(SL) and target language (TG). At the same time, they thought that although English is different from Vietnamese, both languages have a one-to-one correlation of lexical items. In practice, in terms of translation, it can be chosen the only one appropriate equivalent from this into that language. Even more, that equivalent hardly keeps the meaning of the word itself but that of context. In some dictionaries, the authors present series of synonyms of SL in comparison with TL. However, the synonyms are those of the context in which the are operating . Another problem is that some translators did not realize the linking meaning of word units. It is obvious that these units link together to create a larger unit of meaning in a given text to be translated. The linking meaning itself does not exist in separate word units but in the link of the units constituting the whole text. 1.2. Structural Errors Each language has its own division of lexicon into classes such as nouns, verbs, adjectives, adverbs, etc. It is not always possible to translate a SL noun with a noun in TL. In English, there is a tendency of using more nominal structures while verbal structures are used more in Vietnamese. Some translators keep the same structures when translating, leading to vagueness in TL texts. For example, Thank you for your pretty present. was translated as Cm n anh v mn qu ng yu. instead of Cm n anh tng em mn qu ng yu. In addition, there is also a tendency of using more passive constructions in English than in Vietnamese. For instance, The USA is said to be a powerful country. was translated as:

43 M -c ni l mt c-ng quc. instead of Ng-i ta ni rng M l mt c-ng quc. The following examples of structural errors were made by some of translators. 1. The Vietnamese Airlines has coped with difficulties due to the regional financial crisis. ( Hng khng Vit Nam gp phi nhng kh khn do cuc khng hong ti chnh vng trm trng.) 2. Schools teach mathematics because of its very important roles. ( Tr-ng hc dy ton v tm quan trng ca n.) 3. Thank you for your letter. ( Cm n l th- ca em. 4. Hue was recognized as the worlds cultural heritage by UNESCO in 1994. ( Hu -c xem l di sn vn ha th gii bi UNESCO vo nm 1994.) 5. I was rewarded with a trip to Nha Trang by my parents after a year of hard work. (Ti -c th-ng mt chuyn i n Nha Trang bi b m ca ti sau mt nm lm vic vt v.) The above-mentioned translations do not sound Vietnamese, lacking the coherence and smoothness, not conveying the desired meaning of the SL sentences. It would be more idiomatic to translate as follows. 1. Do nh h-ng ca cuc khng hong ti chnh trm trng trong khu vc, nn Hng Hng Khng VN phi -ng u vi nhng kh khn. 2. Tr-ng hc dy ton v ton hc ng vai tr rt quan trng. 3. Cm n em vit th- cho em. 4. UNESCO cng nhn Hu l di sn vn ha th gii vo nm 1994. 5. Sau mt nm hc hnh chm ch, b m th-ng cho ti mt chuyn du lch n thnh ph Nha Trang.

As can be seen from the examples mentioned above, some translators focused on the structures of SL so much that they fail to convey all the implicit meaning of TL. In fact, it is not necessary to keep the form at all. The most important thing is that the translations must be done on the basis of the TL grammar that is familiar to the readers. This principle suggests that the translator should not depend largely on the structures of the SL but break them , conveying the meaning as much as possible in an appropriate structures in the TL. Another problem is that some translators was not aware of the relationship between form and function of language. It is commonly known that in some languages, on function is expressed by many forms and vice versa. For example, in English the way of giving an advice could be expressed by a number of structures : Why dont you..?, You should/ ought to.., If I were

44 you, Id.., Youd better or I advise you to.. In addition, some translators did not realize the conversational implicature understood implicitly as follows. 1. Whats the time? ( Why are you so late?) 2. Are you my teacher? ( You want to teach me.) 3, Why dont we go to the cinema? ( a suggestion) 4. Why did you say so? ( You should not have said so) 5. Unless he has done the work to my satisfaction, I will not pay him for this.(If he has not done.) Those sentences should be translated as follows. 1. C bit my gi ri khng? 2. My i lm thy ca tao ? 3. Chng ta i xem phim h? 4. L ra anh khng nn ni nh- vy! 5. Nu hn khng lm vic va ti , th ng hng ti tr l-ng cho hn.

As mentioned in the previous part, the structural difference between the SL and the TL is likely to make it difficult for the translators. The translators were not aware of dividing or combining the sentences within a text to be translated. If they try to keep the same punctuation of the SL text, the correspondent TL text will have clumsy, run-together, long and complex sentences. It is much better to divide long sentences into short ones aiming at creating coherence, attraction for readers in the translations. These are the translated sentences with their structural errors made by some of inexperienced translators. 1. The dividing gap between the rich and the poor as well as corruption and social unrest caused by the relocation of people in industrialized areas, have made many people hesitate in further changes. (Khong cch ln gia ng-i giu v ng-i ngho cng nh- s tham nhng v tnh trng bt an ca x hi gy ra do s phn b li dn c- cc khu cng nghip lm cho nhiu ng-i phi do d khi chp nhn nhng thay i ln.)

2. It is also necessary to invest in increasing capability of battery production establishments to meet the demand for automobile and motorbike manufacturing and assembling in accordance with the localization program.

45 ( N cng rt cn thit u t- vo vic tng nng sut ca nhng c s sn xut c qui p ng nhu cu dy chuyn sn xut vo vic ch to t v xe my ph hp vi ch-ng trnh trong n-c.)

3. It takes much time to deliver goods to remote areas by backward means of transport. (N ly nhiu thi gian phn phi hng ha n cc vng xa xi bng cc ph-ng tin giao thng lc hu.)

All above translated sentences should be corrected as follows. 1. The dividing gap between the rich and the poor as well as corruption and social unrest caused by the relocation of people in industrialized areas, have made many people hesitate in further changes. (S thay i ch ti cc vng cng nghip ha lm cho khong cch gia ng-i giu v ng-i ngho cng nh- s tham nhng v tnh trng bt an ca x hi ngy cng ln. Chnh iu ny lm cho nhiu ng-i phi min c-ng nhng thay i ln hn na.) 2. It is also necessary to invest in increasing capability of battery production establishments to meet the demand for automobile and motorbike manufacturing and assembling in accordance with the localization program. ( u t- vo vic tng nng sut ca nhng c s sn xut c qui p ng nhu cu dy chuyn sn xut vo vic ch to t v xe my ph hp vi ch-ng trnh trong n-c l rt cn thit.) 3. It takes much time to deliver goods to remote areas by backward means of transport. ( Phi mt nhiu thi gian phn phi hng ha n cc vng xa xi bng cc ph-ng tin giao thng lc hu.)

In order to overcome this type of structural errors, the most effective way for translators is to master the structures of bot languages. It is clear that a translator who is proficient in English cannot help being good at Vietnamese and vice versa.

2. STYLE ERRORS
Styles play an important role informal translation and strongly affect the second language meaning. Due to the context, text-type and audience, the levels of language in translation can be different - the informal language used in informal situations ; colloquials used in spoken language; familiar language used among friends, relatives, members in a family; formal

46 language used in formal texts such as speeches in conference, legal documents, business letter & documents, research papers. The examples given below clearly indicate that the same massage could be expressed in different styles.

47

1. Drop me a line. 2. Remember to write me a letter. 3. I look forward to your letter. 4. They can escape from family suprvision. 6. They are completely armed. 7. They are armed to teeth.

( informal language ) ( neutral) ( informal language ) ( formal) ( formal) ( colloquial)

5. Their parents cant keep an eye on them. (colloquial)

Style error is an acute problem to the translators. There are translators did not master the difference when using various styles such as conversational, academic, scientific, literary styles. Many translators failed when coming across the unfamiliar styles due to being unaware of degrees of formality (informal or formal style), usage of vocabulary ( informal, colloquial, formal) These are some style errors taken out from some Vietnamese- English translations. 1. Nu chng ti t hng vi s l-ng ln, liu doanh nghip anh c bn vi gi r khng? (If we place substantial orders, can your enterprise get us with soft price?) It is impossible to use informal style in a business letter. Instead of using soft price , the translator should use cheaper price. 2. Thi tit Hu khng thch hp cho ng-i gi. Ma h tri nng nh- thiu t, trong khi ma ng lnh n x-ng ty. (The weather in Hue is favorable for the old. It is burning hot in summer while it chills to the bones in winter.) It is impossible to use informal style to tanslate a formal text. Instead of using burning hot , the translator should use exceedingly hot.

3. CULTURAL ERRORS
Culture could be understood as the total set of beliefs, attitude, customs, behaviour, social habits etc. of the member of a particular society. In the broad sense, it includes mode of production, production activities, community organization, spiritural life, knowledge of nature and society, emotions, and moral conceptions. Language is regarded as both a component of a culture and network through which other elements of culture operate. Language , therefore uses almost all other cultural elements so as to perfect its universal and self-sufficient nature. It could be said that we will not translate from this to that language perfectly unless we know its relation to its culture. It is common ly known that ao dai is a traditional costume of the Vietnamese women and we never find an equivalent word in English to translate ao dai. However, some translators translated mechanically ao dai into a dress. How funny it is! It would be preferredcto

48 writing down ao dai to express the cultural feature to making foreign people misunderstand ao dai asa dress. * Trang phc truyn thng ca ng-i ph n Vit Nam l chic o di t-ng tr-ng cho s duyn dng. should be translated as The traditional costume of the Vietnamese women is ao dai which symbolises the grace. Translation is a kind of activity which inevitably involves at least two languages and two cultural traditions." As this statement implies, translators are permanently faced with the problem of how to treat the cultural aspects implicit in a source text (ST) and of finding the most appropriate technique of successfully conveying these aspects in the target language (TL). These problems may vary in scope depending on the cultural and linguistic gap between the two (or more) languages concerned. The cultural implications for translation may take several forms ranging from lexical content and syntax to ideologies and ways of life in a given culture. The translator also has to decide on the importance given to certain cultural aspects and to what extent it is necessary or desirable to translate them into the TL. The aims of the ST will also have implications for translation as well as the intended readership for both the ST and the target text (TT). Considering the cultural implications for a translated text implies recognising all of these problems and taking into account several possibilities before deciding on the solution which appears the most appropriate in each specific case. Before applying these methods to the chosen text, this essay will examine the importance of culture in translation through a literature review. The different general procedures of treating the cultural implications for translation will be examined as well as analysing the ST and the aims of the author. The translation process will also be treated using specific examples found in the ST before discussing the success of aforementioned theoretical methods applied to the TT. Although corresponding to cultural categories examined, the title will be considered separately in order to determine the pertinence of conserving, highlighting, or excluding certain aspects. Due to these considerations, the title will be considered after the other aspects as all other cultural implications need to be examined before reaching relevant conclusions.

45

CHAPTER 2:
ASSIGNMENT 1:
I.THEORY:

ASSIGNMENTS

1. What is translation? What definition do you think is the most appropriate? Can you give your own definition of translation? 2. What is an idiomatic translation? Give some examples of idiomatic translations. 3. What are the secondary meanings? Give ten sentences, each of which contains a word used in a secondary sense. 4. What is the primary meaning? Give ten sentences, each of which contains a word used in a primary sense.

II. EXERCISES:
A. Identify change of meaning versus change of form. Some of the following pairs of sentences differ in their form. Some differ in meaning. Indicate if the primary change is in the form or in the meaning. Example: They robbed the old man. The old man was dropped by them. Answer: Change of form 1. The students like to study translation. The students like studying translation. 2. He saw the bird. He heard the cat. 3. Go to bed. I want you to go to bed. 4. I came; I saw; I conquered. I came, saw, and conquered. 5. The young man had an English grammar book stolen. An English grammar book was stolen from the young man. B. List as many grammatical forms as you can which realize the same meaning as the one given below. Then put the same meaning into a language other than English in as many forms as you can.

46 Example: The cat is black The black cat The cat, which is black 1. The water jug 2. John bought a car 3. A hot day 4. Mothers long blue dress 5. Peters house C. All of the following have the same grammatical form. With the change of lexical items, there is a change of meaning which is signaled by that lexical item, apart from the referential meaning of the word itself. What meaning is signaled in each of the following possessive phrases? Answer by restating. How can that meaning best be expressed in another language which you speak? Example: The mans car - the man owns the car The mans eye - the eye is part of the man 1. The doctors office 2. The doctors patient 3. The doctors book 4. The doctors brother 5. The doctors hand 6. The doctors house D. For each pair of sentences, state whether the two sentences are 1. the same in meaning or 2. different in meaning. 1. (a) It rained all night. (b) Rain fell all night. 2. (a) There is a book on the table. (b) There is a table on the book. 3. (a) John was very surprised when he heard the news. (b) The news very much amazed John when he heard it. 4. (a) It was a hot day. (b) The day was hot. 5. (a) Peters house (b) The house that belongs to Peter

47 6. (a) He remained silent. (b) He did not say anything. 7. (a) I bought cloth to make Mary a new dress. (b) I bought a new dress for Mary. 8. (a) My parents are well. (b) My mother and father are well. 9. (a) John is ill: he has a bad case of malaria. (b) John is very ill indeed. E. Translate the following sentences into English. 1. Ch may o s mi ny u vy? 2. Lt chim c mt vng t rng trn cao nguyn Lm Vin, xung quanh ton l ni i hng v. 3. Mc d a v ca ph n c nhng b-c tin k diu, nh-ng ng-i ta phi thc hin nhiu chuyn khc ci thin tnh trng sc kho, dinh d-ng v gio dc cho ph n. 4. Ngy nay th gii ang -ong u vi nhiu vn nghim trng cho d c nhiu b-c tin ng k trong lnh vc khoa hc, cng ngh v tri thc. Mt trong nhng vn l s bng n dn s, c bit cc n-c ang pht trin. Dn s ang tng theo cp s nhn trong lc sn xut hng ho li tng theo cp s cng. 5. Charles Dickens l mt trong nhng nh vit tiu thuyt ln nht th gii, thuc tr-ng phi hin thc ph phn th k 19. iu m chng ta nh gi cao v nhng tc phm ca Dickens l s ph phn v ti c v s t-ng phn gia giu v ngho ca x hi t- sn Anh lc by gi. Th gii m ng ta miu t l th gii ca giai cp trung l-u v h l-u Lun n.

ASSIGNMENT 2:
I.THEORY:
1. What are the differences between a literal translation and an idiomatic translation? 2. What grammatical features should be considered when you translate a text? Give some examples to support your ideas.

II. EXERCISES:
A. In each of the following pairs of sentences, which is more idiomatic English, a or b? How would the meaning be expressed idiomatically in the language you speak? 1. (a) The storekeeper said that we will refund your money. (b)The storekeeper promised to refund our money. 2. (a) A certain boy told me this little story at a party. (b) He is one boy. He told the one little story. This is a game he said.

48 3. (a) An International Alphabet would inevitably bring about a spelling reform as well. How many children have shed hot tears about spelling? (b) An International Alphabet would inevitably bring about a spelling reform,too. And how many hot childrens tears have not been shed on spelling? 4. (a) He then reported his misfortune to the police, who are searching diligently for the thief. (b) He then his mishap reported to the police, who are the thief searching intensively. B. Look for literalisms in the following translations into English and underline the words or phrases that do not sound natural in English. Suggest a more idiomatic way of saying it. All of these examples are from published translated material. 1. Foreign tourists usually at Kinh Do Hotel for their friends have introduced to them very much about this hotel. 2. Since the USA abolished the embargo against Vietnam, many foreign countries have been investing in Vietnam. 3. Hue is famous about its delicious dishes and beautiful landscapes. 4. The participants discussed about the causes of pollution environment. 5 . A robbery took place of a motorcycle rider at Kampung early yesterday morning. C. Each of the following are sentences written by some Vietnamese who are not yet fluent English speakers. The forms used shows examples of how their mother-tongue language structures have been carried over into English. The same information is then given in parenthesis in idiomatic English. What changes were made in correcting the English? These changes point out some of the differences between Vietnamese and English. 1. Sir, the problems of before dont forget. ( Sir, please dont forget the problems we discussed before.) 2. If there is any means, send me a letter to Saigon. (If there is any way to do so, send a letter to me in Saigon.) 3. I will think you time to time day and day. ( I will be thinking about you often every day.) 4. I am very grateful to inform you with this letter. ( I am very happy to be able to send/write you this letter.) 5. I am a man who has been to Hanoi for 12 years. ( I have now lived in Hanoi for 12 years.) D. Translate the following sentences into Englisgh. 1. Thc M l cng trnh thu in c cng sut thit k 150.000 Kw, sn l-ng in trung bnh hng nm 600 triu Kw gi.

49 2. xy dng cng trnh ny cn phi o p gn 15 triu m3 t , p hn 350.000 mt khi tng lc, khong 220.000 mt khi b tng ct thp v lp t gn 7.000 tn thit b v kt cu kim loi. 3. Vi khi l-ng cng vic ln nh- vy, nh-ng chnh ph quyt nh phi hon thnh vic thi cng trong hai nm do nhu cu cung cp in cho cc a ph-ng pha Nam tr nn ht sc cp bch. 4. T ngy khi cng n nay, cc n v thi cng thc hin -c khong 90% khi l-ng o t, khong 40% khi l-ng b cng ct thp. 5. Theo ng Nguyn B Mn, Tr-ng ban Qun l cng trnh, th hu ht cc hng mc cn bn u t ng yu cn v tin thi cng. 6. Trung tun thng 11/1993, Th t-ng V Vn Kit n kim tra tnh hnh thi cng cng trnh thu in thc M. 7. Nhng ng-i lnh o cng trnh khng nh vi Th t-ng rng c y c s m bo khi ng t my s 1 vo thng 6 nm 1994. 8. Vic chn dng sng B tin hnh vo thng 12 ny. 9. Nh- vy s c mt s trng hp c ngha l cng mt thi im vi vic khi ng t my s 1 thu in thc M, h thng ti in 500 Kw Bc Nam cng -c hon thnh. 10. Vi cc cng trnh ny, nm 1994, min Nam thot khi tnh trng i in. E. Translate the following sentences into Vietnamese 1. Although the state budget for teaching aids at schools of all levels has been icreased since 1990, it is still far below the demand to fully equip schools and improve training quality. 2. President Putin affirmed that Russia has always attacted importance to its relations with Vietnam, its traditional friend and stragic partner in Southeast Asia. 3. It is projected to extend integration opportunities to 3000 disabled children in three provinces, one in mountainous areas, one in the central coast and one in remote areas. 4. They discussed a series of measures intended to ensure comprehensive cooperation in economy, trade, science and technology. 5. Efforts are being made to raise womens awareness of their rights to have labour safety or hygiene conditions at work through an expanded communication network. 6. It is more likely that schools in the southern provinces have more computer labs used in teaching foreign languages than schools in the northern provinces. 7. There have been four foreign invested projects in education, with investment capital from the World Bank and the Asian Development Bank.

50 8. Of 50 foreign language students surveyed recently by the Vietnam Courier, 38 said they are not interested in working for foreign invested companies. 9. Vietnam and China agreed to set up negotiations for the signing of a land border agreement delineating the sea boundary in the Bac Bo ( Tonkin ) Gulf no later than 2000. 10. Most recently the government has offered incentives like tax reduction or preferential loans to employers who have employed a large number of women.

51

ASSIGNMENT 3:
I. THEORY:
1. What lexical features should be considered when you translate a text? Give some examples to support your ideas. 2. Why do you have to take the time to read the source language text carefully before translating it?

II. EXERCISES:
A. Translate the following sentences into English. 1. Ngay t nhng ngy u thng Chp ( m lch) Tt lng vng vng ngoi thnh H Ni. 2. C l b con nng dn ngoi thnh l ng-i cm nhn thy Tt hn ai ht bi t vic vun xi rau qu, c hoa cho vic v bo ln, g u nhm phc v tt. 3. Nu i t pha Kinh Bc xung, ta s nhn thy bt ngn hoa xun, nht l layn khoe sc mu. 4. St vi vng Ni Thnh l vng hoa Nht Tn , Nghi Tm, Qung B vi nhiu loi : o hng thm, qut vng mng, tim tm vilt v rc hoa ng tin. 5. Vi ba nm tr v tr-c, ni y l rng hoa, p ng nhu cu ca ng-i H Ni v hoa cnh. 6. B con vng ny l nhng ngh nhn c truyn thng trng hoa lu i. 7. Tic thay, t trng hoa hin nay b thu hp dn do s chuyn h-ng lm n ca khng t ngh nhn. 8. Ng-i th bn t b ngh, ng-i th t b vn hoc l lin kt vi ng-i b vn hn hp xy dng cc bit th sang trng dng lm khch sn mi ni phc v khch n-c. 9. Ca hng, ca hiu mc ln nh- nm loi hng ho t bnh dn n cao cp. 10. Chng cn nghi ng g na, H Ni thi m ca ang i thay, ang pht trin. Mong sao H ni v ng-i H Ni mi mi xng danh vi mnh t ngn nm vn hin. B. Translate the following sentences into Vietnamese. 1. The centerpiece of the festivities was a show entitled A Flock of Birds to Good Land staged simultaneously on the three different grand stages in the downtown area. 2. The whole area around the temple was virtually packed with people, leaving only a small opening for the rituals to proceed. 3. To reduce the costs while increasing accessibility of education for disabled children, the government has launched a program of community-based education and integration.

52 4. In recent years, to restore public order, Hanoi removed a number of unofficial marketplaces into designated areas. But out of the four marketplaces targeted, only Dong Tam market was moved from the Dong Da residential quarter to the Dai La area. 5. Besides the investment from the State budget, all the schools had to look for other financial sources to buy teaching equipment. However, these sources made up only 13% and 21% of the state budget for general education schools and universities respectively. 6. State budget revenues have approximately achieved the level originally set. Regular expenditure has been ensured, while irregular spending in support of area hit by storms, floods and droughts have been made. The budget deficit has been kept at a permissible level of 3.6% of GDP in 1998, down from 4.2% in 1997. 7. The economic development of Vietnam has to be viewed in the context of long periods of wars. It is the context of long periods of wars that has caused loss of peoples lives and damage to property, public facilities and resources. 8. The television network is being established throughout the country. Apart from the relatively modern and long-standing television stations in Hanoi and Ho Chi Minh City, 25 provincial stations were set up in 1988. These relay the important transmissions of the central TV stations and broadcast their own program. 9. The Vietnams Women Union is represented in the National Assembly and its president is entitled to attend the regular meeting of The Council of Ministers where she can express the Women Unions view-points and propose the regulations related to the Union. 10. The Vietnamese families have been affected by the agricultural civilization. Due to the open-door policy, the industrial civilization has exerted a daily and hourly effect on the life of Vietnamese families.

ASSIGNMENT 4:
I. THEORY:
1. Name and discuss the four Ts of a translation project. 2. Explain what is meant by exegesis.

II. EXERCISES:
A. Read the English text and answer the questions.

Deforestation
Population growth is one factor in rainforest destruction. However, it is a myth to assume that the expansion of subsistence agriculture to feed more mouths is the main factor. The majority of deforestation in Latin America, South-east Asia and the Pacific is caused by clearing land to grow cash crops for export and by commercial logging operations, and not by shifting cultivators or landless peasants. Each year commercial logging eliminates 45000 square kilometers of forest, much of the timber being exported to the United States and Japan. No clearer connection between deforestation and the demands of affluent societies can be found than in Central America and Brazil, where tropical forest has been converted to grazing

53 land because cattle raising offers export earnings that help with external debt payments. These heavy payments, which affect the poor the most, have arisen largely from external loans taken out to finance the purchase of luxury items and arms by military and governing elite. The establishment of large ranch-style cattle grazing properties is the principal reason for the elimination of 20000 square kilometers of rainforest each year in Central or South America. The cleared land is mainly devoted to the export of beef for the fast-food industries in North America, Europe and Japan- the aptly named hamburger connection. 1. What is the authors purpose of writing this text? 2. What is the text about? 3. How many times have you read the text to understand it completely? 4. Do you have any difficulty in finding the Vietnamese meaning of the English words : subsistence agriculture, cash crops, commercial logging operations, shifting cultivators, landless peasants, affluent society, external debt payment, military and governing elites, ranch-style cattle grazing property, hamburger connection ? 5. Do you have any difficulty in finding the equivalent Vietnamese structures of the following English sentences? a. However, it is a myth to assume that the expansion of subsistence agriculture to feed more mouths is the main factor. b. No clearer connection between deforestation and the demands of affluent societies can be found than in Central America and Brazil, where tropical forest has been converted to grazing land because cattle raising offers export earnings that help with external debt payments. 6. Translate the text into Vietnamese. B. Read the Vietnamese text and answer the questions.

NON NC
Cha ng ta ung n-c sng Hng, Sng , Sng Cu Long v tng sng cht vi sng n-c ny. Cc bn th ngh xem rt t ngn ng trn th gii li c s thng nht nh- ting m ca chng ta. Vit Nam th n-c( trong sng, h, bin.) li ng ngha, ng m vi n-c trong ngha t quc qu h-ng. Sng n-c v con ng-i y kt hp vi thin nhin v lch s nh- mt khi bt t bt dit bi mt th xi mng tr-ng tn. l lng yu n-c th-ng ni ca dn tc Vit Nam. Trn th gii, c nhiu quc gia t tnh n sang tnh kia ni l khng hiu nhau ri. Nh-ng Vit Nam, d bt k u, ng-i Nam k Bc, h gp nhau ln u ni l hiu nhau ngay.

1. What is the authors purpose of writing this text? 2. What is the text about? 3. How many times have you read the text to understand it completely?

54 4. Do you have any difficulty in finding the English meaning of the Vietnamese words : cha ng, sng cht, s thng nht, kt hp cht ch, xi mng tr-ng tn, lng yu n-c th-ng ni, hiu nhau? 5. Do you have any difficulty in finding the equivalent English structures of the following Vietnamese sentences? a. Cc bn th ngh xem rt t ngn ng trn th gii li c s thng nht nh- ting m ca chng ta. b.Nh-ng Vit Nam, d bt k u, ng-i Nam k Bc, h gp nhau ln u ni l hiu nhau ngay. 6. Translate the text into English.

ASSIGNMENT 5:
I. THEORY:
1. What are the goals of the translator as he prepares the initial draft? 2. What is the purpose of the evaluation? 3. What kinds of evaluation checks can be made?

II. EXERSISES:
A. Translate the following sentences into Vietnamese. 1. In the human history, science has been seen as having a mission to liberate people from ignorance and superstition, to lessen human misery, and to increase human understanding of the world. 2. The News Atlantic hailed the scientists of the time as merchants of light who would penetrate the darkness and open the way to mans control over nature. At that time, utopian invetions such as aircrafts, submarines, and telephones were foreseen. 3. People involved in the computer industry believe we are experiencing a computer revolution. Why is this revolution occuring? What will be its social consequences? To answer these questions , it is necessary to consider briefly the history of computers. 4. The forerunner of modern computer goes back some 5000 years to the first calculating machine invented by the Chinese- the abacus. Until the 17th century, Europe had nothing to rival the abacus for speed and accuracy of calculation. 5. Computers were developed simultaneously in Germany, England and the USA to aid the speedy and accurate calculations necessary to decode the enemys messages during the Second World War. 6. Many of the jobs now being performed by people in the manufacturing and service sectors of our economy can be done faster and more cheaply by modern computers or electronic devices controlled by computers. 7. Robot machines are replacing assembly line workers in manufacturing. They have already done so in the Fiat car factory in Italy and the Nissan car plant in Japan. By 1980, 50 robots were in use in Australia by companies such as General Motors, Ford, Nissan and Simpson Pope.

55 8. Firms that do not adopt the new computer technology are enable to compete with their cheaper electronic rivals. Such has been the fate of the $200 million a year Swiss watch industry, which was wiped out by electronic watches in a couple of years. 9. With the mechanization of some work processes, the new factories initially resulted in large-scale structural unemployment. Previously, much sought-after, skilled, cottage industry artisans suddenly found themselves redundant and de-skilled by the new technology. 10. The heroic image of science grew through the 18th and 19th centuries. The Industrial Revolution, which started in England in the late 18th century, strongly reinforced faith in a technological society, although the social costs and benefits were far from equal share. B. Translate the following sentences into English. 1. Vnh Dung Qut nm pha ng bc huyn Bnh Sn, tnh Qung Ngi. Vnh c chiu di 18 km v -c che ch kn o bi cc dy ni t nhin. 2. B pha nam vnh l mt vng t bng phng, c kt cu a l n nh vi din tch hng chc cy s vung. 3. Ni y s hnh thnh cc khu cng nghip nng v ho cht, nh my lc du, khu ch bin hi sn, khu ch bin nng sn, khu cng nghip nh v mt khu dn c- th hin i vi khong 60 vn dn. 4. Mt diu kin thun li na l Dung Qut nm cch -ng -ng st, -ng ti in v cp quang xuyn Vit khong 12 Vic cung cp n-c ngt cho khu ny l ht sc thun li tr l-ng l 3 t mt khi /nm, vi ngun n-c t sng Bng. b, km. vi Tr

5. Ngy nay chng ta ang tri qua mt cuc bin i x hi rt su sc nh- s thay i trong cuc cch mng cng nghip ln th nht. Do vy, vic nh ngha li khi nim vic lm c l l cn thit.

ASSIGNMENT 6:
I.THEORY:
1. Name some kinds of errors that a translator could make when he/she translates a text. 2. Why does a translator often make structural and lexical errors when he/she translates a text? 3. Give some examples of errors in word collocation that a translator could make when he/she translate a text.

II. EXERCISES:
A. Translate the following sentences into English. 1. Do ph sa bi p ca dng sng Cu Long lam phong ph va la y p ny, t-ng tr-ng cho ngun l-ng thc ca c

56 n-c cng nh- phong cch sinh hot k cn sng n-c ca c- dn trong vng. 2. T nhng dng sng rng ln n nhng m-ng rch mnh mai ch tin cho nhng chic thuyn nh b ra v, Sng Cu Long cho ta mt cnh quan honh trng khi n chy vo Vit Nam, trm cui cng ca hnh trnh 4500km ni ca ng bin ng. 3. iu ng qu l kiu bo lun h-ng v t quc, gn b vi gia nh qu h-ng, t n-c, yu qu v gi gn bn sc vn ho v hun c nn tnh cch con ng-i Vit Nam. 4. Ngoi vic gip ng-i thn n-c nh, nhiu kiu bo cn ng gp xy dng qu h-ng, h-ng ng vic cu tr nhng ni trong n-c b thin tai v tham gia cc vic ngha vi truyn thng nhiu iu ph ly gi g-ng. 5. Tr-c nm 1988, nh h-ng ca h thng ngn hng i vi s pht trin v qun l kinh t v m l khng ng k. khuyn khch h thng ngn hng hot ng c mc ch hn, chnh ph ra cc bin php mi bao gm t chc li h thng ngn hng, -a vo cc chnh sch tn dng hn nh, chnh sch mi v li sut v cho php t do bun bn vng trn th tr-ng. 6. Chnh ph xc tin mt cuc ti thit ton din v l-ng bng ca cng nhn vin nh n-c bng cch chnh n li nhng khon bao cp cho ng-i tiu dng trn danh ngha hoch nh li ch l-ng. Mc d mc l-ng ti thiu hng thng tng, nh-ngl-ng thc t vn gim xung ng k do lm pht. 7. Cuc iu tra do hi ph n Vit Nam tin hnh cho thy rng nhng ph-ng php trnh thai truyn thng ang -c p dng rng ri. Cuc iu tra cho thy rng 39% ph n c gia nh dng ph-ng php hin i, ph-ng php th-ng dng nht l t vng trnh thai B. Translate the following sentences into Vietnamese 1.The nuclear energy proponents also pressed the theme that it was inevitable that the world would increasingly go nuclear. It is suggested that the opponents were standing against the tide of history and were akin to the Luddites at the beginning of the Industrial Revolution, who broke machines. 2. Doctors have shown for the first time they can rebuild the immune systems of people infected with the AIDS virus, dramatically increasing the blood cells that HIV destroys. 3. In the field of medicine training, what was done in the past years has been remarked by distinguished fact that many specialists and medical colleges in different countries set forth the necessity for reconsidering training subjects for health workers. 4. Today, the physicians should be considered as men of health. Hence, the responsibility of the physicians is to know how to discover, cure, and rehabilitate the health of the individuals and the community.

57 5. It is obvious that a healthy body helps a sound mind because it is the sound minds that direct the orientation of the values systems. A healthy man should be healthy not only physically but also mentally. 6. Nowadays people are inclined to worry too much about their physical health. However, I would like to lay stress on the importance of psychological health. Being mentally healthy is very important, and a truly healthy man is one who can enjoy the proper equilibrium between his body and mind.

ASSIGNMENT 7:
Translate the following texts into English 1.Nhng thnh tu ca qu trnh i mi trong thp nin va qua to ra nhng c hi cho ph n t -c mc ch ca mnh. Cuc sng ca ph n -c ci thin v ph n bt nhc nhn hn. Cc dch v x hi gip ph n bt nhc nhn trong cng vic nh v to Iu kin cho ph n tham gia vo cc hot ng x hi . 2. Hi ph n Vit nam I din cho ph n Vit Nam trong c n-c i mi t chc v cch lm vic v vy thu ht ngy cng nhiu ph n tham gia vo cng tc x hi. H ph n gip cho ph n gii quyt nhng kh khn trong cuc sng hng ngy. Hi cng trnh ln nh n-c nhng iu lut v chnh sch nhm pht huy mi tim nng ca ph n trong tin trnh i mi. 3.Nhn ra nhng nhn t to nn vic hc ngoi ng nhanh v hiu qu ngy cng tr nn quan trng v a s ng-i hc l ng-i ln rt lo lng khi hc mt ngoi ng chuyn ngnh s dng trong th-ng mi,nghin cu v ngoI giao. Nhu cu hc mt ngai ng c hiu qu cn -c xem xt theo kha cnh ng-i hc, ng-i dy v ch-ng trnh ging dy. 4.Sc hp dn ln nht i vi du khch l bn sc vn ha ca dn tc Vit Nam. Hng nghn di tch lch s, di tch cch mng -c nh n-c xp hng, trong hng trm di tch c gi tr lch s v ngh thut cao. Vit Nam l mt cng ng ca 54 dn tc vi nhiu phong tc, tp qun, vn ha ngh thut dn gian c sc. S hin din ca hng trm lng ngh truyn thng sn xut ra hng nghn loi sn phm th cng m ngh ni ting. 5. Nu du khch n vi cc vng dn tc thiu s th cn c th tham d vo nhng sinh hot vn ha k th ca vng ni rng nhit i. Mt l hi m tru chng hn. S phi c mt tr-c l hi hng tun cng ng-i dn i tm tre sa nh rng, lm cy nu xua ui ma qu. Trong nhng ngy du khch cn -c quan st cch chn cc v r-u cn v nht l vic chn tru m.

58 6. Phc li x hi l chnh sch x hi ln ca Vit Nam da trn truyn thng t-ng thn t-ng i gip ln nhau c t ngn x-a. Nguyn tc c bn ca chnh sch ny l kt hp trch nhim ca nh n-c, ca cng ng v mi c nhn t v-n ln ha nhp vI x h. Chnh sch ny ang tng b-c m ra cho mi i t-ng vi nhiu hnh thc khc nhau. 7. S lc hu v nguy c tt hu hn v kinh t ang l ni trn tr canh cnh trong lng mi ng-i Vit Nam trong n-c cng nh- ang sinh sng n-c ngoi. Nu tt hu xa hn c ngha l rI vo s phn ca mt n-c cung cp nguyn liu v nhn cng trong s phn cng lao ng quc t, chu lp v , thua thit trong hp tc cnh tranh. thc l mt thch thc ln i vi dn tc Vit Nam trong bi cnh quc t ngy nay. 8. Bn cht nhn vn ca tr-ng phi ngoi giao Vit Nam l mt nt c th. Mc d l nn nhn ca bit bao nhiu cuc xm l-c, nh-ng ng-i Vit Nam khng bao gi mt I lng nhn i. Hn th na , chnh lng nhn I l nhn t to nn sc mnhca dn tc v nn ngoI giao Vit Nam. Nguyn TrI , ng-i anh hng dn tc ca th k 15 lI ph-ng chm l-u truyn cho mI n hm nay : Ly I ngha thng hung tn, Ly ch nhn thay c-ng bo.

ASSIGNMENT 8:
Translate the following text into English C l Bc Kinh l ni tp trung quyn lc chnh tr nh-ng Th-ng Hi cng c quyn t ho l mt th th-ng mi. Bc Kinh c l l ni tp trung quyn lc chnh tr nh-ng danh hiu mt th th-ng mi li thuc v Th-ng Hi. Nhng a im lch s ch mi c t gn 80 nm tr-c Th-ng Hi, tuy th hu ht du khch u b chinh phc tr-c v quyn r ca thnh ph c bit ny, ni m mi tr-ng l tt c. Ch ring ci tn Th-ng Hi cng dy nn mt ln sng nh nim thch th v tn. Th-ng Hi vn l mt thnh ph nh chuyn ngh nh c v dt mi cho n na th k 19 khi n bt u pht trin nh- mt trung tm cng nghip v th-ng mi. Nhng ng-i ch hng bun v cc ng c vin chnh tr t khp ni trn th gii v y v pht trin n thnh mt trong nhng thnh ph quc t snh iu nht th gii. T nhng nm 1920 tr i, n tr nn ngy cng tai ting nh- l mt ni m bt c vic g cng c th xy ra. Cc ngn hng v cc cng ty th-ng mi loi t xy dng cho h nhng tr s chnh sang trng trng ra ni m sau l nhng cnh ng la mnh mng tri di hai b sng Hong Ph.

59 Ton b di t ny vn cn tn ti sau nhng thi k san bng t v ngy nay n lm nn mt bo tng m c o v kin trc ca nhng nm 1930. Mt cuc tn b dc b l khng th thiu i vi nhng ai n thm ni y, / Du khch khng th b qua mt cuc tn b dc b khi n thm ni y, ni m vn -c nhiu ng-i cng nhn l thnh ph trng im ca Trung Quc. Nhng to nh chc tri, bao gm mt vi to nh cao nht th gii mc ln chnh ni m x-a kia la tng mc. im ni bt nht l thp truyn hnh Hn Ngc Vin ng - nu thi gian cho php, mt ci nhn ton cnh t nhng tng cao ca thp s l mt k nim kh qun. D-i s nh-ng b ca ng-i Php tr-c y, tng on qu kh nh- vn cn hin hu u trong nhng bit th tao nh v nhng con -ng rp bng cy. Vng qua gc , khch sn Ho Bnh v ban nhc Jazz ng knh ca n l nhng chng tch ni ting ca mt thi k ho hip. Nh-ng Th-ng Hi cng cn c nhiu khch sn tuyt vi khc t nhng nm 1930, phn ln ang -c phc hi nhng nt ng yu t thi hong kim tr-c y ca chng. Th-ng Hi s hu mt trong nhng bo tng tht s ln ca th gii, -c m ca vo nm 1996. Trong mt thi gian ngn khng th tham quan ht to nh gi tr ny -c, nh-ng thm ch ch cn mt gi trong nhng phng tr-ng by ng, iu khc v gm cng em li nhng k nim kh phai.

ASSIGNMENT 9:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese In a keynote speech at H Ni National University (HNU) yesterday, leader Jiang urged the youth of Vietnam and China to work for strengthening the friendship between the two countries and contribute to peace and development in Asia and the world. A bright future will be created by you, the young people, and the future belongs to you, the Chinese General Secretary and State President told the students. Jiang stressed that a better future awaited China-Vietnam relations in the 21st century, and joint efforts by the youth of both countries cannot be separated from this. The younger generation in both our countries must stick to their ideals and work tirelessly for socialism, he said.

60 The youth of China and Vietnam need to inherit and bring into full play the revolutionary spirit of their elders, to be persistent in ideology, study hard, to strive for the cause of developing socialism, and for the wealth and prosperity of their respective motherlands, he said. He expressed his hope that the Chinese and Vietnamese young people will cherish, maintain and promote China-Vietnam relations, have more exchanges and learn from each other to enhance mutual understanding. He pledged that the Chinese party and Government would fully back such exchanges. In history, both Vietnam and China have suffered invasion by the imperialists but we both successfully fought off the imperialists, liberated our peoples and unified our countries, said Jiang. He said that the friendship between Vietnam and China derives not only from history but also the fact, as noted by H Ch Minh, that the two peoples are comrades and brothers. The foundation of China-Vietnam ties was mutual trust, long-term stability, the pre-condition, and friendly neighborliness, the guarantee, he said. Comprehensive co-operation is the bridge and the target a prosperous future, he added. Jiang left Hanoi yesterday Central Vietnam where he toured the ancient imperial capital of Hu, recognized by the UNESCO as a World Heritage Site, and met with leaders of the port city of Nng. He is scheduled to visit the ancient port town of Hi An and the Ho Th Textile Company before concluding his three-day visit to Vit Nam.

ASSIGNMENT 10:
Translate the following text into English i vi mt t nc cn nhiu kh khn nh chng ta, th vn tit kim chng lng ph phi lun c coi l quc sch. Nhng trong thc t, nhng nm qua khp ni, vn cn trn lan nhng hin tng lng ph. No l lng ph trong qun l, s dng ngn sch, lng ph trong u t xy dng c bn, lng ph trong qun l t ai, tr s lm vic, lng ph trong lnh vc doanh nghip Nh nc v ri lng ph cn len li trong dn chng vi nhng th tc ci xin y tn km Lng ph thc s v ang l vn bc xc ca x hi, l mt trong nhng nguyn nhn gy nh hng ln ti nn kinh t ca t nc. Bi v trong nm u (1998) sau khi c php

61 lnh thc hnh tit kim, chng lng ph c U Ban thng v Quc Hi kha X thng qua ngy 26-02-1998 v c hiu lc thi hnh t ngy 1-5-1998, qua s liu bo co ca 12 B, c quan ngang B, s chi thc nm 1998 gim so vi quyt ton nm 1997, c th nh: Hi ngh ph: 12,8 t ng; cng tc ph: 12,43 t ng, chi ph in thoi, fax: 9,57 t ng; chi ph sa cha ln TSC: 80,94 t ng; chi mua sm ti sn c nh phc v chuyn mn nghip v: 153,7 t ng. D ton NSNN nm 1999 tip tc thc hin tit kim 10% d ton chi thng xuyn. Mt s khon chi thng xuyn gim mnh t 30% n 70% nh chi mua sm thit b lm vic, chi hi ngh l tn Nhng s liu gim chi trong khi thc hin Php lnh thc hnh tit kim chng lng ph thi gian qua, thc s l nhng con s bit ni, cho thy tn hiu ng mng v s chuyn bin trong cng tc ny, song iu cng chng t by lu nay vic chi tiu cn qu bung lng, nn tht cht li cc khon chi tiu l vic cn lm. Qua thanh tra ti chnh, bo co quyt ton hng nm pht hin nhiu c quan n v hnh chnh s nghip, doanh nghip vi phm cc nguyn tc qun l hnh chnh. Mt trong nhng vn chi tiu c coi l bc xc v c th ni l ht sc tn km hin nay l: Chi tiu i vi cc l n nhn hun huy chng, ngy thnh lp ngnh, hi tho Mi cuc nh m nh vy tn khng bit bao l tin ca, no tin thu hi trng, tin n ung, qu biu Vo dp cui nm ny, ngi ta cn thy cc nh hng cht kn bi cc thng hu ht l cc cn b ch ngi dn thng th ly u ra ngn qu m vui v nh vy! Trong khi cuc sng ca nhng ngi dn t do cn ang vt v bn chi tng ngy vi nhng chi tiu hn hp th vic tit kim chng lng ph trong c ch chi bao cp l vic nht thit cn phi lm.

ASSIGNMENT 11:
Translate the following texts into Vietnamese GAZA CITY -Israel and palestinians negotiated through the night in what US envoy Dennis Ross termed "a good evening of work" aimed at breaking an impasse over Israel's delayed pullout from the West Bank town of Hebron.

Ross left Palestinian leader Yasser Arafat's office early yesterday - three hours after he arrived - but negotiators stayed behind to corntinue talks.

"The meeting was positive (and) constructive," Arafat said. He added that he and Ross "solved some of the obstacles which were between me and him," apparently referring to his own suggestion last week that Ross was biased toward Israel.

Ross, who was to leave later yesterday, agreed that "We had a good set of discussions." Referring to the negotiations, he said : "This has been a good evening of work, but there are still issues to be overcome."

62 Inside Arafat's headquarters, the Palestinian team led by chief negotiator Saeb Erekat continued deliberations with Israel's delegation, led by Maj. Gen. Shaul Muhfaz and Yitzhak Molcho, a top advisor to Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu. The talks began on Sunday afternoon in Jerusalem and moved to Gaza.

Israeli media speculated that if the meeting was successful, Ross might delay his departure and Netanyahu and Arafat might hold a summit either yesterday or today.

Israel was to have pulled out of Hebron - the last West Bank city under occupation in March, but delayed it after a series of terrorist attacks in Israel. Netanyahu, a hardliner elected in May, has delayed the pullout further, trying to tighten security for the 500 settlers who live in the town of 130,000 Arabs.

The Palestiians have refused to reopen the existing agreement, and also seek to link the Israeli redeployment to a further pullout elsewhere in the West Bank that was also promised in the signed autonomy accords.

In Hebron on Sunday, the army rounded up about 100 Palestinians after two fire bombs were thrown at a Jewish enclave without causing injuries. They were questioned and held at gunpoint for about an hour, but most were released. The army spokesman said several Palestinians were arrested.

A Palestinian walking past the Beit Hadassah enclave was hit and injured by a metal ladder that fell or was thrown from the roof, and he was taken to the city hospital. HCM CITY - The number of foreign tourists arriving in Viet Nam has been increasing year after year. On average, it grows by 30 per cent a year, according to recent statisties released from Viet Nam Tourism Administration. Though the number of tourists is on the rise, occupancy rates of hotels have dropped significantly as compared to previous years. Over the past six years, joint - venture hotels and guest houses operated at an average capacity rate of 85 to 90 per cent. They are now operating at a capacity rate of only 60 per cent. A rate which is much worse than that of state - owned hotels and private guest - houses. One of the main reasons for the decline in hotel capacity rates is the muchrooming of joint venture hotels which has caused severe competition among hotels for room - rates and hotel services. Several hotels have become burdens to their owners, with low gross earnings and high taxes, many are about to be forced to close down. Most foreign visitors have come here eager to experience something new and to travel to places of wild and natural beauty during their stay. For this reason, Viet Nam's tourist industry needs to reorganise its management and set goals in order to satisfy the current demands of tourists.

63 Though there has been growth in the number of tourists over the past several years, the number of visitors that come for a second visit is low. It is evident that the attraction of Viet Nam's tourist industry is still inadequate and tourist sites, transport and accommodation facilities have not yet reached international standards.The country now has some 22 provinces and cities which have completed detailed master plans for tourist resorts.

However, these projects are yet to be developed and are still under discussion. Even though each year the government has spent tens of billion of dongs on upgrading national historical relics and tourist resorts, due to a lack of management expertise and investment knowledge, these sites have failed to help boost the development of the tourist industry. To improve quality of tourist resorts and to boost hotel operations, Viet Nam's tourism industry now requires more investment from the government. Translate the following text into English Cng ngy cng c nhiu ng-i Vit nam tm cch i hc n-c ngoi bng chi ph ring ca mnh. T gia nm 1992 dn thng 5 nm nay, s ng-i t b tin ra hc cn t, nh-ng hy vng s l-ng s tng trong vng 5 nm ti v nn kinh t Vit Nam tt hn v chnh ph hp l ha cc th tc lm cho vic hc t tc d dng hn. Nh-ng cuc qung co ln nht nhm thc y nhng ng-i Vit Nam mnh dn u t- tin bc cho bn thn hoc con ci ca mnh -c hc trong mt nn gio duc t chun quc t l nh vo vic m mt cuc trin lm c bit v gio dc n-c ngoi t chc ti thnh ph H Ch Minh v H Ni trong hai thng va qua. -c gi l Educasia, cuc trin lm cao cc tr-ng i hc, cc tr-ng h-ng nghip v cc nh cung cp thit b tr-ng hc ca cc n-c Anh, Php, c, Hoa K v Thy S. Cuc trin lm cp n ch-ng trnh o to v nn gio dc m cc sinh vin t tc Vit Nam ang tm kim v li gii p ca nhng c s o to ny n-c ngoi i vi nhng thc mc ca sinh vin. Cc kha hc v vin thng,xy dng bng c gii, ngnh khch sn du lch v nu n -c c bit cao. Cho n by gi hu ht nhng sinh vin Vit nam i ra n-c ngoi hc thm theo hc bng quc t hay ca mt chnh ph n-c ngoi cp. Hng nm Vit Nam gi i khong 77 sinh vin v 100 chuyn vin bc cao ra n-c ngoi thng qua nhng ch-ng trnh hc bng -c chnh thc bo tr. Phn ln nhng sinh vin i hc t tc i hc Nga, mt s i cc n-c ng u v mt s rt t i hc H Lan, B, Hoa K, an Mch v Thi Lan. Nh-ng vo thng t- nm nay, cc sut hc bng ring dnh cho cc sinh vin n-c ngoi Nga v ng u tm ngng. Hin

64 nay c nhng iu kin dnh cho sinh vin Vit Nam mun hc n-c ngoi l phi tt nghip ph thng v phi theo hc cc kha hc ngoi ng ph hp v phi c kin thc v vi tnh. Tuy nhin vn cn thiu nhng thng tin v cc rc ri m sinh vin t tc n-c ngoi th-ng gp phi, c bit l vn v thi gian v trnh m cc kha hc i hi. c nhng lng ph v thi gian cng nh- tin bc khng th trnh khi.

ASSIGNMENT 12:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese The United States is a country of immigrants. These immigrants come from all over the world. They speak many different languages. In the past, new immigrants had a hard time in American schools. They could not understand their school work in English, so they often became discouraged and dropped out of school. They were not able to get good jobs without a good education. Now, many schools in the United States have bilingual programs. ("Bi" means "two" and "lingual" means "language".) For example, a school with many Spanish-speaking students might have a bilingual program. The Spanish-speaking students study their subjects in both English and Spanish. A school with a large Chinese population might have an English Chinese bilingual program. Students in bilingual programs continue their general education and learn English at the same time. After a period of time, they can take all of their classes in English with English speaking students. Bilingual education is "controversial." This means some people like it, and other people do not like it. The people in favor of bilingual education say, "It helps students to understand their school work in history, mathematics, science, etc., at the same time, they are learning English." These people say bilingual education helps students succeed in school. They can get better jobs and be better citizens after graduation. The people against bilingual education say, "It's a waste of time and government money. English is the national language of the United States." Everyone living in the United States, they say, should learn to speak English as quickly as possible. They say, "Bilingual education is too expensive." In other words, the government spends too much money on bilingual education. They want to put the money for bilingual programs into English programs. In such programs, everyone will learn English a lot faster. At least, those against bilingual education think so. Translate the following text into English Ng-i ngho th-ng c nhiu con hn nhng ng-i thuc gii trung l-u v th-ng l-u. V dn cc n-c km pht trin th c nhiu con hn dn ca cc n-c pht trin. Ngy cng c nhiu chuyn gia v dn s thy -c mi quan h khng kht gia s con trong gia nh v s pht trin kinh t.

65 Ti mt vi vng, dch v k hoch ha gia nh ca chnh ph c l khng c i vi dn ngho do iu kin a l. Chng hn nh- ng-i dn nng thn sng qu xa trung tm k hoch ha gia nh. Do vy h khng nhn -c thng tin v cch thc hn ch sinh . Nhn chung th dn thnh th c nhiu thng tin hn dn nng thn. Dn thnh th -c h tr dch v k hoch ha gia nh, v h c gia nh t con hn. V th chng ta c th ni rng v tr a l ni m ng-i dn sng ng mt vai tr qan trng trong vic quyt dnh mt gia nh nn sinh bao nhiu con: Gia nh sng thnh th th c t con hn gia nh sng nng thn. Nhng l do khc l g? S pht trin kinh t gia nh, hay mt phm vi ln hn l ca mt n-c, l mt nhn t quan trng trong vic quyt nh s con trong gia nh. Ng-i c nhiu tin th c t con. Ng-c li, ng-i ngho n-c km pht trin mun c nhiu con. Ti sao? Do h phi l thuc vo s chm sc ca con ci khi v gi. H khng c bo him, tin h-u, hay s gip ca chnh ph. Khi h gi c th ai s gip h. Cu tr li rt n gin. H c th v s quay sang nh con ci gip . Con ci ca h by gi tr thnh ng-i ln v ang i lm vic. Tt c con ci ca h u phi chia s v gnh vc trch nhim chm sc cha m. i vi nhiu ng-i ngho, mt gia nh ng con l mt cch thc hoch nh cho t-ng lai. Chng ta c th ni rng gia nh ng con l ngun bo him cho tui gi.

ASSIGNMENT 13:
Translate the following text into English Cc nh xut khu c uy th ca Trung Quc ang cha tm ngm ca mnh vo Vit Nam, nhn ra n-c lng ging ph-ng nam nh chn mui cho mt k hoch qung co trong vic mua sm hng ha tiu dng v my mc, cc nh qun l iu hnh Trung Quc pht bin nh- th vo hm th nm. Cc nh qun l Trung Quc ni trong bui l khai mc hi ch t chc ti H Ni : Nh-ng Vit Nam c mt kinh nghim lu di tr-c khi nhn ra hng xut khu ca mnh vo Trung Quc tng ln khi mt vi sn phm l c th xm nhp vo th tr-ng Trung quc m rng hn. Khong 60 cng ty Bc Kinh tr-ng by nhng mt hng ca h t chi bng nha r tin v cc trang tr cho n

66 cc loi xe c ti hi ch H Ni, mt hi ch u tin trin lm cc mt hng Trung Quc k t khi hai n-c c quan h tr li vi nhau. Jeep- Bc Kinh, mt lin doanh sn xut t Trung-M, hi vng s chen chn vo th tr-ng xe hi ang ln mnh ti Vit Nam, nh-ng ang i mt vi mt s cnh tranh khc nghit vi th tr-ng xe hi Nht Bn xy phng tuyn xung quanh y, ng Guo Fengli, ph ch tch cng ty Xut Nhp Khu t Bc Kinh pht biu nh- vy. Theo li ca ng Guo th th tr-ng y ang m ra kh nhanh cho cc sn phm ca chng ti, c bit l khi gi c ca chng ti thc s cnh tranh -c vi cc i th ca chng ti. BAIEC ang mong mun thit lp quan h mu dch vi Vit Nam nh-ng cng ang phi i u vi vic tm kim cc mt hng thch hp buon bn, mc d l ng Guo ngh l c th tm ra li gii p cho mt vn bnh th-ng. Cng ty Trung Quc d kin trao i xe hi ly l-ng thc, v s l-ng thc ny s em bn Nam Trung Quc. Tuy nhin h vn thch trao i nhng mt hng c gi tr cao hn. Chng ti khng bit nhiu v nhng g m Vit Nam mi cho. ng Guo ni n iu ny, mt quan im -c cc nh doanh th-ng khc nhc li nhiu ln. Nhng ng-i nn nng bn hng hn l mua hng. Vic bun bn qua bin gii tng vt k t ngy hai n-c m li bin gii vo nm 1991. Ni mt cch chnh thc th, vic bun bn hai chiu c gi tr khong 500 triu la d cho vic bun bn bt hp php c th cao hn nhiu. Trung quc -c h-ng mt gi tr thng d- to ln. Trong chuyn ving thm Trung Quc tun tr-c, Ph th t-ng Phan Vn Khi ku gi hai bn thay th vic bun bn qua bin gii bng nhng tha hip chnh thc gia cc cng ty th-ng mi v cc nh ch to m cch lm ny s lm tng gi ca cc sn phm Vit Nam. Vit Nam mun y mnh hn na vic xut khu than v du kh cho cc trung tm sn xut ang bng pht Nam Trung Quc, ni xa ngun nng l-ng ca Trung Quc c hng ngn cy s.

67 ng Phan Vn Khi cn nhn mnh thm v gi go v cc mt hng thc phm khc v pha Vit Nam nhp nhiu hn na cc my mc ch to v cc cng ngh khc ca Trung Quc.

68

ASSIGNMENT 14:
Translate the following text into English Dn s ca A Rp Xa U i l 8853000 ng-i. a s l nhng ng-i A Rp Hi gio. Hay ni cch khc, h l nhng tn Hi gio. A Rp l mt quc o. V vua ca n-c ny va l mt ng-i lnh o chnh tr va l mt nh lnh o tn gio ca t n-c. Do lut ca chnh ph -a ra l lut ca Hi gio, v ngn ng ca n-c ny l ting A Rp. o Hi rt quan trng i vi nn gio dc ca A Rp. Tr-c nm 1950, hu nh- ton b nn gio dc ca A Rp l nn gio dc tn gio. Hc sinh hc Kinh Koran, sch kinh thnh ca do Hi. Chng phi c gng nh nhng iu trong cun sch ny cng nhiu cng tt. Tr-c nm 1949, khng c bt k mt tr-ng cao ng hay i hc no m ch c mt vi tr-ng tiu hc v trung hc n-c ny. Vo nm 1953, chnh ph A Rp thnh lp B Gio Dc. y thc s l b-c m u cho mt nn gio dc hin i cho n-c ny. Khi nhng k s- pht hin ra du A Rp th t n-c ny tr nn giu c. Cc nh lnh o ca n-c ny bt u nhn thy rng cng ngh Ph-ng Ty l cn thit gip t n-c pht trin. Cc nh lnh o vn tin rng nn gio dc tn gio l rt quan trng, nh-ng mt n-c hin i khng th pht trin cng ngh m ch da vo mt h thng gio dc tn gio truyn thng. H quyt nh b sung cc mn hc khc vo h thng gio dc. H mun kt hp nn gio dc tn gio truyn thng vi nn gio dc cng ngh hin i ca Ph-ng Ty. Tn gio vn l mt yu t quan trng trong nn gio dc ca A Rp. Tuy nhin hin nay hc sinh, sinh vin A Rp cng hocj tt c cc mn hc khc nh- : ngn ng ( c bit l ting Anh), lch s, khoa hc, ton hc, vi tnh v.v.. Tr-c nm 1950 ch c 20000 hc sinh, sinh vin A Rp. Nm 1982 con s ny ln ti 1780000. H thng gio dc ca A Rp pht trin nhanh hn bt k mt n-c no trn th gii. Tt c cc tr-ng hc a Rp l min ph. Chnh ph cng cho sinh vin cao ng v i hc thm tin nhm ng vin h. Tuy nhin cc nh lnh o tn gio khng thch cho ph n i hc. H cho rng ph n c hc c th gy nhng nh h-ng xu cho gia nh v x hi. Do vy, lm cho cc nh lnh o tn gio chp nhn cho ph n i hc th chnh ph phi dt vic gio dc ph n theo cc tn ch ca cc nh lnh o tn gio.

69 Ph n theo hc cc tr-ng cao ng v c bit l theo hc cc khoa v ph n cc tr-ng i hc dnh ring cho ph n. Gio vin y l n. V khng c gio vin n nn chnh ph cho php gio vin nam ging dy ph n A Rp thng qua ph-ng tin truyn hnh. Tr-c ht, ph n theo di cc bi ging trn v tuyn v sau h c th ni chuyn vi thy gio qua in thoi hi v nhng thc mc. Thy gio v sinh vin n khng -c php gp nhau. Sau khi tt nghip, ph n A Rp c nhiu c hi xin vic ging nh- nam gii. H tr thnh cc gio vin, bc s, cc nh hot ng x hi, cc nh khoa hc v nhiu vic khc na. Ni lm vic hu nh- cng tch ri ph n vi nam gii. iu c ngha l ph n v nam gii khng -c php lm vic cng mt ch ch tr bnh vin. Ph n A Rp muons c nhiu c hi tm vic lm hn. Nh-ng mt vi ph n khng mun cng lm vic vi nam gii. Trong mt bi bo gn y dng trong mt tp ch c tn gi Tp Ch Trung ng, mt vi sinh vin n ni rng h thc s khng mun lm vic cng nam gii.

ASSIGNMENT 15:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese After getting high on the hopes of striking black gold off the shores of Vietnam, the world's oil giants have now glumly awoken to the hazards- - the immense coot of investment and, so far, the meagre rewards. The mood was subdued among foreign companies exhibiting their technological wares this week at the second International Oil and Gas Fair in Hanoi. "The results aren't bad, but they, are not as great as some had hoped, "said Melchior de Matharel, head of Southeast Asia operations with the French firm Total. If caution is now the watchword, disappointed foreign petroleum companies may draw comfort from the recent. "encouraging" discoveries of oil made by Mitsubishi Oil and the Malaysian firm Petronas Carigali, and of gas made by British Petroleum (BP), off the coast of southern Vietnam. "Oil exploration is plainly hazardous. But the good news is that the Vietnamese basin is oilbearing", Matharel said. Prospectors enthusiasm was abruptly dampened last May, when BHP Petroleum of Australia announced the reserves at the Dai Hung ("Great Bear") site, 375 kilometers (235 miles) southeast of Ho Chi Minh City, were far smaller than projected. BHP initially estimated the site to contain 700 million to 800 million barrels of oil, but has now downgraded it to 100 million to 200 million. Production is scheduled to begin neat month, at a modest level of 25,000 barrels per day. That was a tough -blow for BHP. It has already invested 240 million dollars in Vietnam- - and half of it went into the first phase of the Dai Hung project.

70 BHP headed an international consortium, selected in April 1993, to develop the field at a total cost estimated at 1.5 billion dollars. BHP holds 43.75 percent of the consortium, with Petronas holding 20 percent, and state - owned PetroVietnam 15 percent. The remaining 21.25-percent share is equally split between Total and the Japanese firm Sumitomo. For the moment, it is the Japanese- the main buyers of Vietnam's crude oil- who appear to have had the best luck. The Japan Vietnam Petroleum Co. (JVPC), a branch of the Mitsubishi Oil group, announced in June a "very promising" discovery at the Rang Dong (:Dawn) site. According to the results of an exploratory well, the field may be "of the same caliber" as neighbouring Bach Ho ("White Tiger") the only site now being commercially exploited in Vietnam. Bach Ho's reserves are estimated at a maximum of :300 million barrels.But et will take at least another year and other drillings to precisely determine the scope of the Japanese discovery, industry experts in Honoi cautioned. Pessimists say it will take four to five years in all to gauge Vietnam's oil potentially. Gas exploration and exploitation have also proven to be a risk business, although fortune has so far smiled on British Petroleum, which announced in September the discovery of two gas pockets, estimated to be 57 billion cubic metres (1,995 billion cubic feet), in Nam Con Son, south of Ho Chi Minh City. BHP and the Norwegian national company, Statoil, bought shares in the offshore concession, held by the Indian state firm Oil and Natural Gas Co. (ONGC), in 1992. The consortium, with ONGC holding 55 percent, BP 30 percent. and Statoil five percent, has conducted exploration and tests under a shared - production contract with PetroVietnam, which in turn has taken a five percent stake on the interests of each of the European partners. Translate the following text into English Vic hng hc ca mt b phn tu v tr con thoi iu khin bng phn lc vo hm th t- buc c quan NA SA phi hon mt cuc kho st tri t bng radar khi chuyn bay nghin cu mi sinh 10 ngy ca tu Endeavour bay qua mc na phi trnh. C quan Qun Tr Hng Khng v Khong Gian Quc Gia cho bit vn ny l mt tr lc i vi phng th nghim Radar tr gi 384 triu la, nh-ng khng gy ra mt nguy him no i vi cc nh du hnh v tr. Cc vin chc ni rng b phn chm in t kim tra nhin liu b hang, khng pht hin -c mt h thng r ritrong b phn ddaayr b nghi l nguyn nhn lm ng-ng hot ng nm b phn khc gi l vcn (verniers) cn thit chnh li cho ng -ng i ca tu con thoi trong quyx o v ch dn chnh xc kh c trong khoang hng n mc tiu trn hnh tinh. Kelly Humphries, ng-i thuyt minh chuyn bay, vo chiu hm th t- gi s gin on mang tnh khoa hc ny l s ngh

71 tm thi trong lc cc k s- trn mt t vi ngh ra mt cch cc my tnh ca con thoi khng n b phn kim tra nhin liu b hng. Theo ng Rich Jackson, Gim c iu khin chuyn bay th con tu Endeavour vi 38 b phn y ln hn s tiu th qu nhiu nhin liu v loi tr iu mong i con tu s lm lan ra tai ha thin nhin quanh a cu. Vo chiu hm th t-, tu con thoi bay theo ph-ng thc t li (hoa tiu t ng) v phi hnh on lm vic theo hai ca sut 24 gi lin k t lc ct cnh khi Florida vo hm th su, h-ng mt gi ngh gii lao bt ng. ng Jackson d on rng khong phn mm s sn sng lm vic vo chiu th ba, khong 24 gi sau khi trc trc k thut xy ra. Ni vi cc phng vin ti trm kim sot chuyn bay ti Houston, ng Jackson cho bit: B phn cht hng v nhm kim sot chuyn bay ang l vic rt tch cc phc hi vic kim sot cc vecn v gim thiu nh h-ng trong thi gian c s c. Cc nh khoa hc ni rng s trc trc ny khng lm h- hng cc hnh nh, nh-ng s phi mt mt thi gian lu n gp 5 ln x l cc d liu ra a v my tnh ca chng.

72

ASSIGNMENT 16:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese Britain is divided into 651 constituencies and people in each constituency select one person to represent them in the House of Commons. The simple majority system of voting is used in parliamentary elections in Britain and voting is by secret ballot. There are moves to have this changed to a preferential system. Voting is voluntary. All British people who are 18 years of age or over and not legally barred from voting can vote. Members of the Royal Family peers and peeresses who are members of the House of Lords and foreign nationals are not allowed to vote. People who are disqualified include those who are kept in hospital for mental health reasons people serving prison sentences and people convicted within the previous five years of corruption. Candidates Anyone aged 21 or over holding British citizenship, or a citizen of another commonwealth country or the Irish Republic, who is qualified. May stand for election to Parliament. People who are not qualified are members of the House of Lords, elegy of the Church of England, Church of Ireland, Church of Scotland and the Roman Catholic Church. Neither are bankrupts, public servants and officials and those who have been sentenced to more than one years imprisonment. Candidates in a constituency have to pay a sum of money, about 1,000, as a deposit and if they get at least 5% of the votes they will get the money back. General Elections In theory, the election for or seats in the House of Commons takes place every five years. But, elections are usually held before the end of the five-year term. The Prime Minister has the right to decide when to hold a general election. Then the queen formally dissolves parliament and calls for the election of the new one. Britain is divided into areas called constituencies of roughly equal population. General elections often happen on a Thursday and people still go to word as usual. Therefore, the hours of voting are flexible, from 07:00 to 22:00; to give voters are given a ballot paper with the names of the candidates for that constituency, usually in alphabetical order, and sometimes with a brief description of the candidates backgrounds or their parties. After that, spoiled ballots are eliminated. The legal ballot papers are counted and the candidate with the most support is the winner and becomes the Member of Parliament for the constituency. The Campaign Three weeks before a general election is the time for the campaign. The campaign takes place in every constituency all over Britain. Candidates resort to different means to attract their supporters. Canvassing Canvassing means local party workers go from door to door and ask people how they intend to vote. In this way, candidates can know peoples voting intentions and attitudes so that they can adapt their campaign tactics. Party workers also revisit those who have promised to support their party and urge them to do so on polling day.

73 Public meetings Candidates have the right to hold public meetings whenever and wherever available during an election campaign. They invite guests including influential members of their parties, and wellknow people such as writers, actors and actresses, who support them, to the meetings and try to influence voters. Such meetings are often covered in detail by the media. The mass media Because newspapers and magazines in Britain are privately owned and financially independent of the political parties, the owners and the editors can decide to support any party they like, but radio and television are required to be impartial. News programmes cover all aspects of the major parties campaigns. On these occasions, candidates appear on television and radio day and night. They are televised in factories, school, youth centers, and the farms, giving speeches about their party policies. Talkback radio allows people to pose questions to political leaders, and reports and commentaries from journalists holding interviews with leading figures from all the parties are broadcast. Manifestos The main parties publish manifestos during the election campaign. Manifesto are often launched by each party at a press conference and inform people of their policies and what they will do if they win the election. Manifestos might include the past achievements of the party and can attack the policies of the their opponents.

ASSIGNMENT 17:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese Ha Noi- Ha Noi is trying to nearly double its Gross Domestic Product (GDP) to US$1,100 per capita over the next five years. The ambitious projection has been based on the current annual GDP growth rate of 11.9 per cent. Participants at yesterdays Ha Noi Communist Party Conference were told if the current growth rate continues as expected, it should reach 15 per cent by the turn of the century. This should translate into a doubling of the GDP. The conference was also told the traditional rural and small industry base of the capital citys economy had rapidly been replaced by industrial endeavor and the trading and services industries, and that about 19 per cent of Hanoi families could now be classified as well-off. Last years average GDP was estimated at $650 per capita compared with $470 in 1991. The sharp rise was due to massive investments from both foreign and domestic sources estimated as VND32, 570 (about $3.257 billion), according to a senior Ha Noi party official. Deputy Secretary of the Ha Noi Party Committee Le Xuan Tung told participants at the conference yesterday that part of the investment was spent on transfer of new technology and renovating equipment in existing industrial plants. The major part of the investment, however, was for setting up new joint ventures with foreign partners. By the end of 1995, up to 210 foreign investment projects had been licensed to operate in Ha Noi involving $3.3billion of prescribed capital. Of this amount $1.3billion has been consumed, Tung said.

74 This has helped Ha Noi along its chosen path to restructure its economic base towards industries and services rather than rely on its traditional agricultural and small industry underpinning. The proportion of industries and that of trade and services in Ha Noi GDP in the 1991-1995 period rose sharply to 33.1 per cent and 61.6 per cent respectively. Meanwhile the agricultural share fell to just 5.3 per cent of the total GDP share, Tung said. Tung said the change in the economic face of Hanoi was because of the sharp increase in the annual growth rate for the past five years. He said that a growth rate of 11.9 per cent was ensured year after year, which is almost double the figure set for the same period by the Ha Noi Party Committee back in 1991. Tung told participants that by the year 2000 the growth rate would reach 15 per cent per year and GDP per capita would be estimated at $1,100. By that stage the industrial share in Ha Noi GDP should reach 40 per cent, up seven per cent on the current rate. Five industries have been targeted as the key industries for the city, Tung said. They include mechanical engineering and electrical equipment production; textiles, garments and leather goods; the food processing industry electronics; and construction materials. In the next five years Ha Noi would need up to $9 billion in investment to develop new industrial zones, renovate existing industrial zones and build more high rise buildings in the inner city for office space, trade centers and entertainment centers. Hanoi has about 10 established and five new industrial zones. Many of the existing industrial areas need intensive-investment to replace old technology, and expand their premises for more plants. However the deputy party secretary for Hanoi reminded participants to the conference that more effort was needed to keep development in line with what he termed as a socialistoriented market economy. Ha Noi authorities had failed to pay due attention to the consolidation of socialist production relationships while the administration at all levels remained weak and the role of the Party in different economic and social organizations remained limited, he said. Tungs comments were supported by Party General Secretary Do Muoi, who also addressed the conference. The party leader told the Ha Noi conference that despite its initial success, Ha Noi should be more aware of economic development and human resource development. About six per cent of Hanois population remained unemployed which, Do Muoi said, was a challenge Ha Noi had to tackle. Part of the solution was to set up production groups, which could be engaged in small industries and the services industry. Deputy Secretary Tung said that in the 1991-1995 period the number of well-to-do families increased to nearly 19 per cent while those families classified as financially needy dropped to about two per cent.

75

ASSIGNMENT 18:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese Gardening is a traditional occupation in Vietnam and appeared at the same time or earlier than water rice cultivation. But VAC (abbreviation for vuon (garden), ao (pond for keeping fish) and chuong (husbandary) is an economic model that was introduced only 10 years ago. Foreigners who have come to Vietnam to learn about VAC in Vietnam say it is not very efficient in production scale and performance, but is a uniform cultivation model bringing both economic benefit and environmental advantages. From its first days of operation VAC has continually cemented its role in the national economic development. VAC now operates in 53 provinces, with over 10 million farmer households using the model. In recent years, VAC has been expanded in most localities throughout the country. Tens of thousands of hectares (on average) farms were set up in 13 midland and mountainous provinces) and -orchards were expanded to 350000-400,000 ha. This application of VAC became the main fruit suppliers for the country, simultaneously meeting export demand. According to the FAO, Vietnam's fruit output is at nearly four million tones per year, world's fruit output per capital at 65 kg, Asia Pacific 31 kg and Vietnam 61 kg. VAC has now become significant for the country's poverty alleviation and hunger eradication campaign providing on - the - spot jobs, prevention of malnutrition, permanent agriculture and settlement and for plantations for bare hills and barren land. Living standards of VAC households have improved greatly with revenue from VAC operations usually providing 60% of household's total income. VAC output value accounts for one of third of agricultural output value and will probably in-crease further. VAC has made rapid growth in the last 10 years, but has not penetrated all rural areas. If intensive cultivation and crop specialization was carried out through out the country, Vietnam's fruit output could reach 8 million tones per year in the 21st century. VAC should be considered as a national agricultural programme. If VAC is encouraged to reach its full potential, it will certainty obtain further effective growth contributing to the national economy and the environmental protection.

76

ASSIGNMENT 19:
Translate the following text into English Hm th Hai va ri, cc nh nghin cu cho rng h c bng chng kt lun rng ph-ng php iu tr thc nghim bng cch truyn huyt t-ng lm cho bnh pht trin chm lai cho bnh nhn nhim HIV d-ng tnh v ko di thm thi gian sng cho cc bnh nhn AIDS. Tuy nhin, ng Abraham khoa huyt hc ca H Cambridge, ni rng mc d cch cha bnh min nhim th ng l s t ph trong vic iu tr bnh AID S v khng gy phn ng ph no, th cng khng nn m t n nh- mt ph-ng php cha tr. Trong phn trnh by ca mnh ti mt hi ngh Lun n ng ni:Dt khot khng phi l mt ph-ng php cha tr. Chng thy g l cha tr c, nh-ng hnh nh- n l hnh thc cha tr tt nht. ng Karpasni vic nghin cu ca Php v M v cch cha bnh min nhim th ng -c thng bo ti hi ngh lm cho nghin cu ban u ca ng vng chc hn. ng tuyn b trong mt cuc phng vn qua in thoi rng: Vic nghin cwuws c tnh cht m mm v hn ch bng thuc trn an chng t rng vic cha tr ny c li cho bnh nhn mc bnh AID S v ko di thm thi gian sng ca h. ng ni rng nhng nghin cu do cng ty Hemacare Califonia v hai bnh vin Pa ri tin hnh cng cho they rng cch cha tr min nhim th ng gip lm chem. Li s tn cng d di cuarv bnh AIDS cc bnh nhn khi xt nghim they c HIV d-ng tnh, loi vi rt gy ra bnh cht ng-i ny. Qua cch cha tr min nhim th ng, hng thng cc bnh nhn -c truyn na lt huyt t-ng ly t ng-i khe mnh c nhim HIV d-ng tnh. Mu -c ly ht cc hng cu v bch hang cu v khng c vi rt HIV, nh-ng c scws khng trung ha cao dit -c vi rt. ng Karpras ni l ln u tin vo nm 1985 ng pht hin nhng ng-i khe mnh nh-ng b nhim HIV c sc khng ny mc cao trong mu trong khi cc bnh nhn AID S mt cc khng th trung ha ny c kh nng chng li bnh truyn nhim. Bn bnh nhn Cambridge l nhng ng-i u tin -c cha tr theo cch ny v sau cc th nghim trn qui m nh -c

77 tin hnh Lun n vo nm 1988 v 1989. Tuy nhin ng Karpras ni rng ng khng nhn -c quyx dnh cho cc nghin cu ny n-c Anh do vic nghin cu phi -c tin hnh M v Php. Th nghim ca Hemancare nghin cu tnh hiu qu ca cch cha tr min nhim th ng -c tin hnh trn 220 bnh nhn AIDS hn 3 nm. Trong 12 thng u cuc thc nghim cho they mc t vong gim rt nhiu trong khi bnh nhn -c truyn huyt t-ng, trong khi bnh nhn trong nhm kim ch bng thuc trn an khng -c cha tr th t l t vong cao gp 5 ln. Nhm -c iu tr c 1 ng-i b cht trong s 21 ng-i, trong nhm ng-i -c iu tr bng thuc trn an th c 6 trong tng s 30 b t vong. Hn na, s bnh ly nhim do bnh AID S gy ra thp hn nhiu trong nhm -c iu tr v chnh bn thn nhng ng-i hin mu hnh nh- h cng they c li. Cc nh nghin cu cho rng vic hin mu c v nh- kch thch vic sn sinh cc khng th trung ha trong mu ca cc bnh nhn nhim HIV d-ng tnh. ng Karpras ni rng cc nghin cu ca Php nhng kt qu t-ng t. ng ni l cc nghin cu M v Php cho bng chng kt lun u tin l min nhim th ng l mt ph-ng php iu tr hiu. cng tiu cch bnh em biu cha AIDS li ca tr hu

ASSIGNMENT 20:
Translate the following text into English Hm khc, b li k v mt gio s b bit. Vo mt m, ng ta thc gic v thy mt ng-i l mt ang da vo cui gi-ng ng. Mt cht lo s, v gio s bnh tnh hi xem ng-i mun g. Th-a, con mun x-ng ti, vi mt ging khn khn, ng-i n ng p. V gio s bo ng-i rng hy i n sng mai v lc ny khng tin x-ng ti. Ng-i n ng li th-a: Ln tr-c con n x-ng ti, nh-ng v xu h, con khng nhc n mt ti li con gy ra, v iu ny lun m nh trong tm tr con cho n gi. V gio s bit y l mt tr-ng hp rt ti t. Ng-i n ng thiu thnh tht khi x-ng ti v c l ng ta s phi nhn lnh ti cht.V gio s chong dy v chun b o qun. n lc ting g bt u gy ngoi sn, ng nhn quanh nh-ng khng thy ng-i

78 u c, ch ngi thy mi g chy. ng nhn li gi-ng nh-ng cng khng thy du i bn tay ang b chy. L do l v ng-i n ng thiu chn thnh lc x-ng ti. Cu chuyn li trong ti mt ni kinh hong. iu ti t nht l lc b Ryan by cho chng ti cch phn xt l-ng tm. Chng ta ku tn c Cha Tri c v c khng? Chng ta c phi tho knh vi cha m khng? (Ti hi b ta l c phi knh trng ng b khng v b bo l c!) C yu th-ng hng xm nh- chnh cho bn thn mnh khng? (Ti li ngh n s tin m Nora c -c vo th su hng tun.) Tnh li th ti cng vi phm 10 iu rn, tt c ch v b ni ti. V n by gi ti c th nhn ra rng chng no ni ti cn trong nh ti, chng ti vn cn tip tc phm ti. Ti s x-ng ti n mt hn va. Ngy c lp i, ti gi v au rng, hy vng s vng mt ca ti s khng gy s ch . Nh-ng vo lc 3 gi, khi ti ang cm thy yn n th mt anh chng chy dn, cng vi li nhn ca b Ryan bo rng ti phi x-ng ti vo ngy th by t nh nguyn cng v nhng ng-i cn li. Ti t hn na, m ti khng i cng ti m li l Nora. Gi y, Nora nm bun b. n bnh Nora c cch lm ti au n m m khng h bit. ly tay ti khi chng ti xung chn i, mm c-i Ch y t v th-ng hi ti nh- th ch ang -a ti vin cho mt ca m.

i Cha i! Xin hy gip chng con! Nora rn r. M cng chng c g ng tic v em u phi l mt a b ngoan phi khng Jackie? i, Jackie, tim ch ang nhi au v em y! Em s ngh nh- th no v ti li ca mnh nh? Ny, ng qun x-ng ci ti em phm vi b y nh! em i! , va ni ti c git tay mnh ra khi tay Nora. Em khng mun i x-ng ti u Sao li khng, em phi i Jackie ! Nora cng p li vi ging iu y v th-ng hi . Em phi i, nu khng cha x s n nh tm em y. C Cha mi bit, ch khng cm thy ti cho em cht no c. Em c nh ci ln em c git ch bng con dao ct bnh m khng? V c nhng li l em ni na? Ch khng bit ri Cha s lm g vi em. C th Cha s gi em cho c Gim Mc.

79 Mi tn by gi ti vn cn nh l ti suy ngh mt cch cay ng n th no. Ti ngh nu ti c i x-ng ti th ch y s khng bit n mt na nhng g ti s phi ni v lc y ti bng hiu ti sao ci anh chng trong cu chuyn ca b Ryan x-ng ti mt cch khng thnh tht. D-ng nhuwtooi cng cm thy rt xu h v mi ng-i khng ngng ch trch anh chng y. Ti vn cn nh nh- in ci i c con dc dn xung nh th. Ti cn nh c nhng nh t d-ng tri di hai bn ngn i nm xa xa ci thung lng bn b sng. Trong cnh t-ng y, khi quay nhn li nhng khong khng ca nhng ngi nh nm cch nhau, ti bng lin t-ng n ci nhn cui cng ca Adam v v-n a ng. Khi Nora ko ti xung ht nhng bc tam cp n sn nh th, ch y bng i ging. Nora tr nn hung d v c c nhchnh con ng-i tht ca ch y. n ri Nora ct cao ging rt t mn ri quay manh ng-i i nhanh vo ca nh th. Khi sp b-c i, ch khng qun nm mt cu na: V tau hi vng Cha s cho my c tht nhiu kinh hi li. ng l hn. Ri th ti bit mnh b lc lng tht s. Ti ang ng tr-c Ta phn xt. Khi ti b-c vo, cch ca vi nhng knh y mu sc bng ng sm sau l-ng ti. nh mt tri vt tt nh-ng ch cho bng ti thm su. Gi c xo xc bn ngoi lm cho s im lng bn trong d-ng nh- v ra lnh gi d-i chn ti. Nora ngi , i din vi cu b Jackie, bn cch ta x-ng ti. Tr-c Nora c thm hai c gi na. Ri bng nhin, mt bng en trng rt thm hi ang di n ng sau l-ng ti c nh- th kp ti vo gia ti khng th no thot -c du ti c can m n u. Ci bng en mi n - mt ng-i n ng- ng , vng tay li, mt di ln cao cu nguyn vi mt ging rt i thng hi. Lc y ti t hi mnh liu ng y c phi l ng-i cng ging ni ti khng. Bi v ch c b mi khin cho mt chng trai phi c- x mt cch thm th-ng nh- vy. Nh-ng d sao, anh y vn tt hn ti. t ra anh ta n y x-ng ti. Cn ti, c th ti s khng x-ng ti mt cch thnh tht, ri ti s b cht i trong bng m v lin tc tr v ph phch c.

80

ASSIGNMENT 21:
Translate the following texts into Vietnamese 1. Generally, after a time of stagnation, HCMC' s private textile embroidery industry has recovered and develop somewhat since 1991. Yet development is not stable because most private units work according to foreign orders. Consequently, they can't control their production plan, and labour price for making garments is limited by foreign partners (the labour cost of 1995 is equal to 65 - 70% of that in 1991 - 1992). Due to the very nature of the industry, the average wage of those working in this branch is only about VND 400,000 per month. Under the current fierce competition, the amount of 15% of total wages for social insurance and 2% for medical insurance that enterprises must contribute, if the proposed social insurance scheme comes into effect, will push up production costs to very high levels, making it difficult for Vietnamese ventures to compete effectively and occupy the market. To help private textile embroidery businesses survive, Mr. Nam has suggested, the State should amend the contribution rate of non - State ventures to Social Insurance schemes, as follows: - Social Insurance: 10% by enterprise, 3% by employee. - Medical Insurance: 1 % by enterprises, 1 % by employee The State should also issue a regulation concerning employees who are trained and recruited by an enterprise, and are obligated to work for at least two years. It is necessary that employees working at non-- State ventures should be given a work card. Employer agreement may be required if an employee want to leave his or her job. All members of HCMC's Textile - Embroidery Association agree on the implementation of contributing a part of total wages to Social and Medical Insurance, in compliance with the Labour Code. 2. Business leaders of big companies in HCMC have voiced difficulties they are facing with in the fierce competition against foreign companies, especially world giants. At a meeting on "How to encourage foreign investment and protect domestic production" held in HCMC last week, producers of Tico and Lux Detergent, P/S Cosmetics, Tribeco Soft Drink, Viet Thang Textiles, Saigon Beer and HCMC Poultry Company, had the same opinion that local enterprises are not in an equal footing in competing with foreign counterparts as they do not enjoy tax incentives as foreign-invested enterprises. Only a year after the US embargo was lifted, soft drink giants such as Coca Cola and Pepsi Cola, which have enjoyed superior advantages in capital, marketing policies and preferences under the Foreign Investment Law, have gradually eaten into the market shares of local producers. Other products are also in the same situation. Saigon Beer has to compete fiercely with breweries of foreign Joint-ventures. Local detergent producers, although capable of meeting domestic demand to the year 2000, have driven into the corner by giants such as Procter & Gamble and Unilever. To protect domestic production, local producers have proposed several measures to the Government. First, the State should devise specific development plans for foreign investment in terms of business field and geographical area and should not encourage foreign investment in products, which local enterprises can produce such as soft drink, detergent, paper and

81 cigarettes. Second, licenses should be granted only to JVs or 100% foreign-owned enterprises, which involve in projects requiring large capital, advanced technology or producing goods for export. Third, a law should be enacted against unfair competition that can lead to monopoly, dumping or price inflation that does not benefit consumers. Fourth, there should be a policy to encourage domestic investment and to grant domestic enterprises the same tax incentives as foreign investors enjoy. Fifth, a campaign to motivate local consumers to use domestic goods should be launched, creating conditions for domestic enterprises to develop.

ASSIGNMENT 22:
Translate the following text into English Ng-i ngho th-ng c nhiu con hn nhng ng-i thuc gii trung l-u v th-ng l-u. V dn cc n-c km pht trin th c nhiu con hn dn ca cc n-c pht trin. Ngy cng c nhiu chuyn gia v dn s thy -c mi quan h khng kht gia s con trong gia nh v s pht trin kinh t. Ti mt vi vng, dch v k hoch ha gia nh ca chnh ph c l khng c i vi dn ngho do iu kin a l. Chng hn nh- ng-i dn nng thn sng qu xa trung tm k hoch ha gia nh. Do vy h khng nhn -c thng tin v cch thc hn ch sinh . Nhn chung th dn thnh th c nhiu thng tin hn dn nng thn. Dn thnh th -c h tr dch v k hoch ha gia nh, v h c gia nh t con hn. V th chng ta c th ni rng v tr a l ni m ng-i dn sng ng mt vai tr qan trng trong vic quyt dnh mt gia nh nn sinh bao nhiu con: Gia nh sng thnh th th c t con hn gia nh sng nng thn. Nhng l do khc l g? S pht trin kinh t gia nh, hay mt phm vi ln hn l ca mt n-c, l mt nhn t quan trng trong vic quyt nh s con trong gia nh. Ng-i c nhiu tin th c t con. Ng-c li, ng-i ngho n-c km pht trin mun c nhiu con. Ti sao? Do h phi l thuc vo s chm sc ca con ci khi v gi. H khng c bo him, tin h-u, hay s gip ca chnh ph. Khi h gi c th ai s gip h. Cu tr li rt n gin. H c th v s quay sang nh con ci gip . Con ci ca h by gi tr thnh ng-i ln v ang i lm vic. Tt c con ci ca h u phi chia s v gnh vc trch nhim chm sc cha m. i vi nhiu ng-i ngho, mt gia nh ng con l mt cch thc hoch nh cho t-ng lai. Chng ta c th ni rng gia nh ng con l ngun bo him cho tui gi.

82

ASSIGNMENT 23:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese Indonesia will face a record food deficit this year as a result of lower harvests and a financial crisis that has raised the cost of imports, two UN food agencies said yesterday. In a joint report, the Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO) and the world Food programme (WFP) said large - scale international assistance would be needed to meet a short fall in rice, the country's main staple food. " FA0 - WFP urge donor countries to assist Indonesia in managing its drought- and financial crisis- related food problems " the report by the two Rome - based organizations said. Steep food price increases and rapidly growing unemployment were adding large numbers of people to those already living below the poverty line, the report added. " Approximately 7,5 million poor Indonesians in 15 provinces may experience acute food short ages during the upcoming dry season ". said the report on the world's fourth - most populous country whose economy has been shattered. The report was based on findings of an 11-- member mission from the two agencies, which visited the country from March 9 to April 1 in 1998. This years yield would be about 47.5 million tones, 3.6 percent below last year's production. The shortfall was due to one of Indonesia's worst droughts this century. The report said the Indonesian government planned to import about 1.5 million tones of rice between April and September but this would still leave a deficit of two million tones. The shortfall would have to be made up by the international community in order to help the country to revive its battered economy. The major challenge facing the country was to ensure the food supply for some 7.5 million poor people since rice and overall food prices have increased by about 60 percent in the last 12 months, the report said.

ASSIGNMENT 24:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese Vietnam on Wednesday said it would join the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN) next year, dispelling speculation that Hanoi might put off membership until it. was better prepared. "Vietnam is now actively preparing all necessary conditions to become a full member of ASEAN next year," Deputy Prime Minister Phan Van Khai told business people over lunch organised by the Switzerland - based World Economic Forum (WEF), which is hosting a three day meeting here. Khai said that Hanoi would also participate in other regional organisations and would join the 17 - member Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) forum "When it is possible".

83 In Jakarta, Vietnamese Deputy Foreign Minister Vu Khoan was quoted as saying that his country would file an application for ASEAN membership by the end of this month or early in November. Khoan, who was speaking after meeting Jakarta - based ASEAN Secretary - general Ajil, Singh, said he did not expect any difficulties in joining, as quoted by the Antara news agency. APEC 's members include the ASEAN countries- - Brunei; Indonesia, Malaysia, the Philippines, Singapore and Thailand- - as well as the United States, Canada, Japan and China. An informal APEC leaders meeting will be held in Indonesia next month. Vietnam, which gained observer status in ASEAN in 1992, has said it is keen to become a full member of the group, which has ambitious programmes for cooperation, including the launch of an ASEAN Free Trade Area within 10 years. ASEAN officials had hoped that Vietnam might join ASEAN before leaders of the group 's six current members hold their next summit in Thailand in December 1995. "There are already regulations for cooperation in ASEAN. Once we are a member we will follow all regulations," Khai told reporters later, adding that Hanoi would work with others in Southeast Asia to ensure regional peace. Khai said his government would push ahead with reforms to improve conditions for foreign investment by putting a new legal framework and better administrative procedures in place. "We deeply understand that Vietnam is facing great challenges of global economic competition and so must try hard to do away with the danger of being left far behind by neighbouring countries, "he said

ASSIGNMENT 25:
Translate the following texts into Vietnamese 1. Ngnh sn xut pht trin ng k trong thi k ti thit nn kinh t ca Philippines sau Chin tranh Th gii th II. Vic kim sot hng ho nhp khu ca chnh ph thc y s pht trin ngnh cng nghip nh sn xut cc mt hng tiu dng cho th trng trong nc. Vo nhng nm 70, chnh ph xy dng bn c khu kinh t nhm tng cng sn xut hng ho xut khu. Cc ngnh cng nghip trong cc khu ch xut ny c khuyn khch sn xut cc mt hng xut khu truyn thng. Nhng c khu kinh t ny thu ht vn u t ca nc ngoi vo Philippines mt phn nh vo chnh sch min thu cho cc doanh nghip c vn u t nc ngoi. Xy dng thnh cng nhng c khu kinh t ny to tin cho s ra i cc khu cng nghip c qui m ln hn. Chng hn nh, cn c hi qun Subic Bay ca M trc y nay tr thnh mt khu thng mi-cng nghip khng l Manila. Mt khu cng nghip-thng mi ln vi c s h tng hin i v c min thu thu ht cc ngnh cng nghip sn xut hng xut khu v u t nc ngoi. 2. Vit Nam n lc duy tr s n nh chnh tr x hi, pht trin kinh t v quan h ngoi giao trong nhng nm gn y. Nhng thay i tch cc ca lut php nh hng khng nh n tnh hnh sn xut, ti chnh v thng mi. Nh nng nghip thch ng vi th trng t do nn Vit Nam c xp l nc xut khu go ln th hai trn th gii sau Thi Lan. Ti Thnh ph H Ch Minh v vng ph cn nhng hot ng dch v v sn xut pht trin v thay i nhanh chng. Kinh t pht trin mnh mt phn nh vo ngun u t vn v cng ngh ca gn 2 triu Vit Kiu cc nc trn th gii. a s h quay tr v Vit Nam u t v lin lc vi b con.

84

3. Ch 1 nm sau khi lnh cm vn ca M -c bi b, cc cng ty n-c gii kht khng l nh- Coca-cola, Pep si- Cola -c h-ng -u i v vn, chnh sch tip th v cc -u i khc theo lut u T- N-c Ngoi, nn cc cng ty ny dn dn thm nhp th phn ca cc nh sn xut trong n-c. Cc sn phm khc cng ri vo hon cnh t-ng t. Bia Si Gn phi cnh tranh quyt lit vi cc cng ty bia lin doanh vi n-c ngoi. Cc nh sn xut bt git trong n-c, mc d c th p ng nhu cu trong n-c n nm 2005, nh-ng li b cc cng ty khng l nh- Procter & Gamble v Unilever dn vo th b. 4. bo v vic sn xut trong n-c, cc nh sn xut trong n-c ngh vi chnh ph mt s bin php. Th nht, nh n-c nn c k hoch pht trin dnh ring cho vic u t- n-c ngoi v lnh vc kinh doanh v phn b theo vng a l v khng nn khuyn khch u t- n-c ngoi vo vic sn xut ra cc sn phm m cc doanh nghip trong n-c c kh nng sn xut -c nh- n-c gii kht, bt git, giy v thuc l. Th hai, vic cp giy php nn -c p dng cho cc cng ty lin doanh hay cc doanh nghip c vn u t- n-c ngoi tham gia vo cc d n i hi c nhiu vn, cng ngh cao hay sn xut cc mt hng xut khu. Th ba, l nn c mt o lut chng i vic cnh tranh khng lnh mnh c th dn c quyn kinh doanh, ph gi lm hi ng-i tiu dng. 5. Trong ting Vit, t nc va c ngha l quc gia, va c ngha l nc, mt lin kt v ngn ng m mi rng buc cng thy r rng sau mt chuyn i thm vng t ph nhiu nht Vit Nam: ng bng sng Cu Long. Do ph sa bi p ca dng sng Cu Long lm phong ph va la y p ny, tng trng cho ngun lng thc ca c nc cng nh phong cch sinh hot k cn sng nc ca c dn trong vng. i vi du khch, ng bng sng Cu Long l mt trong nhng a ch tham quan p nht ng Nam , kt hp ci k o ca vng sng nc lung linh vi cnh quan y phn khi ca mt nn vn ho vui ti th hin qua cch sinh hot ca dn a phng cng hot ng thng mi. Trong khi nhng thnh ph ln nh Cn Th, M Tho, Long Xuyn lp thnh th vng cho cc tnh ca ng bng sng Cu Long th mng li knh rch mnh mng li l ci duyn c mt khng hai ca vng ny. Sinh hot vui nhn ca vng ny khng ging my vi cch sinh hot ca Thnh ph H Ch Minh. Tuy nhin iu khng c ngha l phi kh khn lm mi ti c ng bng sng Cu Long thot khi ci n o no nhit ca thnh ph ln nht Min Nam ny. Ch mt chng ba gi ng h bng xe trn Quc l 1 l bn l bn n M Tho, th ph ca tnh Tin Giang v l im xut pht tt cho cuc thm d vng ng bng ny.

79

CHAPTER 3:
ASSIGNMENT 1:
II. EXERCISES:
A. 1. change of form 2. change of meaning 3. change of form 4. change of meaning 5. change of form B

ASSIGNMENT KEYS

6.the jug contains water/ the jug of water/ 7. a car was bought by John/ John owned a car/ A car belonged to John. 8. the day is hot/ the day, which is hot 9. a blue long dress of mother/ mother has a blue long dress 10. the house of Peter/ Peter is the owner of the house/ Peter owns the house C. 1. the place where doctor works/ the docter owns the office 2 someone is treated by the doctor 3. thec doctor owns the book 4. the relative of the doctor/ the kinship 5. the hand is part of the doctor 6. the doctor owns the house D. 1. the same in meaning 2. different in meaning 3. the same in meaning 4 . the same in meaning 5. the same in meaning 6. the same in meaning 7. the same in meaning 8. different in meaning 9. the same in meaning 10. different in meaning E.

80 1. Where did you have/ get your shirt made? 2. Da Lat, which is surrounded by the great/imposing hills and mountains, takes up/covers/is situated in a large area on the Lam Vien Plateau. 3. Despite the great improvement in the woman status, other things must be done to improve womens health, nutrition and education. 4. Nowadays, the world has been facing a number of serious problems in spite of the fact that there have been dramatic progress in science, technologyand knowledge. One of the problems is the population explosion/boom in the developing countries. The population is growing in geometric progression while thee production of goods is growing in arithmetic prgression . 5. Charles Dickens, who belongs to the school of critical realism, is one of the greatest novelists in the world. What we value in his works is the criticism about evils and the contrast between the wealth and poverty in the English bougeois society of his time. The world he describes is that of the middle and lower classes in London.

ASSIGNMENT 2:
II. A. 1. b. B. 1. Foreign tourists usually at Kinh Do Hotel for this hotel has been recommended by their friends. 2. Since the USA lifted the embargo against Vietnam, many foreign countries have been investing in Vietnam. 3. Hue is famous for its delicious dishes and beautiful landscapes. 4. The participants discussed the causes of pollution environment. 5 . A motorcycle rider was robbed at Kampung early yesterday morning. C. 1. change word order 2. change structure/ change word collocation 3. change set expression 4. change the meaning of the verb and adjective 5. omitting relative clause D. 1. Thac Mo is a hydroelectric works with a designed of 150000 KW, annually produce 600 million KWH/ has an average annual output of 150000 KWH. 2. To construct this, nearly 15 million cubic meters of earth and stone must be dug up and banked up; over 350000 cubic meters of filtering layers were embanked; about 220000 cubic 2.a 3. a 4.a

81 meters of concrete were used and nearly 7000 tons of equipment and metal structures were installed. 3. Despite such enormous volume, the government has decided to have the construction finished in two years since the demand in power supply of southern localities has become very pressing. 4. So far, the construction units have carried out about 90% of the dug-up earth volume, concreted some 40% of the concrete volume. 5. According Mr. Nguyen Ba Man, head of the work managing committee, nearly all the basic items have met the demand in construction speed. 6. In mid November 93, the Prime Minister Vo Van Kiet came to inspect the building of Thac Mo Hydroelectric works. 7. The field leaders assured the Prime Minister that they already have grounds to ensure the operation of Turbine 1 in June 1994. 8. The task of blocking the current of Song Be River will start in December. 9. Thus, there will be a significant coincidence when Turbine 1 of Thac Mo Hydro-electric Plant starts operating. The North-South 500 KV transmission line will also be completed simultaneously. 10. With these sources of power in 1994, the South will basically free itself from the hunger for electricity.

D.
1. Mc d k t nm 1990, ngn sch nh n-c dnh cho cc tr-ng hc -c tng ln nh-ng vn cn rt thp so vi nhu cu trang b y cho tr-ng hc v ci tin cht l-ng o to. 2. Tng thng Putin khng nh rng n-c Nga lun coi trng mi quan h vi Vit Nam , ng-i bn truyn thng v l i tc chin l-c ng Nam . 3. Ng-i ta lp d n tng thm c hi hi nhp cho 3000 tr em khuyt tt ba tnh , mt vng ni, mt vng duyn hi Min Trung v mt vng su vng xa 4. H tho lun mt lot cc bin php nhm mc ch bo m s hp tc ton din v kinh t, th-ng mi, khoa hc v k thut. 5. Ng-i ta ang thc hin mi n lc nng cao nhn thc ca ph n v vic h c quyn -c h-ng s an ton lao ng , hay iu kin v sinh lao ng thng qua mng l-i truyn thng m rng. 6. R rng rng cc tr-ng hc cc tnh pha nam c nhiu phng my v phng thc hnh -c dng vo vic ngoi ng hn cc tr-ng cc tnh pha Bc. 7. c bn d n u t- n-c ngoi cho gio dc. Vn u tch yu t Ngn Hng Th Gii v Ngn hng Pht trin Chu .

82 8. 38 trong s 50 sinh vin ngoi ng -c bo Vietnam Courier ni rng h khng thch lm vic cho cc cng ty -c n-c ngoi u t-. 9. Vit Nam v Trung Quc ng m cc cuc m phn k kt mt hip nh v lnh th v bin gii v mt hip nh v lnh hi tr-c nm 2000. 10. Mi y chnh ph d-a ra bin php khch l nh- gim thu hoc cho vay -u i cho nhng ch nhn s dng nhiu cng nhn n.

ASSIGNMENT 3:
Translate the following sentences into Vietnamese 1. Since early in the last lunar month, Tet has already roamed around the vicinities of Hanoi. 2. The peasants in the suburbs are probably the ones to feel the presence of Tet before anyone else because all their tasks from taking care of vegetables, fruits, grass, flowers to fattening pigs and poultry are for Tets sake. 3. Moving down from Kinh Bac, we will see immense fields of flowers especially gladioli of all colors. 4. Adjacent to the inner city are flower districts: Nhat Tan, Nghi Tam, Quang Ba with a number of varieties: dark pink peach blossoms, juicy golden kamquat, purplish violet and bright red gerbera . 5. A few year ago, here was a vast land of flowers sufficiently meeting the need of ornamental plants for Hanoi people. 6. The local inhabitants have long been artisans devoting their lives to growing flowers. 7. It is a regret to see the narrowing flower acreage due to a change in business of a number of artisans. 8. Some have sold their land and left their occupations forever. Others have turned to building luxury villas rented out as mini hotels to foreign tourists with their own capital or in cooperation with those who have capital. 9. Stores and shops have musroomed, selling all kinds of goods from the most popular to the top-graded ones. 10 No wonder why Hanoi has changed and been developed in the open-door time. Hopefully, Hanoi and its people will always deserve the land of age-old culture. B 1. Mn trnh din chnh ca l hi l mt mn din mang tn t Lnh Chim u d-c trnh din ng thi ba sn khu ln khu trung tm. 2. Ton b khu vc quanh n tp trung c kn ng-i, ch cha my khong nh cho nhng nghi l -c tin hnh.

83 3. gim bt chi ph trong vic tng kh nng tip cn cu tr em tn tt vi gio dc, chnh ph pht ng ch-ng trnh gio dc v hi nhp cng ng. 4. Trong nhng nm gn y lp li trt t cng cng, H Ni di mt s khu ch tm n nhng vng -c qui nh. Nh-ng trong s 4 khu ch -c qui nh , th ch c ch ng Tm -c di t khu dn c- ng a sang khu vc i La. 5. Ngoi vic u t- t ngn sch nh n-c, tt c cc tr-ng hc phi tm cc ngun ti chnh khc mua dng dy hc. Tuy nhin, cc ngun ny ch bng 13% ngn sch nh n-c dnh cho cc tr-ng ph thng v 21% cho cc tr-ng i hc. 6. Tng thu nhp ngn sch nh n-c t xp x mc ra ban u. Nhng ngun chi tiu bnh th-ng vn -c m bo, trong khi cc khon chi bt th-ng cho cc vng b bo, lt, hn hn vn -c thc hin. Vic thm ht ngn sch nh n-c -c gi mc cho php l 3,6% tng thu nhp quc ni vo nm 1998, thp hn nm 1997 l 4,2%. 7.. S pht trin kinh t ca Vit Nam phi -c xt trong hon cnh chin tranh ko di. Hon cnh chin tranh y gy ra nhiu thit hi v sinh mng v ti sn cng nh- cc cng trnh cng cng v ti nguyn. 8. Mng l-i truyn hnh ang xy dng rng khp c n-c. Ngoi nhng i truyn hnh t-ng i hin i, c t lu i nh- i truyn hnh H Ni v Thnh Ph H Ch Minh, cn c 25 i thuc cc tnh -c thnh lp vo nm 1988. Nhng i truyn hnh ny s truyn nhng ch-ng trnh quan trng ca i truyn hnh trung -ng v pht ch-ng trnh ca i mnh. 9. Hi Lin Hip Ph N Vit Nam -c c i din Quc Hi v ch tch hi -c quyn tham d cc cuc hp th-ng k ca Hi ng B Tr-ng by t quan im ca Hi v ngh nhng iu l lin quan n ph n. 10. Gia nh Vit Nam chu nh h-ng r rt ca nn vn minh nng nghip. Do chnh sch m ca, nn vn minh cng nghip ang tc ng tng ngy, tng gi vo cuc sng gia nh Vit Nam.

ASSIGNMENT 4:

84 A. 1. to give information 2. about invironmental protection / to be more exact, it is about deforestation. 3. It depends on the leaners ability. 4. yes/ a bilingual dictionary and the context could help to discover the meanings of these words. 5.yes 6. `

NN PH RNG

S gia tng dn s l mt nhn t gy ra nn ph rng nhit i. Tuy nhin, nu cho rng vic m rng mt nn nng nghip t cung t cp nui sng nhiu ming n hn l nguyn nhn chnh, th y l mt gii thch v cn c. i b phn rng Chu M La Tinh, N v Thi Bnh D-ng b tn ph l do vic khai hoang trng cc loi nng sn xut khu v do cc hot ng bun bn g , ch khng phi do nn du canh, du c- v t in gy nn. Hng nm hot ng bun bn g ph hu 4500 km2 rng, phn ln g -c xut khu sang M v Nht. Mi lin h gia nn ph rng v nhu cu thnh lp x hi phn vinh -c thy r nt nht Trung M v Brazin ni nhng cnh rng nhit i b bin thnh ng c chn th v vic nui gia sc mang li cc khon li nhun xut khu gip tr n n-c ngoi. Khon n n-c ngoi khng l ang nng ln vai dn ngho ch yu -c dng trang tri cho cc khon mua sm xa x ca chnh ph v qun i. Vic xy dng cc in trang chn th rng ln l nguyn nhn chnh dn n vic ph hu 2000 km2 rng nhit i hng nm Trung v Nam M. t khai hoang ch yu dng cho vic nui b xut khu phc v cho ngnh cng nghip thc n nhanh Bc M, Chu u v Nht- vng xng vi tn gi l vng giao l-u hamburger A. 1. to give information 2. about Vietnam,its language and people 3. It depends on the leaners ability. 4. yes/ a bilingual dictionary and the context could help to discover the meanings of these words. 5.yes COUNTRY Our ancestors drank the water from the Red River, Da River, Me Kong River and tried hard/ spare no pain to protect them. Just think about the fact that very few languages in the world enjoy the uniformity as in the case of our mother tongue. In Vietnam, the word nuoc (in the river, lake and sea) have a synonym and homonym of the word nuoc signifying homeland.

85 Here like an immortal bloc the rivers and people are closely linked to the nature and people by a kind of everlasting cement. That is the patriotism of the Vietnamese people. In the world, there are many countries where people cannot communicate with one another when they travel from one province to another. In Vietnam, on the contrary, no matter where they are from, the north or the south, people are able to understand one another right at the first meeting.

ASSIGNMENT 5:
A. 1. Trong lch s loi ng-i khoa hc -c xem nh- c s mnh gii phng con ng-i khi s ngu dt, s m tn, gim i ngho v tng tm hiu bit ca con ng-i v th gii. 2. T N. A ca ngi cc nh khoa hc ca thi i l cc nh truyn b nh sng, nhng ng-i s xua tan bng m v m ra con -ng cho con ng-i chinh phc thin nhin. Trong thi k , nhng pht minh khng t-ng nh- my bay, tu ngm v in thoi -c d bo tr-c. 3. Nhng ai quan tm n ngnh cng ngh my tnh tin rng chng ta ang tri qua mt cuc cch mng v my tnh. Ti sao cuc cch mng ny xy ra ? iu ny c mang li hu qu g cho x hi? tr li nhng cu hi ny, cn pha s l-c v lch s my tnh. 4. My tnh u tin -bn tnh , do ng-i Trung Quc pht minh cch y 5000 nm l tin thn ca my tnh hin i sau ny. Cho n th k th 17, Chu u ch-a c g c th snh bng bn tnh v tc cng nh- chnh xc trong tnh ton. 5. My tnh -c pht trin ng thi c, Anh v M tng thm tc cng nh- chnh xc trong tnh ton cn cho vic gii m thng ip ca k th. 6. Ngy nay , nhiu cng vic trong cc khu sn xut v dch v do con ng-i m trch c th -c thc hin nhanh hn v t tn km hn nh s tr gip ca cng ngh my tnh v cc thit b -c my tnh kim sot. 7. Ng-i my ang dn thay th cng nhn trong dy chuyn sn xut nh- nh my ch to t Fiat ca v Nissan ca Nht. Vo nm 1980, 50 robot -c cc cng ty ca c s dng chng hn nh- hng General Motors Ford, Nissan v Simpson Pope 8. Cng ty no khng s dng cng ngh my tnh u khng th cnh tranh -c vi cc i th p dng cng ngh ny. Bng chng l s tht bi ca cng nghip sn xut ng h Thu S trong 2 nm va qua do b ng h in t cnh tranh nn tht thu 200 triu la mi nm.

86 9. Cng vi vic c gii ho mt s qui trnh sn xut, b-c u gy ra nn tht nghip vi s l-ng ln. Nhng ngh nhn lnh ngh trong ngnh tiu th cng nghip vn khan him tr-c y, nay bng d-ng t h cm thy tha d- v thiu k nng trong nn cng ngh hin i. 10. Nhng t-ng khoa hc v i ny pht trin vo th k 18 v 19. Cuc cch mng cng nghip Anh vo cui th k 18 cng cng c nim tin vo mt x hi khoa hc k thut mc d li nhun x hi thu vo khng b -c chi ph x hi b ra . B 1. Dung Quat Bay is to the northeast of Binh Son District, QN Province. It is 18 km long and is protected by mountain ranges. 2. To the south of the bay is an area of flat land having geographical structure with an area of tens of square kilometers. 3. Here will be formed / established heavy industry and chemical zones, oil refineries, sea products processing zone, light industry zone, and a modern urban residential area with about 600000 inhabitants./ with a population of about 600000. 4. Another advantage is that Dung Quat lies about 12 km from roadway, railway lines, power transmission line and the trans-Vietnam optic cable. Thev supply of fresh water for this area is very convenient with a reserve of about 3 billion cubic meters per year taken from the Tra Bong River. 5. Today, we are going through a period of profound social changes like that of the first industrial revolution. It may be necessary for us to re-define the very notion of work itself.

ASSIGNMENT 6:
A. Translate the following sentences into English. 1. The silt from the Mekong River helps to bring an ample granary representing the whole countrys source of food as well as the local inhabitants riverside lifestyle 2. The Mekong river itself with its huge tributaries and small canals navigable for tiny boats creates a majesty landscape as it flows through VN, the last part of its 4500 km-long journey, pouring into the East Sea. 3. It is significant that these overseas Vietnamese always direct their attention to their homeland, cherish a close link with their families and preserve the national identity which typifies the Vietnamese. 4. In addition to their support for their relatives, a number of overseas Vietnamese have contributed to the welfare of their country and taken part in relief movements to help those who suffer from natural calamities. They have also participated in the charity work following the tradition the luckier should help the sufferer. 5. Before 1988, the effect of the banking system on the development and macro-economic management was minimal. In order to encourage the banking system to play a more constructive role, the government has taken new measures including the reorganization of the

87 banking system, the introduction of restrictive credit policies, and new policies on interest and free trade of gold in market. 6. The government implemented a comprehensive reconstructuring of wages and salaries of the governmental employees with a consolidation of consumer subsidies into the nominal wage structure. Though the monthly minimum wage increased, real salaries have declined substantially as a result of inflation. 7.The survey conducted by the VWU shows that traditional contraceptive methods have been widely used. The survey also indicates that 39% of married women used modern methods, the most frequent method being intra uterine device (IUD). B. 1. Nhng ng-i khi x-ng ra vic dng nng l-ng nguyn t nhn mnh rng th gii ny ri y chc cn s tr thnh mt th gii ca nguyn t. Ng-i ta cng cho rng nhng ng-i chng i li vic s dng nguyn t ang chng li tro l-u ca lch s v c mi quan h gn gi vi dng h Luddites vn l nhng ng-i ch tr-ng p ph my mc ngay t khi cuc cch mng cng nghip bt u. 2. Cc bc s cho thy ln u tin h c th ti to cc h min nhim ca nhng ng-i b nhim vi rt bnh AIDS bng cch t ngt tng s l-ng t bo mu m vi rt HIV hu dit. 3. Trong lnh vc o to y khoa, nhng vic lm -c trong nhng nm qua -c nh du bng s kin ni bt l vic nhiu chuyn gia v o to y khoa , nhiu tr-ng i hc trn th gii dt vn phi xem xt li ni dung o to i ng cn b y t . 4. Ng-i thy thuc ngy nay nn l ng-i ca sc kho . V vy ng-i thy thuc cn phi bit pht hin , gii quyt , phc hi nhng vn sc kho ca c nhn v cng ng. 5. R rng rng mt thn th kho mnh gip cho mt tm hn lnh mnh, v chnh nhng tm hn lnh mnh iu khin h-ng i ca h thng gi tr. Mt ng-i kho mnh l mt ng-i kho mnh v mt th cht ln tinh thn. 6. Ngy nay con ng-i c khuynh h-ng lo u v sc kho th cht. Tuy nhin ti mun nhn mnh ti tm quan trng ca sc kho tm l. Mnh kho v mt tinh thn l rt quan trng v l mt ng-i thc s kho mnh l ng-i t -c s thng bng hp l gia th cht v tinh thn.

88

ASSIGNMENT 7:
1. The achievements of the renovation process in the past ten years have provided opportunities for women to obtain their goals. Their lives have been improved and women have become less burdened. Social services have helped to ease their housework and create favourable conditions for them to participate in social activities. 2. The Vietnam Womens Union which represents Vietnamese women nationwide , has renovated their organization and work style , thus attracting more and more women to social activities. It has also helped women deal with difficult matters of every life. It has proposed to the state laws and policies that make full use of womens potentials in the process of renovation. 3. Identification of the factors that leads to fast effective foreign language learning has become increasingly important because of a majority of learners who are very anxious , as adults, to learn a foreign language for a specific purpose : business, study, and diplomacy. The requirements for effective language learning may be taken into account in terms of the learners, the teachers and the curriculum. 4. The greatest attraction to the tourists is the age-old traditions typical of the Vietnamese culture. Thousands of historical and revolutionary relics have been graded by the government , hundreds of which have high artistic and historical value . Vietnam is a large community consisting of 54 ethnic groups with different traditions , customs and unique folk culture. hundreds of traditional handicraft villages have produced thousands of famous handicraft and fine art products. 5. If tourists go to an ethnic minority region, they will have an opportunity to engage in other fascinating cultural activities typical of the rainforest region. Take the buffalo stabbing ceremony as an example. Tourists should have to be present about a week before the ceremony to join the local inhabitants in looking for a suitable kind of bamboo to repair the Rong House (The community House) and to make a Neu tree ( The New Year Tree) to chase evil spirits. The ceremony provides tourists with a chance to observe the decoration of jars and the way they are chosen to store wine. They also have an opportunity to observe the way people choose the buffalo for the ceremony. 6. Social welfare is a major policy of Vietnam which has its origin in the age-old national traditions of solidarity and mutual assistance. The basic principle of the policy is to combine the responsibility of the state, the community, and the efforts of each individual within the society. This policy is being gradually extended to all the inhabitants in various forms. 7. Economic backwardness and the danger of lagging behind in the economic development are the great concerns of all the Vietnamese at home and abroad . If Vietnam lags far behind other countries, it will be a supplier of raw materials and cheap labour in the international division of labour. It will have to accept an inferior position and losses in the international cooperation and competition. This is the great challenge facing Vietnam in the current international context. 8. The humanism of the Vietnamese diplomatic line constitutes a typical characteristic. Though the Vietnamese have been victims of countless aggressions, they never lose their compassion . Also, their compassion is a factor which creates the strength and the diplomacy of the nation. Nguyen Trai, a national hero of the 15th century, left a legendary guiding principle which remains today: Using great justice to vanquish cruelty Humanism to subdue brutality

89

ASSIGNMENT 8:
Translate the following text into English

Beijing may be the seat of political power, but Shanghai can lay claim to the title of commercial capital. Historic sites date back less than 80 years in Shanghai, and yet most visitors fall under the spell of this unique city where ambience is everything. The very name Shanghai still sends a ripple of excitement down most spines. It was a minor weaving and fishing town until the mid 19th century, when it began to develop as a trading and industrial center. Entrepreneurs and carpetbaggers from all over the world descended and developed it into one of the world's most cosmopolitan and sophisticated cities. From the 1920s on it became increasingly notorious as the place where anything could - and usually did - happen. Banks and commercial companies of all kinds built opulent head offices for themselves overlooking what were then open rice fields beyond the banks of the Huangpu river. This whole stretch has survived the busy bulldozers and today it forms a unique open - air museum of 1930s architecture. A stroll along the Bund is a must for everyone who visits what is still regarded by many as China's leading city. Skyscrapers, including some of the world's tallest buildings, have sprouted where the rice used to grow. The most prominent is the Oriental Pearl TV Tower - if time allows, the panoramic views from the upper levels make an unforgettable experience. The past is still tangible in sections of the former French concession, with its elegant villas and tree - lined streets. Around the corner from the Bund, the Peace Hotel and its venerable Jazz Band Are the best-known survivors from a more gracious age, but Shanghai has many other exquisite hotels from the 1930s, most of which are being lovingly restored to their former glory. Shanghai boasts one of the world's truly great museums, opened in 1996. It would be impossible to tour the entire treasure huose in a short visit, but even an hour in the galleries devoted to the bronzes, stones sculptures and ceramics will provide lasting memories.

ASSIGNMENT 9:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese Ngy hm qua, trong bi din vn chnh pht biu ti trng i Hc Quc Gia H Ni, Tng B Th Giang Trch Dn ku gi gii tr Vit Nam v Trung Quc n lc nhm tht cht tnh hu ngh gia hai nc, gp phn vo s nghip ho bnh v pht trin chu cng nh trn ton th gii. Tng B Th-Ch Tch nc Trung Quc ni vi sinh vin: Cc bn tr thn mn, chnh cc bn l nhng ngi to ra tng lai ti sng v tng lai thuc v cc bn. Tng B Th Giang Trch Dn nhn mnh rng mi quan h Vit -Trung s pht trin tt p trong th k 21, trong n lc chung ca thanh nin hai nc l khng th thiu.

90 ng ni: th h tr c hai nc phi theo ui l tng ca mnh v lao ng khng mt mi xy dng Ch Ngha X Hi. ng pht biu rng: Gii tr Trung Quc v Vit Nam cn k tha v pht huy mnh m tinh thn cch mng ca cha ng, c t tng vng vng, chm ch hc tp, n lc v s nghip pht trin Ch Ngha X Hi, v s giu c v thnh vng ca mi nc. ng hy vng gii tr Trung Quc v Vit Nam s gn gi, duy tr v pht trin mi quan h Vit-Trung, trao i v hc hi ln nhau tng cng hiu bit. ng bo m ng v Chnh ph Trung Quc s hon ton ng h s trao i . Ch tch nc Giang Trch Dn ni: Trong lch s, c Vit Nam v Trung Quc u b quc xm lc nhng chng ta u nh bi chng, gii phng dn tc v thng nht t nc. Theo ng tnh hu ngh gia Vit Nam v Trung Quc khng ch xut pht t lch s m cn t thc tin, nh Ch Tch H Ch Minh tng nhn mnh hai dn tc l ng ch, l anh em. ng ni quan h Vit-Trung da trn c s tin tng ln nhau, s n nh lu di, tin , tnh lng ging thn thin v s bo m . ng ni thm: Hp tc trn c s hiu bit ln nhau l cu ni v cng l mc tiu cho tng lai thnh vng. Ch Tch nc Giang Trch Dn ri H Ni ngy hm qua n min Trung Vit Nam. , ng i thm c Hu, c UNESCO cng nhn l di sn th gii, v gp g cc ng ch lnh o ca thnh ph cng Nng. Theo lch trnh, ng s n thm ph c Hi An v cng ty dt may Ho Th trc khi kt thc chuyn i thm ba ngy n Vit Nam.

ASSIGNMENT 10:
Translate the following text into English Concerning a poor country like ours, practising thrift and fighting against waste must be always the national policy. In reality, however, waste has still been spreading everywhere. Waste appears in management, using budget, in basic construction investment, in land and office management, in State-owned enterprises, and waste also exists in the masses with costly weddings. Waste has really been a pressing problem of the society and one of the causes which considerably affects the economy of our country. As in the first year (1998), after the decree of

91 practising thrift and fighting against waste passed by the National Assemblys Standing Committee 10th session in Feb 26th 1998 and taking effective since May 1st 1998, the real expenses in 1998, according to reports of 12 Ministries and bodies functionally equivalent to Ministries, reduced in comparison with the balance in 1997, for instance, conference expenses: VND12.8 billion, business expenses: VND12.43 billion, telephone, fax expenses: VND9.57 billion, expenses for great reparation of fixed assets: VND80.94 billion, expenses for purchasing professionally fixed assets: VND153.7 billion. The States budget in 1999 is estimated to continue economizing 10% of estimated regular expenses. Some regular expenses have sharply fell from 30% to 70%, e.g. expenses for purchasing office equipment, for conferences and receptions Reducing expenses statistics while the Decree of practising thrift and fighting against waste is being carried out are really speaking numbers, which show that this campaign is taking a turn for better. These numbers, however, indicate that spending has so far been loose and that it is necessary to limit expenses. Financial inspections and annual balance reports helped to find out a breach of rules of administrative management of many enterprises and administrative bodies. One of the most pressing and costly expenses nowadays is: expenses for medal reception, branch forming celebration, conferences Such festivities have cost so much money for hiring halls, parties, gifts At the end of the year, restaurants are crowded with Gods, most of whom are public servants, because inhabitants have no such budget for those parties. While free inhabitants are leading a poor life and spending thriftily, practising thrift and fighting against waste in subsidy spending mechanism is a must.

ASSIGNMENT 11:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese 1. Thnh ph Gaza- Nhng ng-i lnh o ca Israel v Palestin tin hnh m phn sut m m theo cch ni ca ng Dennis Ross - Phi vin ca Hoa K l mt m tt lnh cho cng vic nhm ph v s b tt trong vic Israel tr hon ruts qun khi th trn West Bank ca Heebron. ng Ross ri khi vn phng ca nh lnh o Palestin- Yasser Arafat, sm hm qua sau 3 g ng h c mt trong khi nhng ng-i tham d m phn vn tip tc cc cuc hi m. ng A ra fat ni : Cuc gp g din ra theo chiu h-ng tch cc v c tnh xy dng. ng cn ni thm rng ng v ng Ross gii quyt mt s khc mc gia ti v ng y, cp mt cch r rng n gi ca chnh ng tun tr-c l ng Ross c bnh vc Israel. ng Ross- d nh s tr v n-c vo ngy hm qua - ng rng: Chng ti c mt lot cc cuc tho lun tt p. Khi cp n cc cuc m phn, ng ni: l mt bui ti

92 lm vic tt p, nh-ng cn mt s vn cn -c gii quyt. Bn trong ta tr s chnh ca ng Arafat, nhm i din Palestin do ng tr-ng on m phn Saeb Erekat dn u tip tc cc cuc bn tho vi Israel do hai ng MaJ Gen Shaul Muha faz v Yitzhak c vn cao cp ca Th t-ng Benjamin Netanyahu dn u. Cc cuc hi m bt u vo chiu Ch Nht Ze ru sa lem v sau chuyn n Gaza. Cc c quan truyn thng Israel phng on rng nu cuc th-ng l-ng thnh cng th ng Ro ss c th hon li chuyn bay ca ng v hai ng Netanyahu v Arafat c th t chc mt cuc hp th-ng nh ni trong ngy hm qua hoc hm nay. Israel sp sa rt qun ra khi Hebron - thnh ph Westbank, vng cui cng b chim ng- vo thng 3 th phi hon li sau mt lot tn cng ca bn khng b Israel. ng Netanyahu, mt nhn vt cng rn -c bu lm th t-ng vo thng 5 va qua, tr hon vic tip tc rt qun, v n lc bo m an ninh cho 500 c- dn ang sng trong th trn ca 130.000 ng-i rp. Ng-i Palestin t chi vic ni li cc cuc m phn v yu cu Israel tip tc rt qun nh- cam kt trong bn Hip -c v quyn t tr -c k kt. Vo ngy Ch Nht ti Hebron, qun i vy bt khong 100 ng-i Palestin sau khi c k nm 2 qu bom vo lnh th ca ng-i Do Thi nh-ng khng c ng-i no b th-ng. H b qun i cha sng thm tra v bt gi trong vng na gi nh-ng sau phn ln -c th ra. Pht ngn vin ca qun i ni rng nhiu ng-i Pale stin vn ang cn b bt gi. Mt ng-i Pale stin ang i ngang qua vng lnh th Beit Hada ssah th b mt ci thang lm bng kim loi ri hoc ai nm t mi nh xung lm b th-ng; ng-i ny -c -a n bnh vin thnh ph cha tr 2. TP H Ch Minh - S l-ng du khch n-c ngoi n Viet Nam ngy cng tng. Theo s liu thng k gn y ca Tng Cc Du Lch Vit Nam th l-ng du khch tng bnh qun hng nm l 30%. Mc d l-ng du kahchs tng, nh-ng tnh trng khch li khch sn gim ng k so vi nhng nm va ri. Hn 6 nm qua,, cc khch sn lin doanh v cc nh khch ch khai thc

93 -c t 85-90% s phng hin c. Hin gi ch cn t mc 60%, thp hn nhiu so vi cc khch sn ca nh n-c v nh khch t- nhn. Mt trong nhng nguyn nhn chnh ca s tt gim l-ng khch l do khch sn lin doanh mc ln nh- nm, iu ny dn n vic cnh tranh khc lit v gi phng v gi dch v. Nhiu khch sn c tng doanh thu thp trong khi li chu mc thu cao, ang tr thnh gnh nng cho cc ng ch v c nhiu khch sn sp sa buc phi ng ca. a s du khch n-c ngoi hm h n Vit Nam tm mt ci g mi m v mun i n nhng vng c v p t nhin v hoang d trong thi gian l-u li ca h. V l do ny, du lch Vit Nam cn t chc li vic qun l v t ra nhng mc tiu nhm tha mn nhu cu hin nay ca du khch. Mc d l-ng du khch vn tng trong nhng nm qua nh-ng s du khch tr li Vit nam ln th hai rt t. R rng rng ngnh du lch Vit Nam vn ch-a sc hp dn du khch. Thm vo , cc im du lch v cc ph-ng tin n i li ch-a t n tiu chun quc t. Vit nam hin c khong 22 tnh v thnh ph ang hon tt nhng k hoch tng th chi tit xy dng cc khu ngh mt cho du khch. Tuy nhin nhng n ny vn ch-a -c trin khai, vn ang cn ang -c tho lun. Mc d hng nm chnh ph chi hng chc t ng nng cp cc di tch lch s quc gia v cc khu ngh mt, nh-ng do s yu km v chuyn mn qun l nn nhng ni ny vn ch-a c th thc y s pht trin ca ngnh du lch n-c nh. ci thin cht l-ng ca cc nh ngh v tng c-ng hot ng ca khch sn, ngnh du lch Vit nam cn chnh ph u t- nhiu hn na. Translate the following text into English More and more Vietnamese people are seeking study abroad at. their own expense. While the number of people who have already done so is relatively small - 2970 from mid 1992 to May this year - the numbers are expected to increase within the next. few years a: the Vietnamese economy strengthens and the government streamlines the procedures to make it. easier. But t he biggest boost to Vietnamese people courageously investing their money for themselves or their children to gain an international standard education has come through the staging of a special overseas education exhibition held in Ho Chi Minh City and Hanoi over the past two months. Called "Edukasia", the. exhibition featured universities, vocational schools and school equipment suppliers from Great Britain, France, Australia, The United States and Switzerland. The exhibition sought to establish what training or education private Vietnamese

94 students were seeking and the overseas institutions companies explained what they could offer. Courses in telecommunications, machine building. the hotel industry, tourism and cooking wt-re particularly featured. Up until now, most Vietnamese students have been going abroad for further study as recipients of international scholarship or funding from foreign government. Vietnam has been annually sending about 77 students and 160 senior level experts abroad through such officially sponsored scheme. Most of the private students have been going to Russia. Some to eastern European countries and a trickle to the Netherlands. Belgium, the USA, Denmark and Thailand. But. in April this year, a temporary halt has been put. on private places being offered to foreign students in Russia and Eastern Europe. While these existing avenues for Vietnamese students have required secondary school graduation and intensive courses in the relevant foreign language and computers, often these schemes were deficient in anticipating the problems foreign private students may encounter, particularly regarding duration and the level of the courses being offered. There has been an avoidable waste of time and money, and an attrition rate.

At "Edukasia", the courses on offer are delivered abroad it Vietnam by correspondence or distant training. Those student who want to go abroad for study must first of all be able to speak English which is an indispensable condition for initial contact: and assimilation of knowledge:

Educational standards are also set, such as marks obtained it each subject and health condition. A number of schools give priority to students with high marks in intelligence tests and offer them scholarship. But 90% of tested students have to pay education fees.

According to Mr. Charles Wilmot, the director of Edukasia, the fees are high, depending on the institution and the courses. But they are reasonably calculated. The lowest level is 2500 USD/year; while the most reputed USA schools and purses generally demand 3000 USD/year to 6000 USD/year. Fees for remote training are less, about 300 USD/year, and graduation diplomat are also recognized as equivalent to the regular training diplomas These institutions are ready to receive Vietnamese students and to facilitate entry visas. The remaining question depends upon a decision by the Vietnamese government. Mr. Wilmot stressed that in general, the accommodation and studying conditions of students in countries where there were Vietnamese students were very good. In Great Britain especially, there are organizations specialized in helping foreign students. Most Vietnamese studying abroad begin their training at the age of 18 to 19, the lowest allowed aged is 13. There is no limit for a maximum age studying abroad depends now only on these students willing to receive an advanced knowledge of the world.

ASSIGNMENT 12:
Translate the following text into English Poor people often have larger families than middle class and upper class people. And people in underdeveloped countries have more children than people in developed countries. More and

95 more experts in population growth see the strong relationship between family size and economic development. In some areas, government family planning services may not be available to poor people due to geographic location. For example, people in rural areas may live too far away from family planning services. Therefore, they don't receive information about ways to control family size. In general, people in urban areas have much more information available to them than people living in rural areas. Urban people have help with family planning, and they have smaller families. So we can say that geography where people live - plays a part in determining family size: Urban families are smaller than rural families. What are the other reasons? Economic development of families and, on a larger scale, of nations, is an important factor in determining family size. People with a lot of money have fewer children. On the other hand, poor people in underdeveloped countries choose to have many children. Why? Because they have to depend upon their children to take care of them in their old age. They have no insurance, pensions, or government help. When they grow old, where can they get help? The answer is simple. They can and will turn to their children. Their children will be adults then, and they will be working. The children can all share the costs and other responsibilities of taking care of their parents. For many poor people, a large family is a way of planning and preparing for the future. We could say that a large family is insurance for old age in some societies.

ASSIGNMENT 13:
Translate the following text into English China's powerful exporters are training their sights on, Vietnam, seeing their southern neighbour as ripe for a boost in purchases of consumer goods and machinery, Chinese executives said here Thursday. But Vietnam has a long way to go before it sees its exports to China grow as few products are likely to break into the more developed Chinese market, the executives said at the opening of a trade fair here. Some 60 firms from Beijing are showing off their wares ranging from cheap plastic toys and ornaments to off - road vehicles at the fair in Hanoi in what is the first exhibition of Chinese goods here since the two countries began patching up their relations. Beijing Jeep, a Sino - American auto manufacturer, is hoping to squeeze into Vietnam's growing car market but is facing stiff competition from Japanese firms already entrenched here, said Beijing Automotive Import Export Corp. (BAIEC) vice president Guo Fengli. "The market here is opening up quite quickly for our products, particularly as we are very competitive in pricing with our rivals," Guo said. BAIEC is looking to set up barter deals with Vietnam but is facing problems finding suitable moods to trade although Guo thinks he may have found the answer in the humble sweet potato. The Chinese firm is planning to trade cars for foodstuffs that will be sold in southern China but would prefer to exchange higher value goods.

96 "We don't know much about what Vietnam has to offer, "said Guo, a point repeated by other traders who were more eager to sell than buy. Cross border trade has boomed since the frontier was reopened in 1991. Officially, two - way trade stands at around 500 million US dollars although the illegal frontier trade is believed to b! much higher, with China enjoying a massive surplus. During a visit to China last week, Deputy Prime Minister Phan Van Khai called for both sides to replace the cross border trade with official agreements between trading companies and manufacturers that would boost sales of Vietnamese products., Vietnam wants to step up exports of coal and oil to southern China's booming manufacturing centres, which are thousands of kilometres (miles) from China's own sources of energy. Khai also called for more sales of rice and other food products and for Vietnam to import more manufacturing machinery and other technology from China.

ASSIGNMENT 14:
Translate the following text into English Saudi Arabia has about 8.,853,000 people. Almost all of these people are Arab Muslims. In other words, they are followers of the Islamic religion. Saudi Arabia is a religious nation. The king of Saudi Arabia is both the political leader and one of the religious leaders of the country. The government laws are Islamic law (Muslim religious law), and the national language is Arabic. The Islamic religion is very important in the Saudi educational system. Before 1950 almost all education in Saudi Arabia was religious education. Students studied the Koran, the Islamic holy book. They tried to memorize as much as possible from this book. There were no colleges or universities before 1949 and only a few elementary and secondary schools. In 1953, the Saudi government established the Ministry of Education. This was really the beginning of the modern educational system in Saudi Arabia. When engineers discovered oil in Saudi Arabia, the country started to become very wealthy. Saudi leaders realized that Western technology was necessary for the country to develop. The leaders still believed that religious education was very important, but a modern country could not develop technologically with only a traditional, religious educational system. They decided to add other subjects to the educational system. They wanted to combine traditional religious education with modern technological education from the West. Religion is still an important part of Saudi education. Now, however, Saudi students study all kinds of other subjects too: languages (especially English), history, science, mathematics, computer technology, etc. Before 1950, there were about 20,000 students in Saudi Arabia. In 1982, there were 1,780,000 students. The educational system has grown faster in Saudi Arabia than in almost any other country in the world. All schools in Saudi Arabia are free.

ASSIGNMENT 15:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese

97 Sau khi t nhiu hi vng vo vic khoan trng cc m du kh ngoi khi Vit Nam, cc cng ty du m khng l trn th gii nhn ra nhng ri ro. Ci gi u t- khng l nh-ng li nhn -c mt khon li nhun cm ci. Tm trng gim i trong s nhng cng ty n-c ngoi tham gia trin lm tr-ng by cc mt hng ca ngnh cng ngh ti cuc Trin lm Du v kh t Quc t ln th hai H Ni. ng Melchior de Matharel, V Tr-ng ng Nam ca hng Total Php pht biu : Kt qu khng phi l t, nh-ng khng ln nh- mt s ng-i hy vng. Nu s ch by gi l khu hiu lm tht vng cc cng ty du la n-c ngoi c th to ngun an i t nhng khm ph y khch l va qua v du do cng ty Mitsubishi v cng ty du Petrornas Cairigali ca Malaisia, v v kh t ca BP, ngoi b bin nam Vit Nam. Vic thm d du kh thm lc a Vit nam l ht sc kh khn. Tuy nhin, ng Matherel ni rng thm lc a Vit Nam l mt ni cha du. S nhit tnh ca nhng ng-i thm d t nhin suy gim vo thng 5 tr-c khi cng ty du BHP ca c thng bo tr l-ng du v tr m i Hng, 375 cy s ng nam thnh ph HCM l t i hn so vi d tr. Ti v tr ny, BHP -c tnh s khi l tr l-ng y khong t 700 n 800 triu thng du, nh-ng hin nay con s y xung 100 n 200 triu thng. Vic sn xut -c d kin bt u vo thng ti, mc khim nh-ng l 25000 thng mt ngy. iu l mt n ging mnh cho BHP, mt cng ty u t- n 240 triu la Vit Nam v mt na ca kinh ph ny -c s dng cho d n i Hng. BHP n u mt hip hi quc t bu chn vo thng 4/1993 c trch nhim trin khai tng kinh ph 1,5 t trong lnh vc ny. BHP chim 43,75% tng s vn ca Hip hi, Petronas chim 20%, cng ty quc doanh Petro-Vietnam chim 15%. Phn 21,25% cn li chia u cho cng ty Total (Php) v cng ty Sumitomo ca Nht. Vo thi im , chnh Nht Bn l khch mua hng chnh ca du th Vit Nam, l din c -c mt c may tt nht.

98 Cng ty Du Kh Vit nam- Nht bn (JVPC), mt chi nhnh ca tp on du kh Mitsubishi thng bo trong thng 6 l c mt s khm ph rt ha hn ti v tr Rng ng. Theo kt qu ghi nhn -c t mt t mt ging du thm d, khu vc khai thc c th c cng cht l-ng nh- v tr m Bch H gn mt a im duy nht hin gi ang -c kinh doanh khai thc Vit Nam. Tr l-ng ca Bch H -c tnh mc cao nht l 3000 triu thng. Nh-ng t nht cn phi mt nm na v cn n vic khoan d na th mi c th xc nh chnh xc -c mc tiu vic thm d ca cng ty Nht. Nhng ng-i bi quan th cho rng cn n khong 5 nm mi nh gi ng v y tr l-ng du ca Vit Nam. Vic thm d v khai thc kh t cng chng t l mt dch v ang gp kh khn, d c may mm c-i vi vi cng ty BP Anh, mt n v m trong thng 9 thng bo l pht hin ra hai ti du kh, -c tnh t -c 57 t mt khi Nam Cn Sn, pha nam thnh ph HCM. Cng ty BHP v cng ty Quc gia Na Uy Statoil mua li cc phn c nh-ng ca cng ty kh t v du kh quc gia n (ONGC) vo nm 1992. Lin hip, vi ONGC nm 55% c phn, BP 30% v Statoil 5% tin hnh thm d v th nghim theo mt hp ng phn chia sn phm vi Vit Nam, mt n v ln l-t nhn 5% tin gp vo, cn c trn quyn li ca mi i tc Chu u. Translate the following text into English The failure of a space shuttle steering jet Wednesday forced NASA to suspend a radar survey of Earth as Endeavour's 10 day environmental research flight passed the halfway mark. The problem was a hindrance to the $384 million space Radar Laboratory but not a danger to the astronauts, the National Aeronautics and Space Administration said. Officials said a fuel temperature sensor failed, disabling a leak detection system in the suspect thruster and triggering a shutdown of five others, called verniers, which are needed to fine-tune the shuttle's orbital path and precisely point cargo bay instruments at targets on the planet. Mission commentator Kelly Humphries late Wednesday called the scientific hiatus "temporary pause" while ground engineers hastily devised a way for shuttle computers to ignore the broken sensor.

99 Maneuvering Endeavour with its 38 larger thrusters would consume too much full and eliminate hope of extending the natural disasters around the globe, according to flight director Rich Jackson. Late Wednesday the shuttle was flying on autopilot and the crew, which has been working in two shifts around the clock since Friday's liftoff from Florida, was enjoying an unexpected time-out., Jackson predicted the software patch would be ready by Thursday afternoon, about 24 hours after the malfunction occurred. "The payloads community and the flight control team are working very hard to regain venire control and minimise the impact. in the intervening time period". Jackson told reporters at Mission Control in Houston. Scientists said the problem would not harm the images but that it would take up to five times longer to process the radar data in their computers.

ASSIGNMENT 16:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese N-c Anh -c chia lm 651 khu vc bu c ng-i dn mi khu vc chn ra mt ng-i i din cho mnh h vin. Anh h thng bu c n gin -c s dng trong cc cuc bu c quc hi theo ph-ng thc b phiu kn. Hin nay, h thng ny c nhng iu chnh ngy cng tr nn ti -u hn. Vic bu c l hon ton t ngun. mi ng-i dn Anh t 18 tui tr nn khng b t-c quyn bu c do phm php, u c th b phiu bu c. Nhng ng-i khng c quyn bu c bao gm: thnh vin ca hong gia, cc nh qu tc l thnh vin ca th-ng ngh vin hoc l c- dn n-c ngoi. Ngoi ra cn c bnh nhn nm vin do c vn v tm thn phm nhn ang thi hnh n v nhng ng-i b kt n, trong vng nm nm tr-c v ti tham nhng.

ng c vin:
Bt c ai trn 21 tui l cng dn n-c Anh cc n-c trong khi thnh v-ng chung hoc l n-c cng ho Ai Len, c tcch th u c th ng c vo quc hi, nhng ng-i khng c quyn ng c l thnh vin ca th-ng ngh vin, tng l, gio s thuc gio hi Anh, gio hi Ai Len, gio hi SctLan v gio hi Thin cha gio La M, nhng ng-i b ph sn, ng-i lm dch v cng cng v nhng ng-i b kt n t t 1 nm tr ln cng khng -c tham gia tranh c. Cc ng c vin trong mt khu vc bu c phi tr mt khong tin 1000 bng nh- l mt khong tin t cc. Nu dnh -c t nht 5% phiu bu c th h s -c nhn li s tin . Tng bu c:

100 Theo nguyn tc, bu c h ngh vin -c t chc 5 nm mt ln. Nh-ng cc cuc bu c th-ng -c t chc tr-c khi kt thc mt nhim k 5 nm. Th t-ng l ng-i c quyn quyt nh thi gian t chc tng bu c. N Hong c th gii tn Quc hi v ku gi mt cuc bu c lp nn quc hi mi. N-c Anh -c chia thnh cc vng gi l khu vc bu c da trn s l-ng dn c- xp x nhau. Tng bu c th-ng -c t chc vo th 5 v mi ng-i vn i lm nh- th-ng l. Do , thi gian bu c rt linh ng ko di t 7h n 22h cho tt c mi ng-i u c th n b phiu. Ti cc a im b phiu, c tri -c pht phiu bu c in tn cc ng c vin khu vc bu c , danh sch th-ng sp xp theo th t anphabe i khi cn c mt bn tm tt v tiu s ng c vin v ng ca h -c i km vi l phiu. Sau , cc phiu khng hp l s b loi v ng-i ta s tin hnh kim phiu i vi s phiu hp l v ng c vin no nhn -c nhiu phiu ng h nht s l ng-i thng cuc v tr thnh thnh vin Quc hi i din cho khu vc ca mnh. Chin dch tranh c: Chin dch tranh c din ra trong vng 3 tun tr-c ngy tng bu c. Chin dch tranh c din ra mi khu vc bu c trn ton quc. Cc ng c vin s dng mi loi ph-ng tin, sch l-c thu ht s ng h ca ng-i dn. Vn ng tranh c: Vn ng tranh c c ngha l nhn vin ca ng a ph-ng i n tng gia nh v hi ng-i dn v nh ca h, xem th l h nh bu ai. Bng cch ny, cc ng c vin c th bit -c nh cng nh- thi ca ng-i dn, t h c th iu chnh cc chin l-c ca mnh. Ngoi ra nhn vin s quay tr li nhng gia nh c ng-i ha l s ng h ng ca h thc gic h b phiu cho ng-i ca ng mnh trong ngy bu c. Mt tin: ng u gm ni vi ln c vin c th t chc mt tin bt c ni no bt c ni c th trong sut chin dch bu c. Khch mi ca h bao nhng ng-i c tm nh h-ng ln ttrong ng, nhng ng-i ting ng h h nh- nh vn, din vin gy nh h-ng i c tri. Nhng cuc mt tin nh- th th-ng -c -a trn vn cc ph-ng tin thng tin i chng.

Thng tin i chng: Do bo v tp ch Anh th-ng l thuc s hu t- nhn v c lp v mt ti chnh i vi cc ng phi chnh tr nn ng-i ch bt hoc ng-i bin tp c th ng h bt c ai h mun.

101 Tuy nhin, i pht thanh v i truyn hnh th khc lun lun cng bng, khng thin v. Ch-ng trnh tin tc -a tin v mi mt ca chin dch tranh c ca cc ng. Trong thi gian ny, cc ng c vin xut hin trn i v tivi sut ngy m, ta c th thy h nh my, x nghip, tr-ng hc, trung tm thanh nin v c cc nng tri. H pht biu cc chnh sch ca ng mnh. Ch-ng trnh i thoi trc tip trn cho php mi ng-i t cu hi cho cc nh lnh o chnh tr. Bn cnh , cc bi t-ng thut, bi bnh lun do cc phng vin ghi li trong cc cuc phng vn vi cc nh lnh o ca cc ng cng -c pht sng. Bn tuyn ngn: Cc ng ln cho xut bn bn tuyn ngn ca ng mnh trong sut chin dch bu c. Mi ng u -a ra bn tuyn ngn ca ng mnh nh- l mt n phm tham kho. N cung cp cho ng-i dn nhng thng tin v chnh sch ca ng, v nhng g h s lm nu h c c. Cc bn tuyn ngn cn bao gm nhng thnh cng tr-c y ca ng. Ngoi ra i khi n cn cha ng s cng kch ca ng ny i vi ng i lp.

ASSIGNMENT 17:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese H Ni ang c gng tng gp i GDP ln 1100 la M trong vng 5 nm ti. K hoch y tham vng ny -c -a ra trn c s 11,9% t l tng GDP hng nm ca thnh ph. Ti i hi i biu ng B thnh ph H Ni -c t chc va qua, cc i biu -c thng bo: nu t l tng tr-ng vn tip tc nh- d tnh th GDP s t khong 15% vo u th k. iu c ngha l GDP tng gp i. i hi cng cp n vn c s CN nh truyn thng ca nn kinh t th tng nhanh b thay th bi cc hot ng CN v nghnh cng nghip dch v-th-ng mi. Ngoi ra i hi cn -c bo co l khong 19% s h gia nh H Ni c th xp vo din h giu. Mc GDP bnh qun nm ngoi ca thnh ph -c -c tnh l khong 650 la. Cao hn so vi 470 la nm 1991 (tc tng tr-ng mnh m). S tng tr-ng ny l kt qu ca hng lot cc d n u ttrong n-c v n-c ngoi -c tnh vo khong 32,570VND (khong 3.275 triu USD).

102 Ph ch tch hi ng Nhn Dn thnh ph H Ni, ng L Xun Hng bo co vi i hi rng: Mt phn ca s vn u t- -c s dng cho qu trnh chuyn giao cng ngh, i mi thit b trong nghnh CN. Phn ln s vn u t- cn li -c dng vo vic thit lp cng ty lin doanh vi i tc n-c ngoi. Vo cui nm 1995 c n hn 210 d n u t- n-c ngoi -c cp giy php kinh doanh trn a bn thnh ph H Ni vi tng s tin ln ti 3,3 t la. ng Tng ni trong s l 1 phn 3 t la -c s dng. iu ny gip H Ni trong vic la chn h-ng c cu li c s kinh t theo h-ng CN-DV thay cho c cu c vi vai tr tr ct ca CN nh v nng nghip truyn thng. Theo li ng Tng, t l sn phm CN, th-ng mi, dch v trong tng sn phm quc ni ca thnh ph H Ni giai on 1991-1995 tng ln n 33,1% i vi cng nghip v 61,6% i vi th-ng mi v dch v. Trong khi t l nng nghip li gim xung tng GDP. cn 5,3% trong

ng Tng cn ni s thay i ca b mt kinh t H Ni cn nh vo s tng vt ca t l tng tr-ng hng nm ca 5 nm tr-c. ng ni t l tng tr-ng 11,9% hng nm cng -c m bo chc chn, con s ny cao hn gp i so vi t l ra nm 1991. ng Tng bo co vi cc i biu rng vo nm 2000 t l tng tr-ng ca thnh ph s t 15% 1 nm. GDP -c tnh t khong 1000 la. Vo thi im t l sn phm cng nghip tng s GDP ca thnh ph H Ni s t 40% tng 7% so vi hin ti. Nm ngnh cng nghip t -c mc ch tr thnh ngnh cng nghip then cht ca thnh ph bao gm: ngnh sn xut thit b in, my mc, c kh; ngnh dt; ch bin thc phm; in t; vt liu xy dng. Trong 5 nm ti H Ni cn khong 9 t USD u t- xy dng pht trin nhng khu cng nghip mi, i mi cc khu cng nghip c, xy dng cc to nh ln trung tm thnh ph lm cc vn phng i din, khu th-ng mi, khu vui chi gii tr, H Ni c khong 10 khu cng nghip v 5 ci khc ang -c xy dng. Nhiu khu cng nghip hin nay cn nhng khong u t- theo chiu su thay th cc k thut c, m rng xy dng nhiu nh my hn na.

103 Tuy nhin ph b th- ng u thnh ph H Ni cn nhc nh cc i biu rng cn phi n lc hn na gi vng s pht trin theo h-ng nn kinh t th tr-ng theo nh h-ng x hi ch ngha. ng cn ni chnh quyn thnh ph H Ni tht bi trong vic xy dng s on kt cc quan h sn xut kinh doanh x hi ch ngha. Trong khi b my hnh chnh cc cp cn yu v vai tr ca ng trong cc t chc kinh t x hi khc nhau vn cn hn ch. Nhng tham vn ca ng Tng cn -c Tng b th- M-i cng c thm, ng Tng ch pht biu vi i hi rng: Bn cnh nhng thnh cng ban u H Ni cn ch n vic pht trin kinh t v xy dng ngun nhn lc. ng ch ni 6% nhn dn thnh ph H Ni tht nghip l mt thch thc m thnh ph cn phi gii quyt. C th l bng cch lp nn cc nhm sn xut t hnh thnh cc c s cng nghip nh v pht trin cng nghip dch v. ng ch ph b th- L Xun Tng ni rng: trong giai on 1991-1995 s l-ng cc gia nh giu tng ln gn 19%. S h ngho gim xung ch cn khong 2%.

ASSIGNMENT 18:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese Lm v-n l mt ngh truyn thng Vit Nam, n xut hin ng thi hay sm hn ngh trng la n-c. Nh-ng VAC ( vit tt ca v-n, ao, chung) l mt m hnh kinh t hin i mi -c -a vo hoat ng cch y 10 nm. Ng-i n-c ngoi n Vit Nam nghin cu m hnh VAC y ni rng: Tuy n khng c hiu qu cao trong vic thc hin qui m sn xut nh-ng l mt m hnh sn xut ng b mang li li ch kinh t ln li ch v mi tr-ng.T nhng ngy u tin ca qu trnh hot ng, m hnh VAC lun gn cht vai tr ca mnh trong s pht trin ca nn kinh t quc dn. Hin nng ang hng ni, nay VAC c mt trn khp 53 tnh vi hn 10 triu ch h s dng m hnh ny. Trong nhng nm gn y VAC v -c pht trin trn hu ht cc vng khp c n-c. Vi chc ngn hecta t canh tc cc tnh Trung du v min v-n cy n qu m rng t 350,000 n 400,000 hecta

104 M hnh VAC -c p dng tr thnh ngun cung cp rau qu chnh cho c n-c, ng thi cng p ng cho nhu cu xut khu..Theo FAO ( T chc L-ng Nng Th Gii) th sn l-ng rau qu Vit Nam t xp x 4 triu tn mi nm. Sn l-ng rau qu bnh qun u ng-i trn th gii l 65 Ki l, chu -Thi Bnh D-ng l 31 kg v Vit nam l 61 kg. Hin nay VAC c mt ngha quan trng trong vic xa i gim ngho i vi cc n-c chm pht trin, t chc hot ng ti ch ngn chn suy dinh d-ng, to dng cc v-n cy hay n in trn khu t trng i ni trc, to ra s pht trin mt nn nng nghip lu di v n nh.mc sng ca cc h nng dn thc hin m hnh VAC -c ci thin ng k vi mc thu nhp hng nm t hot ng VAC t 60% tng thu nhp. Gi tr sn phm VAC chim 1/3 gi tr tng sn phm v s tng hn na. Mc d m hnh VAC pht trin nhanh nh-ng n ch-a -c thc hin ng lot thn. Nu tp trung m rng thm canh loi cy trng tren khp c n-c, th nam c th t -c 8 triu tn mi nm trong vng 10 nm qua, tt c cc vng nng v chuyn mn ha cc sn l-ng rau qu Vit th k 21.

VAC nn -c xem nh- l mt ch-ng trnh nng nghip quc gia. Nu VAC -c khuyn khch pht huy ht mi tim nng ca n th chc chn s t -c hiu qu cao, gp phn vo vic pht trin n-c nh v gp phn vo vic bo v mi tr-ng.

105

ASSIGNMENT 19:
Translate the following text into English Researchers said on Monday they had conclusive evidence an experimental AIDS treatment using plasma transfusions delays the onset of the disease in HIV positive patients and prolongs the lives of AIDS sufferers. DR. Abraham Karpas of the University of Cambridge's department of haematology said, however, that although Passive Immune Therapy (PIT) was "breakthrough" in treating AIDS and had no known side effects it should not be described as a cure. "It is definitely not a cure. There is no cure in sight, but it looks as if it is the best form of treatment," he said in his presentation to a London conference. Karpas said U.S. and French studies on PIT released at the conference confirmed his original research. "Their double - blind, placebo - controlled studies showed that this treatment benefits AIDS patients and prolonged their sure, survival,'' he stated in a telephone interview. He said the studies, conducted by the Hemacare Corporation of California and two Paris hospitals, also showed that PIT helped to delay the onset of full - blown AIDS (Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome) in people tested positive for HIV, the virus that causes the deadly disease. Under PIT, patients receive a monthly transfusion of half a litre of plasma taken from healthy HIV - positive individuals. The blood has the red and white cells removes and is free of HIV but has high levels of neutralising antibodies that kill the virus. Karpas said he first discovered in 1985 that people with HIV who were otherwise healthy had high levels of these antibodies in their blood while AIDS patients lost these neutralising antibodies and their ability to fight infections. Four patients in Cambridge were the first to receive the treatment and subsequently small scale trials were carried out in London in 1988 and 1989. But Karpras said he has failed to receive funding for his research in Britain and studies had therefore been set up in the US and France. The Hemancare trial studied the effect of PIT on 220 AIDS patients over 3 years. It found that in the first 12 months the mortality rate was greatly reduced in the group who received the plasma transfusion while those in the control group, where no treatment was given, had a death rate of five time higher. The treated group had one death in 21 people while the placebo group had six deaths in 30. Moreover, the number of AIDS - linked infections was far lower in the treated group and the blood donors themselves also appeared to benefit. The researchers said donating blood appeared to stimulate the production of neutralising antibodies in the blood of HIV - positive patients. The French studies produced similar results, Karpas said he said the U.S. and French studies represented the "first conclusive evidence that PIT is an effective AIDS treatment".

106

ASSIGNMENT 20:
Translate the following text into English Another day she said she knew a priest who woke one night to find a fellow he didn't recognize leaning over the end of his bed. The priest was a bit frightened -naturally enough but he asked the fellow what he wanted, and the fellow said in a deep, husky voice that he wanted to go to confession. The priest said it was an awkward time and wouldn't it do in the morning, but the fellow said that last time he went to confession, there was one sin he kept back, being ashamed to mention it, and now it was always on his mind. Then the priest knew it was a bad case, because the fellow was after making a bad confession and committing a mortal sin. He got up to dress, and just then the cock crew in the yard outside, and to and behold! When the priest looked round there was no sign of the fellow, only a smell of burning timber, and when the priest looked at his bed didn't he see the print of two hands burned in it! That was because the fellow had made a bad confession. This story made a shocking impression on me. But the worst of all was when she showed us how to examine our conscience. Did we take the name of the Lord, our God, in vain? Did we honour our father and our mother? (I asked her did this include grandmothers and she said it did.) Did we love our neighbours as ourselves? Did we cover our neighbour's goods? (I thought of the way I felt about the penny that Nora got every Friday.) I decided that, between one thing and another, I must have broken the whole ten commandments, all on account of that old woman, and so far as I could see-,, 9-n long ac, he remained in the house, I had no hope of ever doing anything else. I was scared to death of confession. The day the whole class went I let on to have a toothache, hoping my absence wouldn't be noticed; but at three o'clock, just as I was feeling safe, along comes a chap with a message from Mrs. Ryan that I was to go to confession myself on Saturday and be at the chapel for communion with the rest. To make it worse, Mother couldn't come with me and sent Nora instead. Now, that girl had ways of tormenting me that Mother never knew of. She held my hands as we went down the hill, smiling sadly and saying how sorry she was for me, as if she were bringing me to the hospital for an operation. "Oh, God, help us!" she moaned. "Isn't it a terrible pity you weren't a good boy? Oh Jackie, my heart bleeds for you! How will you ever think of all your sins? Don't forget you have to tell him about the time you kicked Gran on the shin." "Let me go!" I said, trying to drag myself free of her, "I don't want to go to confession at all." "But sure, you'll have to go to confession, Jackie," she replied in the same regretful tone. "Sure, if you didn't, the parish priest would be up to the house, looking for you. Isnt God knows, that I'm not sorry for you. Do you remember the time you tried to kill me with the bread knife under the table? And the language you used to me? I don't know what he'll do with you at all, Jackie. He might have to send you up to the bishop." I remember thinking bitterly that she didn't know the half of what I had to tell - if I told it. I knew I couldn't tell it, and understood perfectly why the fellow in Mrs. Ryan's story made a bad confession, it seemed to me a great shame that people wouldn't stop criticizing him. I remember that steep hill down to the church, and the sunlit hillsides beyond the valley of the river, which I saw in the gaps between the houses like Adam's last glimpse of Paradise.

107 Then, when she had maneuvered me down the long flight of steps to the chapel yard, Nora suddenly changed her tone. She became the raging malicious devil she really was. "There you are!" she said with a yelp of triumph, hunting me through the church door." And I hope he'll give you the penitential psalins, you dirty little baffler.' I knew then I was lost, given up to eternal justice. The door with the coloured-glass panels swung shut behind me, the sunlight went out and gave place to deep shadow, and the wind whistled outside so that the silence within seemed to crackle like ice under my feet. Nora sat in front of me by

ASSIGNMENT 21:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese 1. Nhn chung sau mt thi gian hot ng tr tr, nn cng nghip dt thu t- nhn ca Thnh ph H Ch Minh -c khi phc v pht trin mc nht nh k t nm 1991.Tuy nhin s pht trin khng n nh bi v hu ht cng vic ca cc x nghip t- nhn u ph thuc vo n t hng ca n-c ngoi.Do vy, h khng th kim sot -c k hoch sn xut, v gi lao ng cho sn phm may mt b cc i tc n-c ngoi qui nh rt thp ( tin cng lao ng nm 1995 ch bng 65%-70% so vi cc nm 1991 v 1992.).Do tnh c th ca ngnh ny, nn l-ng trung bnh ca cng nhn trong ngnh may-thu ch khong 400.000 ng/thng. Vi s cnh tranh gay gt hin nay, bo him x hi chim n 15% v bo him y t l 2% trong tng s l-ng m cc doanh nghip phi ng, v nu nh- k hoch d kin ca bo him x hi -c ph duyt, th gi thnh sn xut s rt cao gy kh khn cho cc nh sn xut Vit Nam trong vieec cnh tranh c hiu qu v chim lnh th tr-ng. gip cc doanh nghip thu-may t- nhn sng cn, ng Nam ngh nh n-c nn sa i t l ng gp ca cc doanh nghip ngoi quc doanh i vi chnh sch bo him x hi nhsau: - Bo him x hi: 10% i vi doanh nghip v 3% i vi cng nhn - Bo him y t cng nhn : 1% i vi doanh nghip v 1% i vi

Nh n-c cng nn ban hnh mt qui nh c lin quan n ng-i lao ng -c cc doanh nghip tuyn dng v o to buc phi lm vic ti thiu l 2 nm. Cc cng nhn lm vic trong

108 cc doanh nghip ngoi quc doanh cn phi -c cp th lm vic. Nu mt cng nhn no mun thi vic th phi -c doanh nghip c qun ng . Tt c mi thnh vin ca cc cng ty may-thu Thnh ph H Ch Minh u ng thc hin y vic ng gp mt phn l-ng vo bo him x hi v y t, th theo ng qui nh ca lut lao ng. 2. Cc ch doanh nghip ca cc cng ty ln TP H Ch Minh nu ra nhng kh khn m h phi -ng u trong vic cnh tranh gay gt vi cc cng ty n-c ngoi, c bit l vi cc cng ty khng l th gii. Ti mt cuc hp bn v : Lm th no khuyn khch u tn-c ngoi v m bo sn xut trong n-c -c t chc ti TP H Ch minh tun qua, cc nh sn xut ca cc cng ty bt git Tico v Lux, M phm P/S, n-c gii kht Tribeco, dt Vit Thng, bia Si gn v cng ty gia cm vt nui TP H Ch Minh u thng nht mt kin l cc doanh nghip trong n-c khng cn sc trong vic cnh tranh vi cc i tc n-c ngoi v h khng -c h-ng chnh sch -u i thu nh- cc doanh nghip c vn u t- n-c ngoi. Ch 1 nm sau khi lnh cm vn ca M -c bi b, cc cng ty n-c gii kht khng l nh- Coca-cola, Pep si- Cola -c h-ng -u i v vn, chnh sch tip th v cc -u i khc theo lut u T- N-c Ngoi, nn cc cng ty ny dn dn thm nhp th phn ca cc nahf sn xut trong n-c. Cc sn phm khc cng ri vo hon cnh t-ng t. Bia Si Gn phi cnh tranh quyt lit vi cc cng ty bia lin doanh vi n-c ngoi. Cc nh sn xut bt git trong n-c, mc d c th p ng nhu cu trong n-c n nm 2000, nh-ng li b cc cng ty khng l nhProcter & Gamble v Unilever dn vo th b. bo v vic sn xut trong n-c, cc nh sn xut trong n-c ngh vi chnh ph mt s bin php. Th nht, nh n-c nn c k hoch pht trin dnh ring cho vic u t- n-c ngoi v lnh vc kinh doanh v phn b theo vng a l v khng nn khuyn khch u t- n-c ngoi vo vic sn xut ra cc sn phm m cc doanh nghip trong n-c c kh nng sn xut -c nh- n-c gii kht, bt git, giy v thuc l. Th hai, vic cp giy php nn -c p dng cho cc cng ty lin

109 doanh hay cc doanh nghip c 100% vn u t- n-c ngoi tham gia vo cc d n i hi c nhiu vn, cng ngh cao hay sn xut cc mt hng xut khu. Th ba, l nn c mt o lut chng i vic cnh tranh khng lnh mnh c th dn c quyn kinh doanh, ph gi lm hi ng-i tiu dng. Th t- nn c chnh sch khuyn khch u t- trong n-c v cho cc doanh nghip trong n-c -c h-ng chnh sch -u i thu nh- cc nh u t- n-c ngoi. Th nm, nn pht ng mt chin dch ng vin ng-i Vit Nam dng hng ni a, to iu kin cho cc doanh nghip trong n-c pht trin.

ASSIGNMENT 22:
Translate the following text into English Poor people often have larger families than middle class and upper class people. And people in underdeveloped countries have more children than people in developed countries. More and more experts in population growth see the strong relationship between family size and economic development. In some areas, government family planning services may not be available to poor people due to geographic location. For example, people in rural areas may live too far away from family planning services. Therefore, they don't receive information about ways to control family size. In general, people in urban areas have much more information available to them than people living in rural areas. Urban people have help with family planning, and they have smaller families. So we can say that geography where people live - plays a part in determining family size: Urban families are smaller than rural families. What are the other reasons? Economic development of families and, on a larger scale, of nations, is an important factor in determining family size. People with a lot of money have fewer children. On the other hand, poor people in underdeveloped countries choose to have many children. Why? Because they have to depend upon their children to take care of them in their old age. They have no insurance, pensions, or government help. When they grow old, where can they get help? The answer is simple. They can and will turn to their children. Their children will be adults then, and they will be working. The children can all share the costs and other responsibilities of taking care of their parents. For many poor people, a large family is a way of planning and preparing for the future. We could say that a large family is insurance for old age in some societies.

ASSIGNMENT 23:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese Hai c quan l-ng thc ca Lin Hp quc ngy hm qua cho rng Indonesia s i mt vi s thiu ht l-ng thc trm

110 trng trong nm nay. l hu qu ca nhng v ma tht thu v ca cuc khng hong ti chnh lm tng gi nhp khu. Trong mt bn bo co chung, t chc L-ng Nng th gii (FAO) v Ch-ng Trnh L-ng Thc Th Gii (WFP) cho rng vic gip ca th gii l cn thit gii quyt vic thiu ht go tm thi, ngun l-ng thc chnh ca t n-c. Bn bo co chung ca hai t chc c vn phng t ti Rome th hai t chc FAO v WFP thc gic cc n-c ti tr gip Indonesia gii quyt cc vn lin quan n hn hn v khng hong ti chnh. Bn bo co ni thm rng gi l-ng thc ngy cng tng cao, s ng-i tht nghip ngy cng ng lm tng thm s ng-i sng d-i mc ngho i. Mt bn bo co v mt n-c ng dn th t- trn th gii m nn kinh t b tn ph cho rng : Vo khong 7,5 triu ng-i Indonesia ngho kh 15 tnh c th phi sng thiu n trong ma kh. Bn bo co da trn nhng c liu do mt nhm cng tc gm 11 thnh vin ca hai t chc ny. Nhm ny n Indonesia t ngy 9 thng 3 n 1 thng 4 nm 1998. Sn l-ng nm nay ch -c t 47,5 triu tn, thp hn 3,6% so vi nm ngoi. S tt gim ny do mt trong nhng t hn hn nghim trng nht Indonesia trong th k ny gy nn. Bn bo co cn cho bit mc d chnh ph Indonesia d nh nhp khu 1,5 triu tn go t thng 4 n thng 9, nh-ng n-c ny vn cn thiu 2 triu tn na. Khon thiu ht ny s -c cng ng quc t gip nhm cu vn nn kinh t ang lm vo cnh khn cng. Bn bo co cho bit thch thc chnh m t n-c ny ang i mt l bo m cung cp l-ng thc cho 7,5 triu ng-i ngho i v gi go v cc loi l-ng thc khc tng 50% trong vng 12 thng qua.

ASSIGNMENT 24:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese Hm th t-, Vit Nam tuyn b l s gia nhp Hip Hi cc n-c ng Nam , nhm xua i phng on l H Ni mun ln la vic tr thnh hi vin chnh thc cho n khi chun b tt mi iu kin. Vit Nam hin gi ang tch cc chun b mi iu kin cn thit tr thnh hi vin chnh thc ca ASEAN vo nm ti. Ph Th T-ng Phan Vn Khi tuyn b nh- vy vi cc doanh nhn ti mt ba n tr-a do Din n Kinh t th gii (WEF) -

111 tr s t ti Thy S- t chc. WEF l c quan ng ra duy tr cuc hp ko di 3 ngy y. Ph Th T-ng Phan Vn Khi cho bit Vit Nam cng mun tham gia vo Din n Hp Tc Kinh T Chu - Thi Bnh D-ng ( APEC) vi 17 thnh vin. khi c iu kin. Ti Jakarta, Th tr-ng ngoi giao Vit Nam V Khoan ni rng n-c ng s n xin tr thnh hi vin A SEAN va cui thng ny hay u thng 11. Th tr-ng V Khoan, sau khi gp ng A Jit Singh Tng th- k A SEAN- vn phng t ti JaKarta, pht biu rng ng khng mun c mt tr ngi no trong qu trnh gia nhp A SEAN. Thng tn x Antara trch dn li tuyn b ca ng. Cc thnh vin APEC bao gm cc quc gia thuc Indonesia, Malaisia, Phillipine, Xingapore v cc n-c M, Canada, Nht v Trung Quc. Mt chnh thc ca cc nh lnh o cc n-c tham t chc ti Indonesia vo thng ti. A SEAN- Bruny, Thi Lan- cng cuc hp khng giaAPEC s -c

Vit nam t -c kt qu l tr thnh quan st vin ASEAN trong cuc hi ngh ca khi ny vo nm 1992, tuyn b l thit tha mong mun tr thnh hi vin chnh thc ca t chc ny, c nhng ch-ng trnh vi nhiu hoi bo v s hp tc, bao gm c vic pht ng khu vc t do mu dch A SEAN trong vng 10 nm. Cc vin chc ASEAN cng hy vng l Vit Nam c l s gia nhp A SEAN tr-c khi cc nh lnh o ca 6 quc gia thnh vin tham d cuc hp th-ng nh t chc ti Thi Lan vo thng 12 nm 1995. sn c nhng qui nh v vic hp tc trong khi A SEAN. Mt khi chng ti l hi vin th chng ti s tun theo mi qui nh. Ph Th T-ng ni thm rng H Ni s lm vic vi cc n-c khc ti ong Nam bo m nn an ninh khu vc. Ph Th t-ng Phan Vn Khi cho bit chnh ph ca ng s y mnh cc n lc bng nhng vic ci cch hon thin cc iu kin cho s u t- n-c ngoi qua s hnh thnh mt c cu lut php mi v cc th tc hnh chnh thch hp hn. Ph Th t-ng ni: Chng ti hiu -c l Vit Nam ang i ph vi nhng th thch ln lao ca s cnh tranh kinh t ton cu v nh- th chng ti phi c gng tht tch cc gt b i mi nguy c tt hu ng sau cc n-c lng ging.

ASSIGNMENT 25:
Translate the following texts into English

112 1. The manufacturing sector expanded significantly during the post-World War II reconstruction of the Philippine economy. Government controls on imports promoted the development of light industries that produced consumer goods for the domestic market. In the 1970s the government created four special economic zones designed to stimulate manufacturing for the export market. Industries in these export-processing zones receive incentives to produce traditional exports. The zones have helped to stimulate foreign investment in the Philippine economy, in part because they are exempt from certain taxes and restrictions on foreign ownership of businesses. The success of these zones has led to the creation of other types of special economic zones, such as large industrial estates. Businesses receive tax exemptions and other incentives in these zones. The former U.S. naval base at Subic Bay, for example, is now a huge industrial-commercial zone in Manila. Its modern facilities and duty-free economic zone have attracted new export-focused industries and foreign investment 2. Vietnam has sought to maintain socio-politic stability, develop economic and diplomatic establishment in recent years. The positive legal changes have had a tremendous influence on the production, financial and commercial situations. Vietnam ranked as the worlds secondlargest rice exporter to Thailand because its agriculture responded dramatically to free market. In manufacturing and service activities the rapid growth and change occurred in and around HCM City. Much economic expansion was partially driven by an influx of investment and technology from some 2 million overseas Vietnamese in many different countries worldwide, most of whom had returned to Vietnam for their investment and contacts with their relatives. Only a year after the US embargo was lifted, soft drink giants such as Coca Cola and Pepsi Cola, which have enjoyed superior advantages in capital, marketing policies and preferences under the Foreign Investment Law, have gradually eaten into the market shares of local producers. Other products are also in the same situation. Saigon Beer has to compete fiercely with breweries of foreign Joint-ventures. Local detergent producers, although capable of meeting domestic demand to the year 2005, have driven into the corner by giants such as Procter & Gamble and Unilever. 3. To protect domestic production, local producers have proposed several measures to the Government. First, the State should devise specific development plans for foreign investment in terms of business field and geographical area and should not encourage foreign investment in products which local enterprises can produce such as soft drink, detergent, paper and cigarettes. Second, licenses should be granted only to JVs or foreign-owned enterprises which involve in projects requiring large capital, advanced technology or producing goods for export. Third, a law should be enacted against unfair competition that can lead to monopoly, dumping or price inflation that does not benefit consumers. 4. In Vietnamese the word nuoc carry a double meaning of country and water, a linguistic association recognizable after a journey to the most fertile land in Vietnam- the Mekong Delta. The silt from the Mekong River helps to bring an ample granary representing the whole country source of food as well as the local inhabitants riverside lifestyle. For tourists, the Mekong Delta is one of the most fascinating tourist destinations in South-east Asia. It offers the marvel of the glittering waters coupled with the gaiety of a culture demonstrated by the local lifestyle and commercial activities. The big cities such as Can Tho,

113 My Tho and Long Xuyen provide a vantage for the nine provinces of the Mekong Delta while the immense network of rivers and canals is regarded as the great boon second to none in this region. The exciting life in this region is not very similar to that in HCM City. However, it does not suggest any difficulty in reaching the Mekong Delta to escape the excitement of the greatest city in Southern Vietnam. It takes only a three-hour drive( by bus, though) on the National Highway Number 1 to get to My Tho, the capital of Tien giang & an ideal departure point for exploring this delta region.

114

REFERENCES
Bolinger, Dwight. 1977. Meaning and Form. Longman, London, UK. Catford, J.C. 1985. A Linguistic Theory of Translation. Oxford University Press, London, UK. Halliday, M.K.A. 1976. Cohesion in English. Longmans, London, UK. Larson, Mildred L. 1998. Meaning-based Translation.University Press of America. Maryland, USA. Newmark, Peter. 1989. A Textbook of Translation. Prentice Hall International, Hertfordside, USA Palmer, F.R. 1981. Semantics. Cambridge University Press, London, UK. Reyburn, D. 1979. Cultural Equivalences in Translation. Oxford University Press, London, UK. Rose, Marilyn. 1982. Translation Spectrum. State University of NY Press, New York, USA Steiner, G. 1985. Aspects of Language and Translation. Oxford University Press, London, UK. Tosh, Wayne. 1975. Syntactic Translation. The Hague, Mouton, USA

INTRODUCTION
An increasing number of universities in Vietnam have added courses in translation to their curricula; however, the textbooks available for such courses are few. This unit has been written with these courses in mind. The unit is designed to provide the learners with some basic principles of translation which will be generally useful to translation courses in universities and colleges, to help the learners avoid some errors they may encounter when they translate a text, to provide the learners with essential English sentence patterns that could be very useful for the learners in learning and practicing translating and to provide the learners 20 assignments related to the theory they have learned. The desire of the author is to make available the principles of translation which have learned through personal experience in translation and teaching translation, and through interaction with colleagues involved in translation projects in many universities in Central Vietnam. Since it is assumed that the students will be speakers of Vietnamese language, many of these exercises involve translating from or into their mother tongue. The material is presented in a way that it can be used in a self-teaching situation or in a classroom. An attempt has been made to keep technical terms to a minimum. When technical vocabulary is used, every effort is made to clarify the meaning of such vocabulary or to provide its meaning in Vietnamese. This has been done so that the unit can be used by any student translator, even though his exposure to linguistic and translation theory has been minimal. This is an introductory unit. The lessons give an overview presenting the fundamental principles of translation and the rest of the unit illustrates these principles. The overriding principle is that translation is meaning-based rather than form-based. Once the learner has identified the meaning of the source text, his goal is to express that same meaning in the receptor/target language. Many examples of cross-language equivalence are used to illustrate this principle. Since the coursebook has been written for the students to learn either by themselves in their distant learning course or in class with a teacher, there will be a coursebook and 20 assignments. By the end of the course, the students will be able to: 1. obtain general knowledge of the principles of translation . 2. get familiar with and effectively use the English sentence patterns in their translations. On the completion of this coursebook, I would like to express my deep gratitude to Dr. Ton Nu Nhu Huong for her encouragement. I would also like to be grateful to Dr. Tran Van Phuoc and other colleagues of the College of Foreign Languages and the English Department for their kind help. Errors are unavoidable in this coursebook. Therefore, I appreciate and welcome any criticism on the course book. Hue, June 24th, 2001

2 Nguyen Van Tuan

CHAPTER 1:
LESSON 1:
1.What is translation?

THEORY OF TRANSLATION
FORM AND MEANING

1.1. Translation is the expression in another language (target language) of what has been expressed in one language (source language), preserving semantic and stylistic equivalencies. (By Roger T. Bell). 1.2. Translation is the replacement of a representation of a text in one language by a representation of an equivalent text in a second language. (By Roger T. Bell). The author continues and makes the problems of equivalence very plain: Texts in different languages can be equivalent in different degrees (fully or partially different), in respect of different levels of presentation (in respect of context, of semantics, of grammar, of lexis, etc.) and at different ranks (word-for-word, phrase-for-phrase, sentencefor-sentence). However, languages are different from each other; they are different in form having different codes and rules regulating the construction of grammatical stretches of language and these forms have different meanings. To shift from one language to another is, by definition, to change the forms. Also, the contrasting forms convey meanings which cannot but fail to coincide totally; there is no absolute synonym between words in the same language, why should anyone be surprised to discover a lack synonym between languages. Something is always lost (or might one suggest gain?) in the process and translators can find themselves being accused of reproducing only part of the original and so betraying the authors intentions. Hence the traitorous nature ascribed to the translator by the notorious Italian proverb: Traduttore traditore. Faced by a text in a language, we are able to work out not only the meaning of each word and sentence but also its communicative value, its place in time and space and information about the participants involved in its production and reception. We might take, as a light-hearted model of the questions we can ask of the text, the first verse of a short poem by Kipling. I keep six honest serving men; (They taught me all I knew); Their names were What? And Why? And When? And How? And Where? And Who? What? is the message contained in the text; the content of the signal. Why? orients us towards the intention of the sender, the purpose for which the text was is used. (Informing, persuading, flattering, etc.) When? is concerned with the time of communication realized in the text and setting in its historical context; contemporary or set in the recent or remote past or future.

4 Where? is concerned with the place of communication, the physical location of the speech event realized in the text. How? refers to whether the text is written in a formal or informal way. Who? refers to the participants involved in the communication; the sender and receiver. 1.3. Translation is rendering a written text into another language in a way that the author intended the text. (By Bui Tien Bao- Hanoi National University) Translators are concerned with written texts. They render written texts from one language into another language. Translators are required to translate texts which arrange from simple items including birth certificates or driving licences to more complex written materials such as articles in journals of various kinds, business contracts and legal documents. (Bui Tien BaoHanoi National University). 1.4. Translation, by dictionary definition, consists of changing from one state or form to another, to turn into ones own or anothers language. (The Merriam-Webster Dictionary, 1974). Translation is basically a change of form. When we speak of the form of a language, we are referring to the actual words, phrases, sentences, paragraphs, etc. The forms are referred to as the surface structure of a language. It is the structural part of language which is actually seen in print or heard in speech. In translation the form of the source language is replaced by the form of the receptor/target language. But how is this change accomplished? What determines the choices of form in the translation? The purpose of this lesson is to show that translation consists of transferring the meaning of the source language into the receptor language. This is done by going from the form of the first language to the form of the second language by a way of semantic structure. It is meaning that is being transferred and must be held constant. Only the form changes. The form from which the translation is made will be called the source language and the form into which it is to be changed will be called the receptor language. Translation, then, consists of studying the lexicon, grammatical structure, communication situation, and cultural context of the source language text, analyzing it in order to determine its meaning, and then reconstructing this same meaning using the lexicon, grammatical structure which are appropriate in the receptor language and its cultural context. Let us look at an example. Assume that we are translating the Vietnamese sentence Cm n bn gip ti tn tnh. into English. This Vietnamese sentence has the verb gip tn tnh, but to convey the same meaning in English one would use a noun phrase: your kind help. To do effective translation one must discover the meaning of the source language and use the receptor language forms which express the meaning in a natural way. It is the purpose of this unit to familiarize the learners with the basic linguistic and sociolinguistic factors involved in translating a text from a source language into a receptor language, and to give them enough practice in the translation process for the development of skills in cross-language transfer.

2. Characteristics of language which affect translation

There are certain characteristics of languages which have a very direct bearing on principles of translation. First, let us look at the characteristics of meaning components. Meaning components are packaged into lexical items, but they are packaged differently in one language than in another. In most languages there is a meaning of plurality, for example the English -s. This often occurs in the grammar as a suffix on the nouns or verbs or both. In Vietnamese, however, plurality is expressed in an isolated word nhng/cc. Many times a single word in the source language will need to be translated by several words. For example, a projector was called the thing that shows pictures on the wall by the Chipara Bolivia.

Second, it is characteristic of languages that the same meaning component will occur in several surface structure lexical items. In English, the word sheep occurs. However, the words lamb, ram and ewe also include the meaning sheep. They include the addition meaning components of young (in lamb, adult and male in ram and adult and female in ewe. In Peru, lamb would need to be translated by sheep its child, ram by sheep big and ewe by sheep its woman. Third, it is further characteristic of language that one form will be used to represent several alternative meanings. This again is obvious from looking in any good dictionary. For example, the Readers Digest Great Encyclopedic Dictionary gives 54 meanings for the English word run. Most words have more than one meaning. There will be a primary meaning-the one which usually comes to mind when the word is said in isolation-and the secondary meaningthe additional meanings, which a word has in context with other words. In English, we can say the boy runs, using run in its primary meaning. We can also say the motor runs, the river runs, and his nose runs, using runs in its secondary meanings. This principle is not limited to lexical items for it is also true that the same grammatical pattern may express several quite different meanings. For instance, the English possessive phrase my house may mean the house I built, the house I rent, the house I live in, or the house for which I drew up in my plans. Only the larger context determines the meaning. Notice the following possessive phrases and the variety of meanings: my car my brother my foot my singing my book my village my train ownership kinship part-whole action ownership or authorship ( the book I own, or, the book I wrote) residence ( the village where I live) use

6 (the train I ride on) Whole sentences may also have several functions. A question form may be used for a nonquestion. For example, the question: Mary, why dont you wash the dishes? has a form of a question, and may in some context be asking for information, but it is often used with the meaning of command rather than a real question. A simple English sentence like He made the bed. May mean either He made (as a carpenter would make) the bed, or He put the sheets, blanket, and pillows in neat order on the bed. Just as words have primary and secondary meanings, so grammatical markers have their primary function and often have other secondary functions. The preposition on is used in English to signal a variety of meanings. Compare the following uses of on with the corresponding form used in Vietnamese. John found the book on the floor. nh. John found the book on mathematics. mn ton. John found the book on Tuesday. th Ba. John found the book on sale. ang by bn. John tm thy cun sch trn sn John tm thy cun sch vit v John tm thy cun sch vo John tm thy cun sch

Compare also the following uses of by John was stopped by the policeman. John was stopped by the bookstand. In the first, by is used to signal the meaning that the policeman is the agent of the action. In the second, by is used to signal that the bookstand is the location. We have seen that one form may express many meanings. On the other hand, another characteristic of languages is that a single meaning may be expressed in a variety of forms. For example, the meaning the cat is black may be expressed by the following: the cat is black, the black cat, and, the cat, which is black, depending on how that meaning relates to other meanings. In addition, the meanings of Is this place taken? Is there anyone sitting here? and May I sit here? are essentially the same. Also, the meaning is essentially the same in the following English sentences: Others blamed John because of the difficulty. Others blamed John for the difficulty. Others blamed the difficulty on John. Others said John was responsible for the difficulty.

7 Others accused John of being responsible for the difficulty. We have seen that even within a single language there are a great variety of ways in which form expresses meaning. Only when a form being used in its primary meaning or function is there a one-to-one correlation between form and meaning. The other meanings are secondary meanings or figurative meanings. Words have these extended meanings and in the same way grammatical forms have extended usages (secondary and figurative function). This characteristic of skewing; that is, the diversity or the lack of one-to-one correlation between form and meaning is the basic reason that translation is a complicated task. If there were no skewing, then all lexical items and all grammatical forms would have only one meaning and a literal word-for-word and grammatical structure-for- grammatical structure translation would be possible. But the fact is that a language is a complex set of skewed relationship between meaning (semantics) and form (lexicon and grammar). Each language has its own distinctive forms for representing the meaning. Therefore, in translation the same meaning may have to be expressed in another language by a very different form. To translate the form of one language literally according to the corresponding form in another language would often change the meaning or at least result in a form which is unnatural in the second language. Meaning must, therefore, have priority over form in translation. It is meaning that is to be carried over from the source language to the receptor language, not the linguistic forms. For example, to translate the English sentence he is cold hearted i.e. His heart is cold (meaning he is unfeeling, has no emotional sympathy.) literally into Mambila in Nigeria would be understood to mean, he is peaceful, not quick-tempered. And if translated literally into Cinyanja in Zambia, it would mean, he is frightened. The nature of language is that each language uses different forms and these forms have secondary and figurative meanings which add further complications. A word-for-word translation which follows closely the form of the source language is called a literal translation. A literal translation does not communicate the meaning of the source text. It is generally no more than a string of words intended to help someone read a text in its original language. It is unnatural and hard to understand, and may even be quite meaningless, or give a wrong meaning in the receptor language. It can hardly be called a translation. The goal of a translator should be to produce a receptor language text (a translation) which is idiomatic; that is one which has the same meaning as the source language but is expressed in the natural form of the receptor language. The meaning, not form is retained. The following is a literal translation of a story first told in the Quiche language of Guatemala: It is said that being one man not from here, not known where the his or the he comes where. One day the things he walks in a plantation or in them the coastlands, he saw his appearance one little necklace, or he thought that a little necklace the very pretty thrown on the ground in the road. He took the necklace this he threw in his mouth for its cause that coming the one person another to his behind ness, for his that not he encounters the one the following this way in his behindness not he knows and that the necklace the he threw in his mouth this one

8 snake and the man this one died right now because not he knows his appearance the snake or that the he ate this not this a necklace only probably this snake. Now compare the above with the following less literal translation of the same story: It is said that there once was a man not from here, and I do not know his town or where he came from, who one day was walking in a plantation (or in the coastlands). He saw a little necklace, or rather, what he thought was a very pretty little necklace, lying on the road. He grabbed this necklace and threw this into his mouth because there was someone coming along behind him, and he did not want the other person to see it. He did not know that the necklace he threw into his mouth was really a snake. The man died in short order because he did not recognize from its appearance that it was a snake. He did not know that what he had put in his mouth was not a necklace, but rather a snake. In the first, each quiche word was replaced by the nearest English equivalent. The result was nonsense. In the second translation, the natural forms of English lexicon and grammar were used to express the meaning of the Quiche story. Below the story is again rewritten in a more idiomatic English style. I am told that there once was a stranger from some other town who was walking in a plantation along the coast. As he walked along he suddenly saw a very pretty little necklace lying on the road. He snatched up this necklace and threw this into his mouth because there was another person walking behind him and he did not want him to see the necklace. The stranger did not know that the necklace was really a snake. The man died immediately. He died because he did not realize that it was a snake. He did not know he put a snake into his mouth rather than a necklace. Anything which can be said in one language can be said in another. It is possible to translate. The goal of the translator is to keep the meaning constant. Wherever necessary, the receptor language form should be changed in order that the source language meaning should not be distorted. Since a meaning expressed by a particular form in one language may be expressed by quite a different form in another language, it is often necessary to change the form when translating.

3. Notes
Form-based translation: Meaning-based translation: chuyn ti Source language: Receptor language: Context: Principle of translation: Meaning component: dch da vo hnh thc hay cu trc dch da vo ngha, da vo ni dung cn ngn ng gc ngn ng dch vn cnh/ ng cnh nguyn tc dch/k thut dch thnh t ngha

9 Lexical: Surface structure: Deep structure: Meaning/ sense: Primary meaning: Secondary meaning: Literal translation: One-to-one correlation: Figurative meaning: Function: Idiomatic translation: (thuc v) t vng cu trc b mt cu trc su/cu trc ng ngha ngha ngha chnh/ngha gc ngha phi sinh dch tng t mt quan h mt i mt ngha bng chc nng dch ng, dch st nghi

4. Self-study
4.1 Questions for discussion 1. What is translation? What definition do you think is the most appropriate? Can you give your own definition of translation? 2. What is a literal translation? Can you give some examples of literal translations? 3. What is an idiomatic translation? Give some examples of idiomatic translations. 4. What characteristics of language affect translation? 5. What are the secondary meanings? Give ten sentences, each of which contains a word used in a secondary sense. 6. What is the primary meaning? Give ten sentences, each of which contains a word used in a primary sense. 4.2 Exercises A. Identify change of meaning versus change of form. Some of the following pairs of sentences differ in their form. Some differ in meaning. Indicate if the primary change is in the form or in the meaning. Example: They robbed the old man. The old man was dropped by them. Answer: Change of form 1. The students like to study translation. The students like studying translation. 2. I bought a pair of horseshoes. I bought a pair of leather shoes. 3. He saw the bird. He heard the cat.

10 4. Phillip went walking. Phillip took a walk. 5. Go to bed. I want you to go to bed. 6. I came; I saw; I conquered. I came, saw, and conquered. 7. Two weeks later he came. After two weeks he came. 8. There is a table in the book. There is a book on the table. 9. The young man had an English grammar book stolen. An English grammar book was stolen from the young man. 10. He was awaken by a thunderclap. A thunderclap awakened him. B. List as many grammatical forms as you can which realize the same meaning as the one given below. Then put the same meaning into a language other than English in as many forms as you can. Example: the cat is black the black cat the cat, which is black 1. the jug water 2. John bought a car 3. a hot day 4. mothers long blue dress 5. Peters house C. All of the following have the same grammatical form. With the change of lexical items, there is a change of meaning which is signaled by that lexical item, apart from the referential meaning of the word itself. What meaning is signaled in each of the following possessive phrases? Answer by restating. How can that meaning best be expressed in another language which you speak? Example: The mans car - the man owns the car The mans eye - the eye is part of the man 1. the doctors office 2. the doctors patient 3. the doctors book 4. the doctors brother

11 5. the doctors hand 6. the doctors house D. For each pair of sentences, state whether the two sentences are 1. the same in meaning or 2. different in meaning. Example: (a) It rained all night. (b) Rain fell all night. (a) There is a book on the table. (b) There is a table on the book. 1. (a) John was very surprised when he heard the news. (b) The news very much amazed John when he heard it. 2. (a) It was a hot day. (b) The day was hot. 3. (a) Peters house (b) The house that belongs to Peter 4. (a) He remained silent. (b) He did not say anything. 5. (a) I bought cloth to make Mary a new dress. (b) I bought a new dress for Mary. 6. (a) I bought vegetables in the market. (b) I bought tomatoes and onions in the market. 7. (a) My parents are well. (b) My mother and father are well. 8. (a) John is ill: he has a bad case of malaria. (b) John is very ill indeed. 9. (a) There are four rooms in the house. (b) The house has four rooms and a kitchen at the back. 10. (a) In my opinion, the government is doing well and making many improvements in the country. But there are many people who do not agree that this is so. (b) Opinions are divided concerning the government. Some say they are doing well and making many improvements in the country. Others do not agree.

LESSON 2:

KINDS OF TRANSLATION

1. Literal versus idiomatic

12 Because a given text has both form and meaning, as discussed in the previous lesson, there are two main kinds of translation. One is form-based and the other is meaning-based. Form-based translations attempt to follow the form of the source language and are known as literal translation. Meaning-based translations make every effort to communicate the meaning of the source language text in the natural forms of the receptor language. Such translations are called idiomatic translations. An interlinear translation is a completely literal translation. For some purposes, it is desirable to reproduce the linguistic features of the source text, as for example, in a linguistic study of that language. Although these literal translations may be very useful for purposes related to the study of the source language, they are of little help to speakers of the receptor language who are interested in the meaning of the source language text. A literal translation sounds like nonsense and has little communication value. For example: Vietnamese: Literal translation: Mi bn v nh ti chi Invite friend about house me play.

This literal translation makes little sense in English. The appropriate translation would be: Would you like to come to my home? If the two languages are related, the literal translation can often be understood, since the general grammatical form may be similar. However, the literal choice of lexical items may the translation sounds foreign. The following bilingual announcement was overheard at an airport ( Barnwell 1980:18) Literal English: Madame Odette passenger with destination Domda is demanded on the telephone. This English version is a literal translation of the French. French: Madame Odette, passager destination de Domda, est demande au telefon. An idiomatic translation into English would be: Miss Odette, passenger for Domda. You are wanted on the phone. Except for interlinear translation, a truly literal translation is uncommon. Most translators who tend to translate literally actually make a partially modified literal translation. They modify the order and grammar enough to use acceptable sentence structure in the receptor language. However, the lexical items are translated literally. Occasionally, these are also changed to avoid complete nonsense or to improve the communication. However, the result still does not sound natural. Notice the following example from a language in Papua New Guinea: Ro abombo ngusifu pamariboyandi. I my heart fastened-her. (literal) (modified literal) I fastened her in my heart.

13

The modified literal translation changes the order into English structure. However, the sentence still does not communicate in clear English. An idiomatic translation would have used the form: I never forgot her. Or Ive kept her memory in my heart. A person who translates in a modified literal manner will change the grammatical forms when the constructions are obligatory. However, if he has a choice, he will follow the form of the source text even though a different form might be more natural in the receptor language. Literal and modified literal translations consistently err in that they choose literal equivalents for the words, i.e. lexical items being translated. Literal translations of words, idioms result in unclear, unnatural, and sometimes nonsensical translations. In a modified literal translation, the translator usually adjusts the translation enough to avoid the nonsense and wrong meanings, but the unnaturalness still remains. Idiomatic translations use the natural forms of the receptor language, both in the grammatical constructions and in the choice of lexical items. A truly idiomatic translation does not sound like a translation. It sounds like it was written originally in the receptor language. Therefore, a good translator will try to translate idiomatically. This is his goal. However, translations are often a mixture of a literal transfer of the grammatical units along with some idiomatic translation of the meaning of the text. It is not easy to consistently translate. A translator may express some parts of his translation in very natural forms and then in other parts fall back into a literal form. In one translation, the source text said, Nhiu du khch n-c ngoi gii thiu cho chng ti v khch sn H-ng Giang. It was translated, Many foreign tourists have introduced us about Huong Giang Hotel. It would have been translated idiomatically, Huong Giang Hotel has been recommended to us by a number of foreign tourists. The translators goal should be to reproduce in a receptor language a text which communicates the same message as the source language but using the natural grammatical and lexical choices of the receptor language. The basic overriding principle is that an idiomatic translation reproduces the meaning of the source language in the natural form of the receptor language.

2. Translating grammatical features

Parts of speech are language specific. Each language has its own division of the lexicon into classes such as nouns, verbs, adjectives and so on. Different languages will have different classes and subclasses. It will not always be possible to translate a source language noun with a noun in the receptor language. For example, English has many nouns which really refer to actions while Vietnamese prefers to express actions as verbs rather than nouns. In one translation, the source text said, There is a general agreement that the government has given top priority to education. It was translated, C mt s ng chung rng chnh ph dnh nhiu s -u tin cho gio dc. This would

14 have been translated idiomatically, Ai cng ng rng chnh ph dnh nhiu -u tin cho gio dc. Similarly, a translator in Papua New Guinea was asked to translate the Eight Point Improvement Plan for Papua New Guinea. One point reads, Decentralization of economic activity, planning and government spending, with emphasis on agricultural development, village industry, better internal trade, and more spending channeled through local and area bodies. Such sentences are very difficult for translators who want to translate into the native language of the country. Words such as Decentralization, activity, planning, government spending, emphasis development, trade would have to be rendered by verbs in most languages. When verbs are used, then, the appropriate subject and object of the verb may need to be made explicit also. The form in the receptor language is very different from the source language form and yet this kind of adjustment, using verbs rather than using nouns, must be made in order to communicate the message. An idiomatic translation was made which used verbs as in the following. The government wants to decrease the work it does for businesses and what it plans and the money it spends in the capital, and wants to increase what people and groups in local area do to help farmers and small businesses whose owners live in the villages, and help people in this country buy and sell things made in this country and to help local groups spend the governments money. Most languages have a class of words which may be called pronouns. Pronominal systems vary greatly from language to language and the translator is obliged to use the form of the receptor language even though they may have very different meanings than the pronouns of the source language. For example, if one is translating into Kiowa (USA), the pronouns will have to indicate a different between singular, dual and plural person even though the source language does not make this three-way distinction. Or if a translator is translating into Balinese, he must distinguish degrees of honor even though nothing in the source language indicates these distinctions. He will need to understand the culture of the Balinese and the cultural context of the text he is translating in order to choose correctly. In English, the first plural pronoun we is often used when the real meaning is second person you. The reason for the use of we is to show empathy and understanding. The nurse say to the sick child, Its time for us to take our medicine now. Or the teacher says, Were not going to shout, quietly to our well walk places. Clearly , the pronouns do not refer to the nurse or the teacher but to the children whom she is addressing you. In translating these pronouns into another language, a literal translation with first person plural would probably distort the meaning. The translator would need to look for the natural way to communicate second person and the feeling of empathy carried by the source language. Grammatical constructions also vary between the source language and the receptor language. The order , for example, may be completely reserved. The following simple sentences from Vietnamese is given with a literal English translations: Ch sng u? You live where ?

15 C y th-ng mc o s mi vi silk mu xanh c nh.

She often wears a shirt silk blue small. It will readily be seen that understandable translations into English requires a complete reversal of the order: She often wears a small blue silk shirt. It is not uncommon that passive constructions will need to be translated with an active construction or vice versa, depending on the natural form of the receptor language. For example, Vietnamese people tend to use active constructions to express their ideas whereas English people prefer to use passive constructions. English: Vietnamese: (active) English: A: What has happened to all your money after the will was settled and the business was sold? (passive) B: The usual thing, false friends, fast-living style and bad investment. Vietnamese: A: Chuyn g xy ra vi ton b s tin m bn c -c sau khi gii quyt xong chuyn chc th- v bn i c sn nghip. (active) B: Cng l th-ng tnh thi, bn b gi di, n chi hoang n v u t- sai ch. The above translated sentences are only examples to show some types of grammatical adjustments which will result if a translator translates idiomatically in the source language. Certainly, there will be times by coincidence they match, but a translator should translate the meaning not concern himself with whether the forms turn out the same or not. Nguyen Du is considered to be a great poet. ( passive) Ng-i ta xem Nguyn Du l mt nh th v i.

3. Translating lexical features

Each language has its own idiomatic way of expressing meaning lexical items. Languages abound in idioms, secondary meanings, metaphors, and other figurative meanings. For example, notice the following ways in which a fever is referred to ( literal translations are given to show the source language form): Greek: Aguaruna: Vietnamese: The fever left him. He cooled. He cooled. Or: The fever was no more in him.

16

Ilocano:

The fever was no more in him.

The English translations of all six would be : His fever went down, or His temperature returned to normal. All languages have idioms, i.e. a string of words whose meaning is different than the meaning conveyed by the individual words. In English to say that someone is bullheaded means that the person is stubborn. The meaning has little to do with bull or head . Similarly, in Vietnamese to say that someone is cng u cng c means that the person is stubborn. The meaning has little to do with u or c. Languages abound in such idioms. The following are a few English idioms using in and into: run into debt, rush into print, step into a practice, jump into a fight, dive into a book, stumble into acquaintance, fall in love, break into society. In spite of all these combinations, one cannot say the following break into debt, fall into print, rush into a fight, dive into debt, etc. The combinations are fixed as to form and their meaning comes from their combination. A literal word-for-word translation of these idioms into another language will not make sense. The form cannot be kept, but the receptor language word or phrase which has the equivalent meaning will be the correct one to use in the translation. The following idioms occur in Vietnamese. In the first column is a literal translation from Vietnamese. In the second is an idiomatic translation. The literal English is misleading. LITERAL I dont have my eye on you. He is as strong as a buffalo. I have buried my head into my business. IDIOMATIC I dont remember you. He is as strong as a horse. I have been busy with my work.

Translators who wants to make a good idiomatic translation often find figures of speech especially challenging. A literal translation of strong as a horse might sound really strange in a language where the comparison between a strong person and a horse has never been use as a figure of speech. In Vietnamese it would be more natural to say strong as a buffalo. Similarly, a literal translation of blind as a bat might sound really strange in a language where the comparison between a blind person and a bat has never been use as a figure of speech. In Aguaruma it would be more natural to say blind as a fox. There is a legend in which the sun borrowed the foxs eyes and then returned to heaven taking the foxs good eyes with him and leaving the fox with the suns inferior eyes. That is why they say, when the fox is trying to see, he stretches back his head and looks with his throat. Figures of speech are often based on stories or historical incidents. Names of animals are used metaphorically in most languages. But the comparison is often different and so the figure will be misunderstood unless some adjustment is made. For example, when someone is called a pig in English, it usually means he is dirty or a greedy eater. In Vietnamese, it has different meanings. It could means that the person is stupid or that the person is a greedy. Care would need to be taken if pig were used metaphorically or a wrong meaning might result in the receptor language.

17 Some lexical combinations of the source language may be ambiguous. The meaning is not clear. For example, It is too hot to eat, could mean any of the following: The food is too hot to eat; the weather is too hot for us to feel like eating; the horse is too hot after running a race and does not want to eat. In the process of making an idiomatic translation, such ambiguities must often be resolved and only the intended meaning communicated.

4. Conclusion
It is obvious that translation is a complicated process. However, a translator who is concerned with transferring the meaning will find that the receptor language has a way in which the desired meaning can be expressed even though it may be very different from the source language form. Considering the complexity of language structures, how can a translator ever hope to produce an adequate translation? Literal translation can only be avoided by careful analysis of the source language: by, first of all, understanding clearly the message to be communicated. A translator who takes the time to study carefully the source language text, to write analysis of it, and then to look for the equivalent way in which the same message is expressed naturally in the receptor language, will be able to provide an adequate, and some times brilliant translation. His goal must be to avoid literalisms and to strive for a truly idiomatic receptor language text. He will know he is successful if the receptor language readers do not recognize his work as a translation at all, but simply as a text written in the receptor language for their information and enjoyment.

5. Notes
Form-based translation : Meaning-based translation: Literal translation: Idiomatic translation: Interference : Mother-tongue interference: To make adjustments: Translating grammatical features: Parts of speech: Subclass: Indo-European language: Pronominal system: dch da vo hnh thc dch da vo ngha dch tng t mt dch ng ngha s can thip s can thip ca ting m hiu nh/ iu chnh c tr-ng ng php dch t loi nhm nh ngn ng n-u h thng i t

6. Self-study
6.1 Questions for discussion 1. What are the differences between a literal translation and an idiomatic translation? 2. What should you do to translate a text idiomatically?

18 3. What grammatical features should be considered when you translate a text? Give some examples to support your ideas. 4. What lexical features should be considered when you translate a text? Give some examples to support your ideas. 5. Why do you have to take the time to read the source language text carefully before translating it? 6.2 Exercises A. In each of the following pairs of sentences, which is more idiomatic English, a or b? How would the meaning be expressed idiomatically in the language you speak? 1.(a) The storekeeper said that we will refund your money. (b) The storekeeper promised to refund our money. 2.(a) A certain boy told me this little story at a party. (b) He is one boy. He told the one little story. This is a game he said. 3.(a) An International Alphabet would inevitably bring about a spelling reform as well. How many children have shed hot tears about spelling? (b) An International Alphabet would inevitably bring about a spelling reform ,too. And how many hot childrens tears have not been shed on spelling? 4.(a) He then reported his misfortune to the police, who are searching diligently for the thief. (b) He then his mishap reported to the police, who are the thief searching intensively B. Look for literalisms in the following translations into English and underline the words or phrases that do not sound natural in English. Suggest a more idiomatic way of saying it. All of these examples are from published translated material. 1. The third-year students often visit the schools in the city for the attendance of the class. 2. Foreign tourists usually at Kinh Do Hotel for their friends have introduced to them very much about this hotel. 3. Since the USA abolished the embargo against Vietnam, many foreign countries have been investing in Vietnam. 4. After saying lies many times, he lost our belief in him. 5. Hue is famous about its delicious dishes and beautiful landscapes. 6. The participants discussed about the causes of pollution environment. 7. Every time my mother goes to work , I feel my house absent anybody. 8. One thing makes me proud of my village is a large green field that provides one part of life for people. 9. A robbery took place of a motorcycle rider at Kampung early yesterday morning. 10. I left my village for three years, a time not long but like a century. C. Each of the following are sentences written by some Vietnamese who are not yet fluent English speakers. The forms used shows examples of how their mother-tongue language

19 structures have been carried over into English. The same information is then given in parenthesis in idiomatic English. What changes were made in correcting the English? These changes point out some of the differences between Vietnamese and English. 1. Sir, the problems of before dont forget. ( Sir, please dont forget the problems we discussed before.) 2. If there is any means, send me a letter to Saigon. (If there is any way to do so, send a letter to me in Saigon.) 3. I will think you time to time day and day. ( I will be thinking about you often every day.) 4. I am very grateful to inform you with this letter. ( I am very happy to be able to send/write you this letter.) 5. I am a man who has been to Hanoi for 12 years. ( I have now lived in Hanoi for 12 years.) D. Translate the following Vietnamese sentences as idiomatically as possible. 1. Ch may o s mi ny u vy? 2. Cha ng ta ung n-c sng Hng, sng , sng Cu Long v sng cht vi sng n-c ny. Cc bn th ngh xem rt t ngn ng trn th gii li c s thng nht nh- ting m ca chng ta. Trong ting Vit, th n-c (trong sng, trong h, trong bin....) li ng ngha, ng m vi n-c trong ngha t quc qu h-ng. - cha ng: ancestors

- thng nht : uniformity - ng ngha : synonym/ synonymous - ng m : homonym - trong ngha : to mean/ to signify - t quc qu h-ng: homeland/ fatherland/ motherland - sng cht: to try hard to protect them/ to spare no pain to protect them 3. Lt chim c mt vng t rng trn cao nguyn Lm Vin, xung quanh ton l ni i hng v. - chim c : take up/ to be situated/ to occupy - cao nguyn : plateau - xung quanh: to be surrounded by/ with 4. S pht trin kinh t ca Vit Nam phi -c xt trong hon cnh chin tranh ko di. Hon cnh chin tranh y gy ra

20 nhiu thit hi v sinh mng v ti sn cng nh- cc cng trnh cng cng v ti nguyn. - s pht trin kinh t : the economic development - -c xt : to be viewed/ to be considered/ to be taken into account - hon cnh chin tranh ko di : in the context of the long period of war - gy ra thit hi : to cause damage to - ti sn : property - cng trnh cng cng : public facilities - ti nguyn : resources 5. Mc d a v ca ph n c nhng b-c tin k diu, nh-ng ng-i ta phi thc hin nhiu chuyn khc ci thin tnh trng sc kho, dinh d-ng v gio dc cho ph n. - a v : status - c nhng b-c tin k diu: to be dramatically improved - dinh d-ng : nutrition 6. Mng l-i truyn hnh ang xy dng rng khp c n-c. Ngoi nhng i truyn hnh t-ng i hin i, c t lu i nh- i truyn hnh H Ni v Thnh Ph H Ch Minh, cn c 25 i thuc cc tnh -c thnh lp vo nm 1988. Nhng i truyn hnh ny s truyn nhng ch-ng trnh quan trng ca i truyn hnh trung -ng v pht ch-ng trnh ca i mnh. - mng l-i : network - i truyn hnh : television station - lu i: long-standing - thnh lp : to establish/ set up - truyn nhng ch-ng trnh : to relay the transmissions - pht: to broadcast 7. Ngy nay th gii ang -ong u vi nhiu vn nghim trng cho d c nhiu b-c tin ng k trong lnh vc khoa hc, cng ngh v tri thc. Mt trong nhng vn l s bng n dn s, c bit cc n-c ang pht trin. Dn s ang tng theo cp s nhn trong lc sn xut hng ho li tng theo cp s cng. - -ng u : to face - vn nghim trng : serious problem - c nhiu b-c tin ng k : to take great strikes

21 - s bng n dn s : population explosion/ population boom - tng theo cp s nhn : to grow in geometric progression - tng theo cp s cng : to grow in arithmetic progression - sn xut hng ho : the production of goods 8. Charles Dickens l mt trong nhng nh vit tiu thuyt ln nht th gii, thuc tr-ng phi hin thc ph phn th k 19. iu m chng ta nh gi cao v nhng tc phm ca Dickens l s ph phn v ti c v s t-ng phn gia giu v ngho ca x hi t- sn Anh lc by gi. Th gii m ng ta miu t l th gii ca giai cp trung l-u v h l-u Lun n. - nh vit tiu thuyt : novelist - tr-ng phi hin thc ph phn : the school of critical realism - nh gi cao : to value/ highly appreciate - s ph phn : criticism - ti c : evil - s t-ng phn : contrast - giu v ngho : wealth and poverty - x hi t- sn Anh : the English boutgeois society - giai cp trung l-u v h l-u : the middle and lower classes 9. Hi Lin Hip Ph v ch tch hi -c Hi ng B Tr-ng iu l lin quan n N Vit Nam -c c i din Quc Hi quyn tham d cc cuc hp th-ng k ca by t quan im ca Hi v ngh nhng ph n.

- Hi Lin Hip Ph N Vit Nam : The Vietnams Women Union - c i din : to be represented - Quc Hi : the National Assembly - -c quyn lm g : to have the right to do something - cuc hp th-ng k : regular meeting - Hi ng B Tr-ng : the Council of Ministers - by t quan im : express ones points of view - iu l : regulations 10. Gia nh Vit Nam chu nh h-ng r rt ca nn vn minh nng nghip. Do chnh sch m ca, nn vn minh cng nghip ang tc ng tng ngy, tng gi vo cuc sng gia nh Vit Nam. - chu nh h-ng : to be affected by

22 - nn vn minh nng nghip : agricultural civilization - chnh sch m ca : the open-door policy - tc ng tng ngy tng gi : to have daily and hourly impact /influence on

LESSON 3:

STEPS IN A TRANSLATION PROJECT

Before beginning an actual translation, it is important to have in mind the total translation project and what is involved in producing a good translation. Each of these steps will be elaborated on in more detail in the last section of the book.

1.Establishing the project

Before one considers beginning a translation project, there are a number of matters which need to be clearly understood by all who will be involved. These can be summarized under four Ts- the text, the target, the team, and the tools. The text refers to the source language document which is to be translated. The desirability of translating a particular text must be determined. Texts are chosen to be translated for various reasons. Most often it is to communicate certain information to people speaking another language, or it may be to share the enjoyment of the source text. The translator should examine his reasons for choosing the text and the potential for its use by the receptor language audience. The target refers to the audience. For whom is the translation prepared? The form of translation will be affected by questions of dialect, educational level, age level, bilingualism, and peoples attitudes towards their languages. Will it be used in school, in business, or read orally in a meeting or at home? The team refers to the people who will be involved in the project. If a person is a competent speaker of both the source language and the receptor language, it may be that the project can be done completely by one person. But even so there should be other available for evaluation and consultation. Most translation projects require a team, a number of people who are going to contribute to the translation at some stage in the project. The working relationship between these people needs to be established before the project gets underway. It may, however, also change as the project moves along and new factors come into focus. There are certain essentials to any translation project. Not all these need to be found in one person. There are various kinds of programs which may be set up depending on the abilities and backgrounds of those who will be involved. The team may consist of 1. co-translators, where one is a specialist in the source language and the other a specialist in the receptor language, or 2. a translator with capability to handle both source language and receptor language matters and an advisor or consultant, or 3. a committee working together with specific responsibilities delegated to each one. Which kind of program is developed will depend on who is available and qualified to determine the meaning of the source language, who is most skilled at drafting in the receptor language, and who has an understanding of translation principles. The team may include the translators, a consultant, testers, and reviewers.

23 Tools refer to the written source materials which will be used by the translators as helps. These include, in addition to the document to be translated, any dictionaries, lexicons, grammars, cultural descriptions. etc.. .. of both the source language and receptor language which are available. The team will want as much in formation available as possible while translating. All of these tools should be brought to the translation site in preparation for the project. For some projects, there will be a wealth of materials that can be used to help in interpreting the source language text and in finding equivalents in the receptor language. For other projects, there may be a scarcity of such material, but whatever is available should be there to make the work easier.

2. Exegesis
Exegesis is used to refer to the process of discovering the meaning of the source language text which is to be translated. It is the step which includes the preparation and analysis which must be done before anything at all can be written in the receptor language. The text must be understood completely. This is the process which takes place in moving from the source language form to the meaning of the text. The translator should begin by reading the text several times, then by reading other materials that may help in understanding the culture or language of the source text. As he reads the text, he will be looking for the authors purpose and the theme of the text. He will look for the larger groupings or sections. He may want to outline the text. The purpose is to understand the text as a whole. Once he has done this, he is ready to work on the material a section at a time. The analysis of the source text will include resolving ambiguity, identifying implicit information, studying key words, interpreting figurative senses, recognizing when words are being used in a secondary sense, when grammatical structures are being used in a secondary function, etc. It will involve doing the kind of analysis which this book is all about. The goal of exegesis is to determine the meaning which is to be communicated in the receptor language text. The translator carefully studies the source language text and using all the available tools, determines the content of the source language message, the related communication situation matters, and all other factors which will need to be understood in order to produce an equivalent translation. 3. Transfer and initial draft After a careful analysis of the source language text, as indicated above, the translator begins drafting piece by piece, section by section. The transfer results in the initial draft. In preparing this draft, the translator is transferring from the source language into the receptor language. As he does so, he must always keep his target audience in mind. Before any extensive drafting can be done, the key terms must be determined. Every text has a set of words which re crucial to the content and correct communication of the theme. These need to be decided upon and may need to be checked with other speakers of the receptor language. There are two ways of approaching the transfer and initial draft. Some translators prefer to do a quick rough translation so that the material flows naturally. Then they go back and tighten up the details to be sure that there is no wrong information, and no omissions or additions. In this way, the receptor language text is more apt to be in the natural style of the receptor language. Others prefer to prepare a proposition-like semantic draft, being sure that all the information all the information is accounted for, and then reword it for naturalness; that is,

24 reword it in the idiomatic form of the receptor language. Either method will lead to an idiomatic translation if careful work is done. It may be necessary to rework the initial draft several times before the team is satisfied that all the adjustments needed have been made, that no information is wrong or omitted, that the text communicates clearly in the receptor language, and that the form chosen will communicate to the desired audience. While making and reworking this draft, the audience must always be kept in mind. Once the translation team has sufficiently reworked the initial draft, they arrange for copies to be made so that adequate evaluation. 4. Evaluation The purpose of evaluation is threefold: accuracy, clearness, and naturalness. The questions to be answer are: 1. Does the translation communicate the same meaning as the source language? 2. Does the audience for whom the translation is intended understand it clearly? 3. Is the form of the translation easy to read and natural receptor language grammar and style? Those helping with the evaluation should be mother-tongue speakers of the receptor language. There are a number of kinds of evaluations which need to be done. The translator will want to compare the translation with the source text at several points during the translation process to be sure no additions, deletions or change of in formation have crept in . Others may help with this work. It is especially advantageous to have a consultant check over the material. The translator will want to have receptor language speakers read the text and then tell back what the text communicated to them. As they read, there will be parts that are hard to read or hard to understand. Any time there is an indication of a problem in reading , this should be noted for further checking . Another way to check is by asking questions of those who read the text , or to whom it is read. Questions need to be carefully formed so that they bring out the theme, the authors purpose , and the relevant facts of the text. Any wrong understanding should be noted and then checked with others as well. It is best to have someone who has not worked on the translation, but know both the source language and receptor language, translate back from the receptor language into the source language without the reference to the original source language text. Does the back translation carry the same information as the original source language text? Any difference will need to be checked further. It is very important that sufficient time and effort be given to evaluation. If many of the people who will eventually be using the receptor language text can be involved in the evaluation process, this will also create interest in the translated material when it is finally published.

5. Revised
After evaluation is done carefully, there will need to be a revised draft made on the basis of the feedback received. Those with whom the translator has checked may have suggested many rewordings, may have expressed misunderstanding, etc. The translation team now works through this material , honestly accepting the evaluation , and rewording the material accordingly. If any key words are changed, the text will need to be checked carefully for consistency in the change made. If some parts were hard for people to read, they may need to be made easier by more redundancy( or less redundancy in another language), by adding more information to clarify participants or theme or whatever. How much re-drafting will be needed will vary depending on the results of the evaluation.

6. Consultation

25 In many translation projects, there are advisors or consultants who are willing to help the translator. The translator(s) will expect that the consultant is interested in three matters:1.accuracy of content 2. naturalness of style, and 3. effect on the receptor language audience. It is important that translators check their materials with a trained consultant after completing a section or two of a long document. If they continue , and do large amounts of translation work without this kind of a check, they will miss out on the training which a consultant can give as they go over the material together. Asking a consultant to work through the material with him will give the translator insights which will not only help his final draft of the material being worked on, but will help him do better transfer drafts on the sections of the document remaining to be done.

7. Final draft
The translator incorporates into the translated text the suggestions made by the consultant, checks them again with mother-tongue speakers to be sure they are warranted, and makes any other minor changes which have come to his attention. However, before he prepares the final draft, decisions about format need to be discussed with the whole translation team, the consultant, the potential publisher and those who will promote distribution. Some matters may need special testing before the final draft is prepared. If the publication is to include pictures, these will need evaluation. If a special size of print is being recommended, it will need to be tested. A final editing for spelling and punctuation will need to be made. When all matters are cared for, a number of copies should be prepared and distributed for proofreading by various people before the actual printing takes place. Every translator wants his final copy to be as accurate as possible. The time spent in careful checking and preparation of the final draft will improve quality and will make the translation more acceptable to the audience for whom it is being prepared.

8. Notes
Target: Target language audience: Dialect: Educational level: Bilingualism: To come into focus: Co-translator: Specialist: Tools: Lexicon: Exegesis: Initial draft: Revised draft: c gi ng-i c bn dch ph-ng ng trnh hc vn song ng ch / tp trung ng-i cng dch chuyn gia ti liu tham kho khi dch t in t vng hiu ngha vn bn tr-c khi dch bn tho u tin bn tho d-c hiu nh

26

9. Self-study
9.1 Questions for discussion 1. Name and discuss the four Ts of a translation project. 2. Explain what is meant by exegesis. 3. What are the goals of the translator as he prepares the initial draft? 4. What is the purpose of the evaluation? 5. What kinds of evaluation checks can be made? 6. What is the consultant concerned about when he checks a translation? 7. How will the final draft be different from the revision draft done earlier? 8. How is the revision draft different from the initial draft? 9.2 Exercises A. Read the English text and answer the questions.

DEFORESTATION
Population growth is one factor in rainforest destruction. However, it is a myth to assume that the expansion of subsistence agriculture to feed more mouths is the main factor. The majority of deforestation in Latin America, South-east Asia and the Pacific is caused by clearing land to grow cash crops for export and by commercial logging operations, and not by shifting cultivators or landless peasants. Each year commercial logging eliminates 45000 square kilometers of forest, much of the timber being exported to the United States and Japan. No clearer connection between deforestation and the demands of affluent societies can be found than in Central America and Brazil, where tropical forest has been converted to grazing land because cattle raising offers export earnings that help with external debt payments. These heavy payments, which affect the poor the most, have arisen largely from external loans taken out to finance the purchase of luxury items and arms by military and governing elite. The establishment of large ranch-style cattle grazing properties is the principal reason for the elimination of 20000 square kilometers of rainforest each year in Central or South America. The cleared land is mainly devoted to the export of beef for the fast-food industries in North America, Europe and Japan- the aptly named hamburger connection. 1. What is the authors purpose of writing this text? 2. What is the text about? 3. How many times have you read the text to understand it completely? 4. Do you have any difficulty in finding the Vietnamese meaning of the English words : subsistence agriculture, cash crops, commercial logging operations, shifting cultivators, landless peasants, affluent society, external debt payment, military and governing elites, ranch-style cattle grazing property, hamburger connection ? 5. Do you have any difficulty in finding the equivalent Vietnamese structures of the following English sentences? a. However, it is a myth to assume that the expansion of subsistence agriculture to feed more mouths is the main factor.

27 b. No clearer connection between deforestation and the demands of affluent societies can be found than in Central America and Brazil, where tropical forest has been converted to grazing land because cattle raising offers export earnings that help with external debt payments. 6. Translate the text into Vietnamese. B. Read the Vietnamese text and answer the questions.

NON NC
Cha ng ta ung n-c sng Hng, Sng , Sng Cu Long v tng sng cht vi sng n-c ny. Cc bn th ngh xem rt t ngn ng trn th gii li c s thng nht nh- ting m ca chng ta. Vit Nam th n-c( trong sng, h, bin.) li ng ngha, ng m vi n-c trong ngha t quc qu h-ng. Sng n-c v con ng-i y kt hp vi thin nhin v lch s nh- mt khi bt t bt dit bi mt th xi mng tr-ng tn. l lng yu n-c th-ng ni ca dn tc Vit Nam. Trn th gii, c nhiu quc gia t tnh n sang tnh kia ni l khng hiu nhau ri. Nh-ng Vit Nam, d bt k u, ng-i Nam k Bc, h gp nhau ln u ni l hiu nhau ngay. 1. What is the authors purpose of writing this text? 2. What is the text about? 3. How many times have you read the text to understand it completely? 4. Do you have any difficulty in finding the English meaning of the Vietnamese words : cha ng, sng cht, s thng nht, kt hp cht ch, xi mng tr-ng tn, lng yu n-c th-ng ni, hiu nhau? 5. Do you have any difficulty in finding the equivalent English structures of the following Vietnamese sentences? a. Cc bn th ngh xem rt t ngn ng trn th gii li c s thng nht nh- ting m ca chng ta. b.Nh-ng Vit Nam, d bt k u, ng-i Nam k Bc, h gp nhau ln u ni l hiu nhau ngay. 6. Translate the text into English.

28

LESSON 4:

STRATEGIES FOR TRANSLATORS

The following strategies have been suggested by translators, commissioners of translations, and others involved in translating as ways to approach difficulties in translations from English into Vietnamese.

1. STRATEGY 1 : How to deal with non-equivalence at lexical level

It is often the case that no direct equivalents can be found in Vietnamese for English words. It may be that the concept or idea is new to Vietnamese translators, as in the case of gender, which is, in fact, a relatively new concept in general, and a very difficult concept to understand and explain in many languages. It may also be that the concept is known or understood but there is no specific word in Vietnamese used to express it. Another difficulty is that, in addition to their concrete meaning, some words have special connotations that are not conveyed by the Vietnamese word for the same thing. The strategies listed below can be used to handle cases of non-equivalence. 1.1 Translating by a more specific word In some cases, it may be appropriate or necessary to use a more specific word to translate an English word into Vietnamese. This usually involves choosing among several different words, as there may be many Vietnamese words that correspond to the general category or meaning expressed by English word. For instance, Vietnamese has many words that mean to carry with distinction being made depending on the size and shape of the object; its animate ( e.g. a child as opposed to a box); and how it is carried (e.g. in the hand, or in the arms...). Similarly, the English word for rice can be translated by many different Vietnamese words, depending on whether one is planting it, harvesting it, cooking it, or eating it. In these cases, the English word alone is not enough to determine the appropriate Vietnamese translation, and it is necessary to examine the English context. 1.2 Translating by a more general word In other cases, it may be appropriate to use a more general word to translate an English word with no specific Vietnamese equivalent. For example, English makes distinctions among mopeds, scooters, and motorcycles, the latter having larger wheels and engines than both mopeds and scooters. Vietnamese, on the one hand, refers to all two-wheel, motorized vehicles as xe my. Similarly, the English words paw, foot, or leg may all be translated by the Vietnamese word chn, which does not suggest any problems of comprehension in Vietnamese, as it should be clear from the context which of these words is meant. Another example can be found in a manual on community development, which translates the word matrix by the Vietnamese word ma trn. However, in Vietnamese, ma trn has a specific use in mathematics only, and does not have the additional sense of a model or a plan according to which something is developed. In this example, matrix is better translated bn, which is a more general word used to classify a written plan or formula. 1.3 Translating by cultural substitution This strategy involves replacing a culture-specific item or expression with one of the different meanings but similar impact in the translated text. Because of their self-described respect

29 for the original text, most Vietnamese translators object to this strategy and tend to translate directly, even though it is in appropriate. For example, a farmers manual that has been translated into Vietnamese suggests the planting of different types of fruit trees which are not even grown in Vietnam. The original manual, which was developed in other parts in Asia, was not modified at all for the Vietnamese context. Though some translators argue that it is not the responsibility of the translator to chance the text in this way, the translator is in fact playing an important role in this task. Translators should be encouraged to consider the appropriateness of the documents they are translating and suggest changes to make them more culturally appropriate. However, this is not only the burden of the translator, but also of the commissioners of the translation and the editor. 1.4 Translating by using a loan word plus explanation There is some objection to this strategy in Vietnam, as many translator prefer to coin new words in Vietnamese rather than borrow English words. However, this strategy is very useful when the translator deal with concepts or ideas that are new to Vietnamese audience, culturespecific items, and proper names of diseases or medicines that are widely known in English names. For instance, HIV and AIDS are two loan words that are frequently used in Vietnamese, as they are referred to by their English names in almost every part of the world. Because these words have been in common used in Vietnam for a long time, they are often used without any accompanying explanation. Whenever a loan word is used , it is better to give an explanation. Another example is the acronym for oral dehydration salts, or ORS, which is printed on every package and hence easily recognized; this is normally written in English with an explanation in Vietnamese : ORS (mui b mt n-c) 1.5 Translating by using a paraphrase This strategy can be used when we translate an English word or concept that does not exist in Vietnamese, or when the Vietnamese term for it does not include all the meanings conveyed by the English term for the same concept. For example, in the sentence: Pregnant women should avoid alcohol., the English alcohol includes all alcoholic drinks in its meaning. The Vietnamese word ru does not include beer in its definition, so the Vietnamese translation should add the word beer to reflect the full meaning of the source language sentence. Another example is that the English words abuse and neglect signify a whole range of behaviors, some of which are not conveyed by the Vietnamese words alone. As a result, the English sentence: Children should be protected from abuse and neglect. cannot be translated as simply as tr em nn -c bo v khi s lm dng v l l.. This translation does not account for their full meaning , which must be unpacked for better understanding. This can be done by paraphrasing as a translator has attempted in the following translation: tr em cn bo v chng li mi hnh thc bo lc, gy tn th-ng hay xc phm, b mc hoc xao nhng trong vic chm sc. Back translated roughly into English, this sentence reads, : Children must be protected from all forms of violence causing harm or offense, and from abandonment and negligence in their care. 1.6 Translating by omission Though some translators may reject this strategy as too drastic, it is sometimes appropriate to omit words or phrases that are not essential to the meaning or impact of the text. This is especially true for words that would require lengthy explanations, awkward paraphrases, or literal and unnatural translations, which would interrupt the flow of the text and could distract

30 the reader from the overall meaning. For example, the sentence Much can be done even without being physically present in the meeting. is best translated into Vietnamese by, nhiu vic c th lm ngy c khi khng c mt ti cuc hp which omit the word physically in the translation. The difference in meaning between being physically present and being present is so minimal that it does not justify translation into Vietnamese, which cannot easily express the slight emphasis implied here by the author, and would not do so by emphasizing the physicality of a persons presence.

STRATEGY 2 : How to deal with idioms and set expressions

Idioms and set expressions can be dealt with in the ways similar to those mentioned above. With idioms, however, there is another difficulty that the translator may not realize that s/he is dealing with an idiomatic expression, since more idioms may make sense when translated literally. 2.1 Using an idiom or a set expression of similar meaning and form It is sometimes possible to find a Vietnamese idiom or expression with a similar meaning to an English idiom or expression, and which is expressed in the same way. One example is the idiom to fight like cats and dogs, which is expressed using the same words in Vietnamese: ci nhau nh- ch vi mo.; another is Better than never., which is translated : Th mun cn hn khng n. It is ideal if such a match can be found, but this kind of correspondence is not common, and it is usually necessary to use other strategies in dealing with idioms and set expressions. 2.2 Using an idiom or a set expression of similar meaning but different form It is possible and easy to find a Vietnamese idiom with a similar meaning for an English idiom or set expression. A good example can be found is the translation for to carry coals to Newcastle: Ch ci v rng." ,which is translated as to carry firewood to the forest. The meaning here is clearly the same for both idioms- to bring something to a place that has an abundance of that thing- but the way in which each language expresses is bound to be the culture of that language. It is far more cumbersome to translate this idiom literally into Vietnamese with an explanation that Newcastle is a well-known coal-producing city in England (as was suggested by some Vietnamese translators), which would unduly interrupt the flow of the text and greatly diminish the idioms impact. By substituting a similar Vietnamese idiom, then, the flow and the impact of the source text are retained in the translation. 2.3 Translating by paraphrasing When Vietnamese equivalents cannot be found, paraphrasing may be the best way to deal with an idiom or set expression in English. A good example can be found in an article on maternal mortality, which includes the sentence, But before the new estimates replace the old as a way of packaging up the problem, it should be said that a mistake has been made in allowing statistics such as these to slip into easy language. The expression packaging up the problem caused the problems in translation, as it was misinterpreted to mean assembling or gathering. However, even if this phrase were clearly understood, it would be difficult to find a precise equivalent in Vietnamese. In fact, it would be difficult to restate concisely in English. This phrase is best dealt with by paraphrasing, which in English could be understood as something like summing up the problem by referring to it simply as a number, which does

31 not reflect its true magnitude or impact. The expression to slip into easy usage is problematic for the same reasons, and is also best dealt with by paraphrasing, as a literal translation into Vietnamese would be meaningless. 2.4 Translating by omission This strategy could be used when we translate words or phrases that would require lengthy explanations, awkward paraphrases, or literal and unnatural translation. This strategy has also be used when we translate phases which has two meanings one of the meanings may be sacrificed for the other. For instance, a book entitled Being Positive-Living with HIV/AIDS causes problems in translate because of the double meaning of being positive. The meaning of the phrase could be that a person is suffering from positive HIV and that s/he should have an optimistic outlook on life. This may be clear to the translator , who may interpret the phrase to mean that this book is for and about people who are HIV positive. However, the double meaning should be made clear through collaboration with the commissioner, after which a choice must be made between the two meanings, for it would not be possible to translate both meanings by one Vietnamese phrase. As the emphasis is on positive outlook on life but not on the fact of being HIV positive, one translator has suggested the translation: Hy Sng Yu i D Nhim HIV. This translation expresses the notion of being positive about life without mentioning anything about being HIV positive status.

STRATEGY 3 : How to deal with voice, number and person

2.1 Voice The passive voice is used very often in English and poses some problems in Vietnamese translation. Passive voice can be translated from English into Vietnamese in the following ways: a. English : Vietnamese: A is/was/has been done by B (i) A -c+ ng t+(bi B) A -c/do+(B)+ng t (ii) A b +ng t + bi B

A b +(B) + ng t Example: This house was built by Frank in 1930 NgI nh ny do Frank xy nm 1930

Tom is given a present by Mary Tom -c Mary tng mt mn qu

32

Tom was attacked by a stranger last night Tom b mt k l mt tn cng ti hm qua

b.English : Vietnamese:

A is/was/has been done. (i) (ii) (iii) A -c+ ng t A b+ ng t Ng-i ta/ai + ng t + A

Example: Tom has been promoted recently. Tom mi -c bt gn y. The CD has been broken. Chic a CD b v/ Ai lm v chic a CD. The positive and negative connotation is not often conveyed in English, so it is difficult to know what way used to translate into Vietnamese. Example: The children were given injections.

Vietnamese translation : Cc chu -c tim., or Cc chu b tim. depending on whether the receiving injection is considered a positive or negative experience. On the other hand, when the positive or negative connotation of the sentence is clear it is more appropriate to retain the passive voice in Vietnamese. Example: The HMong people do not like to be called Meo. They prefer to be called HMong. Vietnamese: Mo. H Ng-i dn tc H Mng khng thch b gi l dn thch -c gi l dn tc H Mng. tc

In Vietnamese, there are some cases where one can see the words -c/b but they are not translated into English passive sentences at all. Example: - Anh y b ng. : - Ch Lan b ho. : He fell. Lan has a cough.

- Hm nay chng ta -c nh chn no n.

33 We had and enormous meal today. 2.2 Number Though both languages have similar notions of number and countability, each language has its own way to express these notions. In English, number is expressed as a grammar category; that is, there are different grammatical forms for singular and plural nouns. In Vietnamese, however, no such distinction is grammatically made. Example : Ph n: can mean either woman or women

In Vietnamese, some plural markers such as cc, nhng, tt c, mi" ,mi can be used in addition to the noun. cc generally means all of the given category of things, whereas nhng refers only to some of the total number of things being discussed. Mi emphasizes the identity of the individual member of the category without indicating anything of their totality; mi expresses both the individuality of the items and the totality of the category. If it is clear from the English context which of these plural markers should be used in the Vietnamese, then the translator should choose accordingly. 2.3 Person Participants roles and forms of address are expressed in Vietnamese through a very complicated system of personal pronouns based largely on kinship terms. Unlike English pronouns, Vietnamese pronouns bear a number of semantic components depending on the relationship within a family, age, sex, familiarity, social status, and even ones particular mood or attitude in a given situation. These distinctions are not always explicitly expressed in English and can usually be determined by the context in which the language operates. If it is not possible to determine the distinctions of the English pronouns, the attention should be focused on the tone and the overall purpose of the text to be translated. Example: A book on health-care contains many sections written especially for children and adults. In the sections for children the pronoun you is translated as em or cc em. In the sections for adults, you should be translated as chng ta .

4. STRATEGY 4 : How to deal with non-subject sentences ( Vietnamese- English translation)

The following techniques could be used to translate the non-subject sentences in Vietnamese texts: 4.1. Passive voice 4.2. It + to be + Adj + to infinitive 4.3. There + to be... 4.4. Use the subject that is found in the previous sentence(s) Example: Cn y mnh cng nghip ha, hin i ha.

34 Industrialization promoted. Or: It is modernization necessary to promote industrialization and and modernization should be

Vn ch-a c cch cha khi bnh AIDS. There has been no cure for AIDS.

5. STRATEGY 5 : How to deal with newspaper headlines

Some main follows. characteristics of newspaper headlines are as

5.1. Present tense = past events 5.2. Present participle = event in progress 5.3. To infinitive = future events 5.4. Past participle = passive voice 5.5. Nouns 5.6. Verb + noun Example: 1. Chinese Professors Turn To Business Cc gio s- Trung Quc chuyn sang kinh doanh 2. US President Visiting Vietnam Tng thng Hoa K ang thm Vit Nam 3. Oil Price To Rise? Gi du s tng 4. 5. 6. Three More Investment Projects Licensed This Year Investment Boom See You In Court Hn gp ti ta Thm ba d n u t- na -c cp giy php trong nm nay Bng n u t-

LESSON 5:

PATTERNS AND SOURCES OF ERRORS MADE BY VIETNAMESE TRANSLATORS

What is mother tongue interference in translation? In the narrow definition, interference in translation takes place when apparently, any feature of the source language notably a syntactic structure, a lexical item, and idiom, a metaphor,

35 word order or culture is carried over or literally translated as the case may be into the target language(TL) text. In a wider definition, interference includes cases when sentence length, punctuation, proper names, culture words are evidently transferred in the translation in fact all cases where the language of the translation is manifestly affected whether appropriately or not by the language of the original. When the mother tongue interference is an error, a false friend, a sign of the translators ignorance, a mark of the effect of the source language (SL) or the SL culture, it can be categorized as follows.

1. LINGUISTIC ERRORS
The linguistic errors can be divided into the following groups:

36

1.1 Lexical Errors Lexical interference traps are common enough but more invidious are innocent looking collocations which appear to make sense until one asks oneself what they mean in particular context. E.g. in English to cook an account translated as nu s sch is meanigless and it must be translated as gi mo s sch. Lexical interference is very dangerous because it can distort the meaning of a sentence. 1.1.1 Context The context itself determines the meaning of words. Therefore, their meaning should be solved in the context. It is commonly known that a word may have equivalents and accordingly the analysis of its meaning has to be made carefully in order to pick out the most appropriate word. There are many ways of translating of some nouns related to professions, classes, fields in society. For example, in a text written about Buddhism in which there are two words clergy and death. Some translated transferred clergy as gio s and death as ci cht for Buddha. It sounds strange and funny. In fact, clergy translated as gio s for Catholicism but gii tng for Buddhism. The word death is normally translated as ci cht but vua bng h in Kings death and as for Buddhism this word should be translated as vin tch. When translators are asked to translate these sentences into English a. Kha Lun B tm ra Tn th gii vo nm 1842. b. Ti ang tm cun sch. c. Michael Faraday tm ra my pht in. Obviously, there are many equivalents in English for the word tm such as seek, look for, search for, find, find out. In addition, there are two more words related to this meaning: to invent and to discover. However, in sentence (1) the word tm has an equivalent in English as discover. In sentence (2) the word tm is understood as look for, search for or seek. In sentence (3) the word tm has an equivalent as invent. The three above-mentioned sentences can be translated as follows. 1. The New World was discovered by Christopher. 2. I am looking for my book. 3. Michael Faraday invented the generator. It is characteristic of word that a single lexical item may have several meanings. For example, the word head in isolation means something like the upper part of the body. But the same word used in the context of talking about a company or an organization has nothing to do with the human body though the idea of the upper position of something still remains. Example: 1. He is the former head of the Chemistry Section of the Australian Atomic Energy Commission. ( leader) 2. Although he is the head of the company, he has no head. ( leader-intelligence)

37 The following examples show that the translators do not treat words in context but rely on the meaning in dictionary: 1. In 1999, some major commodities were stockpiled because of poor quality. It is not accurate at all when stockpiled was translated l-u tr. In fact, due to poor quality, major commodities were not sold out leading to stockpile. Therefore, the sentence should be translated as Nm 1999 mt s mt hng ch yu b tn kho do cht l-ng km. 2. The Prime Minister has also assigned relevant agencies to formulate a law on industrial zones to provide a complete legal background/frame for the operation of Izs and EPZs in Vietnam. was translated Th t-ng b nhim nhng chnh sch thch hp -a ra lut v khu cng nghip cung cp mt bi cnh hon ton hp php cho cc hot ng ca khu cng nghip, khu ch xut Vit Nam. . This translation is quite vague in Vietnamese. In fact, a word in source language has many equivalents in target language. The word assign is equivalent with phn cng/ b nhim; relevant with thch ng, thch hp, c lin quan; agency with i l, c quan, chi nhnh; foundation nn mng, nn tng, c s. For this reason, in this context it should be chosen the most appropriate equivalents to create an idiomatic translation: Th t-ng giao cho cc c quan c lin quan ban hnh b lut v khu cng nghip nhm cung cp mt s c s php l hon chnh cho vic hot ng ca khu cng nghip v khu ch xut Vit Nam. In brief, the translators have a habit of translating literally and depending largely on the meaning in dictionary due to the mother-tongue interference. In order to avoid committing errors of context, words should be solved in context and the analysis of their meaning has to be made carefully to pick out the most appropriate equivalent. 1.1.2 Word collocation Word collocation consists of the associations a word acquires on account of the meanings of words which tend to occur in its environment. Each of language has its own principle in word collocation. For example, the word pretty often goes with girls and women, while the word handsome often goes with boys or men. Some translators do not realize this, which leads to wrong and funny collocation. For instance, in Vietnamese the word ung (drink) can go with many different kinds of liquid including water, beer, alcohol, medicine and even poison. However, in English these are clear distinction as follows: Drink beer/ water/ wine/ coffee. Take medicine/ poison. Another example indicates that in Vietnamese the word ni (say) can be collocated with li tm bit goodbye, li cho hi hello, di a lie, s tht the truth, ting Php French. However, in English it is quite different. Say hello/ goodbye/ yes/ no. Tell a lie/ the truth/ a story.

38 Speak English/ French/ Chinese. In Vietnamese, the word n can be collocated with many different nouns such as c(fish) chim ( bird), s- t (lion), gia sc (cattle). On the contrary, in English there are many words meaning n as follows. A flock of birds/ sheep: n chim/ cu A herd of cattle/ buffaloes: n gia sc/ tru A pack of dogs/ calves: n ch/ b A school of fish/ chickens: n c/ g A pride of lions/ deer : n s- t/ nai Similarly, the word decision can be collocated with many word such as to make/ to reach/ to arrive at/ to come to... a decision. The following examples show the wrong collocations of some translators: 1. Chnh ph tin thc hin nhiu bin php nhm ngn chn vic bun lu ma ty. (The government has made many measures to stop the drug smuggling.) 2. Chng ti phi hon thnh nhim v tr-c khi t kim tra cht l-ng sn phm. ( We have to complete our duty before the investigators control the product quality.) 3. Sau khi nghin cu th tr-ng, chng ti quyt nh -a ra th tr-ng mt sn phm gy n t-ng c sc cnh tranh vi hng ngoi nhp. (After making a market research, we decided to launch an impressive product which can compete against the imported ones.) 4. T khi M b lnh cm vn Vit Nam, nhiu n-c trn th gii x u t- vo cc lnh vc khc nhau. (Since the USA abolished the embargo against Vietnam many foreign countries have been investing in many different fields.) It is the mother tongue interference that leads to the mechanic collocation which is unacceptable in target language. In fact, each language has its own principles of word collocation. Neither English nor Vietnamese is an exception. As a result, the above-mentioned examples should be translated more accurately and idiomatically as follows. 1. The government has made many measures to stop the drug smuggling. should be corrected as The government has taken many measures to stop the drug smuggling. 2. We have to complete our duty before the investigators control the product quality. should be corrected We have to fulfill our duty before the investigators control the product quality.

39 3. After making a market research, we decided to launch an impressive product which can compete against the imported ones. should be corrected After doing a market research, we decided to launch an impressive product which can compete against the imported ones. 4. Since the USA abolished the embargo against Vietnam many foreign countries have been investing in many different fields. should be corrected Since the USA lifted the embargo against Vietnam many foreign countries have been investing in many different fields. In a word, it is inevitable for the translators to obey the principles of English and Vietnamese word collocations. In order to avoid this type of errors, the translator should read as many English books and magazines to take notes of collocated words under the English standard. 1.1.3 Misuse of personal pronouns and prepositions In Vietnamese, there are many ways to express the thoughts and feelings or attitude which differ from those in English. The social status, age, sex, and the family order are distinguished clearly and systematically. This is reflected in a distinguished clearly and systematically. This is reflected in a number of words for addressing such as c, ng, b, bc, c, ch, thm, d, d-ng, cu, anh, ch, ngi, qu v, my, em, .. such words are generally expressed by English people in one word you. The following examples show clearly that the translator sometimes do not master the relationship between the speaker and the hearer leading to a funny translation. A mother was taking care of her child in hospital. She said: I love you very much, dear. Which was translated as Em yu anh lm , c-ng . instead of M yu con lm, c-ng . In Vietnamese, each preposition has a fixed meaning which does not change regardless of the noun, adjective or verb proceeding it. On the contrary, the meaning of a preposition in English depends on its preceding word. This difference leads to errors in using prepositions of TL. For example, the Vietnamese preposition v can be expressed by different prepositions in English: a talk on history : be disappointed in : be interested in : lay emphasis/ stress on : be worried about : be proud of/ take pride in : be famous for : mt cuc ni chuyn v lch s tht vng v quan tm v nhn mnh v lo lng v t ho v ni ting v

instead of disappointed about, proud about, famous about as the translator may use. These are the typical errors made by the translators: 1. According to Mr Thien, his plant currently produces lubricants under the API (American Petroleum Institute) standards (Theo ng Thin th hin nay nh my ca ng ang sn xut du nhn d-i tiu chun ca

40 Vin xng du M.) 2. It is so easy to be misunderstood when talking on the phone. ( Ni chuyn trn din thoi th d b hiu nhm.) 3. Ta n Nhn Dn quyt nh kt n chng 15 nm v ti bun lu ma ty. (The Peoples Court decided to condemn them to 15 years imprisonment about the drug smuggling.) 4. L gio vin -u t trong nhiu nm, ng Nam c nhiu kinh nghim v vic ging dy hc sinh. (As a qualified teacher for many years, Mr.Nam is experienced about educating and teaching the pupils. 5. Chng ti thnh tht chia bun v vic ra i ca b bn. (We really condole with you about the loss of your father. As can be seen from the above-mentioned examples, the translators tended to choose the English prepositions basing on Vietnamese meanings without paying attention to their variations. These errors could be corrected as follows. 1. According to Mr Thien, his plant currently produces lubricants under the API ( American Petroleum Institute) standards should be translated (Theo ng Thin th hin nay nh my ca ng ang sn xut du nhn theo tiu chun ca Vin xng du M.) 2. It is so easy to be misunderstood when talking on the phone. is equivalent with (Ni chuyn qua in thoi th d b hiu nhm.) 3. Ta n Nhn Dn quyt nh kt n chng 15 nm v ti bun lu ma ty. should be translated (The Peoples Court decided to condemn them to 15 years imprisonment for the drug smuggling.) 4. L gio vin -u t trong nhiu nm, ng Nam c nhiu kinh nghim v vic ging dy hc sinh. should be translated (As a qualified teacher for many years, Mr Nam is experienced in educating and teaching the pupils. 5. Chng ti thnh tht chia bun v vic ra i ca b bn. should be translated (We really condole with you for the loss of your father. Due to the mother tongue interference, the translators found themselves in a confusing situation when they use prepositions n English. In order to avoid this type of errors the translators should learn the prepositions going with nouns, adjectives or verbs by heart. If they do not know how to use prepositions exactly, they tend to the Vietnamese ones into English or vice versa. As a result, the translators should be provided with as many structures with

41 prepositions systematically as possible to help them take notes and draw out the formation and rules. 1.1.4 Misuse of synonyms Some translators depend largely on the meaning in dictionary picking out the synonyms without paying much to the context. In fact, the pairs of synonyms share at least one sense in common but do not share all their senses. To some extent, they can hardly substitute for each other. The misuse of synonyms makes the meaning of one of the following sentences unacceptable. You have my deep/ profound sympathy.( acceptable) The river is deep.( acceptable) The river is very profound. (unacceptable) Another example shows that some translators do not realize the connotational meaning, which leads to the distorting of the meaning of the sentence. Take famous(ni ting) and notorious (kht ting) as an example. While famous means well-known/ celebrated, and therefore contains some features of positive meaning, notorious means well-known especially for unfavorable reason & negative meaning. The following can be seen as the misuse of the synonyms by some of the inexperienced translators. 1. Cu b ny rt b-ng bnh. (This boy is very stubborn/unyielding.) ( right) 2. Ng-i Vit Nam c tinh thn bt khut. (The Vietnamese people are really stubborn.) (wrong) 3. Chnh ph c k hoch xy hng ngn ngi nh cho ng-i v gia c-. (The government plans to build thousands of homes for homeless people.) ( wrong) In Example 1 stubborn synonymous to unyielding means cng u/b-ng bnh in Vietnamese. In Example 2 stubborn fails to evoke the features of positive meaning which praises the Vietnamese people on their heroism expressing the speakers admiration. In contrast, it expresses the speakers anger and discontent. In Example 3 home and house are places where one lives, meaning nh in Vietnamese. However, in terms of the connotational meaning they are quite different. House refers to the building or structure while home refers to the atmosphere or feeling found in the house. Example: - There is no place like home. (Chng c ni u nh- nh.) - Home is where the heart is. (Nh l ni con tim tr ng.)

42 Most of the synonyms have the same meaning in certain context. If a translator use synonyms without referring to the context,(s)he can make wrong & funny for his readers. In order to avoid the misuse, the translator should carefully take the synonyms into consideration before using them. In addition, it would be better for the translator to consider the differences of the pairs of synonyms when translating. 1.1.5 Idioms & terminologies The meanings of idioms are not definitely related to grammatical rules or the lexical meaning of each word because they feature the metaphor and figures of speech. For example, wet blanket should be translated ng-i ru r instead of ci chn -t or to read ones palm translated as xem ch tay instead of c ci g lng bn tay. In fact, idioms can be translated satisfactorily by considering the context, if not, it is difficult to find the exact meaning. An English idiom must be translated into Vietnamese by an equivalent one. It is very important to be aware that we must not choose the equivalents of every word forming the idiom but we do find the equivalent ways of expression which exist in both languages. If we stick to each word, the meaning becomes strange, unnatural and funny. For instance, to sell like a hot cake is usually translated as bn t nh- tm t-i. Instead of bn nh- bnh nng. There is no time like present. is usually translated as vic hm nay ch ngy mai instead of khng c thi gian nh- by gi. Live and learn is usually translated as cn sng cn hc instead of sng v hc. The following errors were found in some of the translated texts and should be corrected. 1. Every time, we have our childrens birth certificates signed at the local Peoples committee, we have to go though a lot of red tape. was translated as Mi khi nh h k giy khai sinh ti y ban nhn dn ph-ng, chng ti phi i qua nhiu bng . 2. At first we intended to stay at home. On the second thought, we decided to go out. was translated as Thot u chng ti c nh nh. Trong ln suy ngh th hai chng ti quyt nh i ra ngoi. 3. She rarely saves her time to do her homework. She often lets the grass grow under her feet. was translated as C y him khi tit kim thi gian lm bi tp nh. C th-ng c mc d-i chn. The above-mentioned translations could be improved as follows. 1. Every time, we have our childrens birth certificates signed at the local Peoples committee, we have to go though a lot of red tape. should be translated as Mi khi nh h k giy khai sinh ti y ban nhn dn ph-ng, chng ti phi lm nhiu th tc giy t r-m r. 2. At first we intended to stay at home. On the second thought, we decided to go out. should be translated as Thot u chng ti c nh nh. Sau khi suy i tnh li, chng ti quyt nh i ra ngoi.

43 3. She rarely saves her time to do her homework. She often lets the grass grow under her feet. should be translated as C y him khi tit kim thi gian lm bi tp nh. C th-ng n-c n chn mi nhy. In addition to this, due to the limited knowledge of social background and some special fields, some translators mistranslated the terminologies causing vagueness, inaccuracy to readers. It is not very easy for some translators to translate the following terminologies if they are not familiar with business texts. - cash flow: - insurance policy: - acknowledgement: - credit terms: - hard currency: - marginal: gi bn) - total working capital: - sales promotion campaign: l-u l-ng tin mt hp ng bo him giy bo cho bit nhn -c nhng iu khon tn dng ng tin mnh bin t chnh lch gia gi mua v

tng s vn l-u ng chin dch khuyn mi

In conclusion, some inexperienced translators committed the lexical errors mentioned above including those of context, word collocation, prepositions, synonyms and idioms & terminologies. They are committed by those who have little knowledge of both source language(SL) and target language (TG). At the same time, they thought that although English is different from Vietnamese, both languages have a one-to-one correlation of lexical items. In practice, in terms of translation, it can be chosen the only one appropriate equivalent from this into that language. Even more, that equivalent hardly keeps the meaning of the word itself but that of context. In some dictionaries, the authors present series of synonyms of SL in comparison with TL. However, the synonyms are those of the context in which the are operating . Another problem is that some translators did not realize the linking meaning of word units. It is obvious that these units link together to create a larger unit of meaning in a given text to be translated. The linking meaning itself does not exist in separate word units but in the link of the units constituting the whole text. 1.2. Structural Errors Each language has its own division of lexicon into classes such as nouns, verbs, adjectives, adverbs, etc. It is not always possible to translate a SL noun with a noun in TL. In English, there is a tendency of using more nominal structures while verbal structures are used more in Vietnamese. Some translators keep the same structures when translating, leading to vagueness in TL texts. For example, Thank you for your pretty present. was translated as Cm n anh v mn qu ng yu. instead of Cm n anh tng em mn qu ng yu. In addition, there is also a tendency of using more passive constructions in English than in Vietnamese. For instance, The USA is said to be a powerful country. was translated as:

44 M -c ni l mt c-ng quc. instead of Ng-i ta ni rng M l mt c-ng quc. The following examples of structural errors were made by some of translators. 1. The Vietnamese Airlines has coped with difficulties due to the regional financial crisis. ( Hng khng Vit Nam gp phi nhng kh khn do cuc khng hong ti chnh vng trm trng.) 2. Schools teach mathematics because of its very important roles. ( Tr-ng hc dy ton v tm quan trng ca n.) 3. Thank you for your letter. ( Cm n l th- ca em. 4. Hue was recognized as the worlds cultural heritage by UNESCO in 1994. ( Hu -c xem l di sn vn ha th gii bi UNESCO vo nm 1994.) 5. I was rewarded with a trip to Nha Trang by my parents after a year of hard work. (Ti -c th-ng mt chuyn i n Nha Trang bi b m ca ti sau mt nm lm vic vt v.) The above-mentioned translations do not sound Vietnamese, lacking the coherence and smoothness, not conveying the desired meaning of the SL sentences. It would be more idiomatic to translate as follows. 1. Do nh h-ng ca cuc khng hong ti chnh trm trng trong khu vc, nn Hng Hng Khng VN phi -ng u vi nhng kh khn. 2. Tr-ng hc dy ton v ton hc ng vai tr rt quan trng. 3. Cm n em vit th- cho em. 4. UNESCO cng nhn Hu l di sn vn ha th gii vo nm 1994. 5. Sau mt nm hc hnh chm ch, b m th-ng cho ti mt chuyn du lch n thnh ph Nha Trang.

As can be seen from the examples mentioned above, some translators focused on the structures of SL so much that they fail to convey all the implicit meaning of TL. In fact, it is not necessary to keep the form at all. The most important thing is that the translations must be done on the basis of the TL grammar that is familiar to the readers. This principle suggests that the translator should not depend largely on the structures of the SL but break them , conveying the meaning as much as possible in an appropriate structures in the TL. Another problem is that some translators was not aware of the relationship between form and function of language. It is commonly known that in some languages, on function is expressed by many forms and vice versa. For example, in English the way of giving an advice could be expressed by a number of structures : Why dont you..?, You should/ ought to.., If I were

45 you, Id.., Youd better or I advise you to.. In addition, some translators did not realize the conversational implicature understood implicitly as follows. 1. Whats the time? ( Why are you so late?) 2. Are you my teacher? ( You want to teach me.) 3, Why dont we go to the cinema? ( a suggestion) 4. Why did you say so? ( You should not have said so) 5. Unless he has done the work to my satisfaction, I will not pay him for this.(If he has not done.) Those sentences should be translated as follows. 1. C bit my gi ri khng? 2. My i lm thy ca tao ? 3. Chng ta i xem phim h? 4. L ra anh khng nn ni nh- vy! 5. Nu hn khng lm vic va ti , th ng hng ti tr l-ng cho hn.

As mentioned in the previous part, the structural difference between the SL and the TL is likely to make it difficult for the translators. The translators were not aware of dividing or combining the sentences within a text to be translated. If they try to keep the same punctuation of the SL text, the correspondent TL text will have clumsy, run-together, long and complex sentences. It is much better to divide long sentences into short ones aiming at creating coherence, attraction for readers in the translations. These are the translated sentences with their structural errors made by some of inexperienced translators. 1. The dividing gap between the rich and the poor as well as corruption and social unrest caused by the relocation of people in industrialized areas, have made many people hesitate in further changes. (Khong cch ln gia ng-i giu v ng-i ngho cng nh- s tham nhng v tnh trng bt an ca x hi gy ra do s phn b li dn c- cc khu cng nghip lm cho nhiu ng-i phi do d khi chp nhn nhng thay i ln.)

2. It is also necessary to invest in increasing capability of battery production establishments to meet the demand for automobile and motorbike manufacturing and assembling in accordance with the localization program.

46 ( N cng rt cn thit u t- vo vic tng nng sut ca nhng c s sn xut c qui p ng nhu cu dy chuyn sn xut vo vic ch to t v xe my ph hp vi ch-ng trnh trong n-c.)

3. It takes much time to deliver goods to remote areas by backward means of transport. (N ly nhiu thi gian phn phi hng ha n cc vng xa xi bng cc ph-ng tin giao thng lc hu.)

All above translated sentences should be corrected as follows. 1. The dividing gap between the rich and the poor as well as corruption and social unrest caused by the relocation of people in industrialized areas, have made many people hesitate in further changes. (S thay i ch ti cc vng cng nghip ha lm cho khong cch gia ng-i giu v ng-i ngho cng nh- s tham nhng v tnh trng bt an ca x hi ngy cng ln. Chnh iu ny lm cho nhiu ng-i phi min c-ng nhng thay i ln hn na.) 2. It is also necessary to invest in increasing capability of battery production establishments to meet the demand for automobile and motorbike manufacturing and assembling in accordance with the localization program. ( u t- vo vic tng nng sut ca nhng c s sn xut c qui p ng nhu cu dy chuyn sn xut vo vic ch to t v xe my ph hp vi ch-ng trnh trong n-c l rt cn thit.) 3. It takes much time to deliver goods to remote areas by backward means of transport. ( Phi mt nhiu thi gian phn phi hng ha n cc vng xa xi bng cc ph-ng tin giao thng lc hu.)

In order to overcome this type of structural errors, the most effective way for translators is to master the structures of bot languages. It is clear that a translator who is proficient in English cannot help being good at Vietnamese and vice versa.

2. STYLE ERRORS
Styles play an important role informal translation and strongly affect the second language meaning. Due to the context, text-type and audience, the levels of language in translation can be different - the informal language used in informal situations ; colloquials used in spoken language; familiar language used among friends, relatives, members in a family; formal

47 language used in formal texts such as speeches in conference, legal documents, business letter & documents, research papers. The examples given below clearly indicate that the same massage could be expressed in different styles.

48

1. Drop me a line. 2. Remember to write me a letter. 3. I look forward to your letter. 4. They can escape from family suprvision. 6. They are completely armed. 7. They are armed to teeth.

( informal language ) ( neutral) ( informal language ) ( formal) ( formal) ( colloquial)

5. Their parents cant keep an eye on them. (colloquial)

Style error is an acute problem to the translators. There are translators did not master the difference when using various styles such as conversational, academic, scientific, literary styles. Many translators failed when coming across the unfamiliar styles due to being unaware of degrees of formality (informal or formal style), usage of vocabulary ( informal, colloquial, formal) These are some style errors taken out from some Vietnamese- English translations. 1. Nu chng ti t hng vi s l-ng ln, liu doanh nghip anh c bn vi gi r khng? (If we place substantial orders, can your enterprise get us with soft price?) It is impossible to use informal style in a business letter. Instead of using soft price , the translator should use cheaper price. 2. Thi tit Hu khng thch hp cho ng-i gi. Ma h tri nng nh- thiu t, trong khi ma ng lnh n x-ng ty. (The weather in Hue is favorable for the old. It is burning hot in summer while it chills to the bones in winter.) It is impossible to use informal style to tanslate a formal text. Instead of using burning hot , the translator should use exceedingly hot.

3. CULTURAL ERRORS
Culture could be understood as the total set of beliefs, attitude, customs, behaviour, social habits etc. of the member of a particular society. In the broad sense, it includes mode of production, production activities, community organization, spiritural life, knowledge of nature and society, emotions, and moral conceptions. Language is regarded as both a component of a culture and network through which other elements of culture operate. Language , therefore uses almost all other cultural elements so as to perfect its universal and self-sufficient nature. It could be said that we will not translate from this to that language perfectly unless we know its relation to its culture. It is common ly known that ao dai is a traditional costume of the Vietnamese women and we never find an equivalent word in English to translate ao dai. However, some translators translated mechanically ao dai into a dress. How funny it is! It would be preferredcto

49 writing down ao dai to express the cultural feature to making foreign people misunderstand ao dai asa dress. * Trang phc truyn thng ca ng-i ph n Vit Nam l chic o di t-ng tr-ng cho s duyn dng. should be translated as The traditional costume of the Vietnamese women is ao dai which symbolises the grace. Translation is a kind of activity which inevitably involves at least two languages and two cultural traditions." As this statement implies, translators are permanently faced with the problem of how to treat the cultural aspects implicit in a source text (ST) and of finding the most appropriate technique of successfully conveying these aspects in the target language (TL). These problems may vary in scope depending on the cultural and linguistic gap between the two (or more) languages concerned. The cultural implications for translation may take several forms ranging from lexical content and syntax to ideologies and ways of life in a given culture. The translator also has to decide on the importance given to certain cultural aspects and to what extent it is necessary or desirable to translate them into the TL. The aims of the ST will also have implications for translation as well as the intended readership for both the ST and the target text (TT). Considering the cultural implications for a translated text implies recognising all of these problems and taking into account several possibilities before deciding on the solution which appears the most appropriate in each specific case. Before applying these methods to the chosen text, this essay will examine the importance of culture in translation through a literature review. The different general procedures of treating the cultural implications for translation will be examined as well as analysing the ST and the aims of the author. The translation process will also be treated using specific examples found in the ST before discussing the success of aforementioned theoretical methods applied to the TT. Although corresponding to cultural categories examined, the title will be considered separately in order to determine the pertinence of conserving, highlighting, or excluding certain aspects. Due to these considerations, the title will be considered after the other aspects as all other cultural implications need to be examined before reaching relevant conclusions.

50

CHAPTER 2:
ASSIGNMENT 1:
I.THEORY:

ASSIGNMENTS

1. What is translation? What definition do you think is the most appropriate? Can you give your own definition of translation? 2. What is an idiomatic translation? Give some examples of idiomatic translations. 3. What are the secondary meanings? Give ten sentences, each of which contains a word used in a secondary sense. 4. What is the primary meaning? Give ten sentences, each of which contains a word used in a primary sense.

II. EXERCISES:
A. Identify change of meaning versus change of form. Some of the following pairs of sentences differ in their form. Some differ in meaning. Indicate if the primary change is in the form or in the meaning. Example: They robbed the old man. The old man was dropped by them. Answer: Change of form 1. The students like to study translation. The students like studying translation. 2. He saw the bird. He heard the cat. 3. Go to bed. I want you to go to bed. 4. I came; I saw; I conquered. I came, saw, and conquered. 5. The young man had an English grammar book stolen. An English grammar book was stolen from the young man. B. List as many grammatical forms as you can which realize the same meaning as the one given below. Then put the same meaning into a language other than English in as many forms as you can.

51 Example: The cat is black The black cat The cat, which is black 1. The water jug 2. John bought a car 3. A hot day 4. Mothers long blue dress 5. Peters house C. All of the following have the same grammatical form. With the change of lexical items, there is a change of meaning which is signaled by that lexical item, apart from the referential meaning of the word itself. What meaning is signaled in each of the following possessive phrases? Answer by restating. How can that meaning best be expressed in another language which you speak? Example: The mans car - the man owns the car The mans eye - the eye is part of the man 1. The doctors office 2. The doctors patient 3. The doctors book 4. The doctors brother 5. The doctors hand 6. The doctors house D. For each pair of sentences, state whether the two sentences are 1. the same in meaning or 2. different in meaning. 1. (a) It rained all night. (b) Rain fell all night. 2. (a) There is a book on the table. (b) There is a table on the book. 3. (a) John was very surprised when he heard the news. (b) The news very much amazed John when he heard it. 4. (a) It was a hot day. (b) The day was hot. 5. (a) Peters house (b) The house that belongs to Peter

52 6. (a) He remained silent. (b) He did not say anything. 7. (a) I bought cloth to make Mary a new dress. (b) I bought a new dress for Mary. 8. (a) My parents are well. (b) My mother and father are well. 9. (a) John is ill: he has a bad case of malaria. (b) John is very ill indeed. E. Translate the following sentences into English. 1. Ch may o s mi ny u vy? 2. Lt chim c mt vng t rng trn cao nguyn Lm Vin, xung quanh ton l ni i hng v. 3. Mc d a v ca ph n c nhng b-c tin k diu, nh-ng ng-i ta phi thc hin nhiu chuyn khc ci thin tnh trng sc kho, dinh d-ng v gio dc cho ph n. 4. Ngy nay th gii ang -ong u vi nhiu vn nghim trng cho d c nhiu b-c tin ng k trong lnh vc khoa hc, cng ngh v tri thc. Mt trong nhng vn l s bng n dn s, c bit cc n-c ang pht trin. Dn s ang tng theo cp s nhn trong lc sn xut hng ho li tng theo cp s cng. 5. Charles Dickens l mt trong nhng nh vit tiu thuyt ln nht th gii, thuc tr-ng phi hin thc ph phn th k 19. iu m chng ta nh gi cao v nhng tc phm ca Dickens l s ph phn v ti c v s t-ng phn gia giu v ngho ca x hi t- sn Anh lc by gi. Th gii m ng ta miu t l th gii ca giai cp trung l-u v h l-u Lun n.

ASSIGNMENT 2:
I.THEORY:
1. What are the differences between a literal translation and an idiomatic translation? 2. What grammatical features should be considered when you translate a text? Give some examples to support your ideas.

II. EXERCISES:
A. In each of the following pairs of sentences, which is more idiomatic English, a or b? How would the meaning be expressed idiomatically in the language you speak? 1. (a) The storekeeper said that we will refund your money. (b)The storekeeper promised to refund our money. 2. (a) A certain boy told me this little story at a party. (b) He is one boy. He told the one little story. This is a game he said.

53 3. (a) An International Alphabet would inevitably bring about a spelling reform as well. How many children have shed hot tears about spelling? (b) An International Alphabet would inevitably bring about a spelling reform,too. And how many hot childrens tears have not been shed on spelling? 4. (a) He then reported his misfortune to the police, who are searching diligently for the thief. (b) He then his mishap reported to the police, who are the thief searching intensively. B. Look for literalisms in the following translations into English and underline the words or phrases that do not sound natural in English. Suggest a more idiomatic way of saying it. All of these examples are from published translated material. 1. Foreign tourists usually at Kinh Do Hotel for their friends have introduced to them very much about this hotel. 2. Since the USA abolished the embargo against Vietnam, many foreign countries have been investing in Vietnam. 3. Hue is famous about its delicious dishes and beautiful landscapes. 4. The participants discussed about the causes of pollution environment. 5 . A robbery took place of a motorcycle rider at Kampung early yesterday morning. C. Each of the following are sentences written by some Vietnamese who are not yet fluent English speakers. The forms used shows examples of how their mother-tongue language structures have been carried over into English. The same information is then given in parenthesis in idiomatic English. What changes were made in correcting the English? These changes point out some of the differences between Vietnamese and English. 1. Sir, the problems of before dont forget. ( Sir, please dont forget the problems we discussed before.) 2. If there is any means, send me a letter to Saigon. (If there is any way to do so, send a letter to me in Saigon.) 3. I will think you time to time day and day. ( I will be thinking about you often every day.) 4. I am very grateful to inform you with this letter. ( I am very happy to be able to send/write you this letter.) 5. I am a man who has been to Hanoi for 12 years. ( I have now lived in Hanoi for 12 years.) D. Translate the following sentences into Englisgh. 1. Thc M l cng trnh thu in c cng sut thit k 150.000 Kw, sn l-ng in trung bnh hng nm 600 triu Kw gi.

54 2. xy dng cng trnh ny cn phi o p gn 15 triu m3 t , p hn 350.000 mt khi tng lc, khong 220.000 mt khi b tng ct thp v lp t gn 7.000 tn thit b v kt cu kim loi. 3. Vi khi l-ng cng vic ln nh- vy, nh-ng chnh ph quyt nh phi hon thnh vic thi cng trong hai nm do nhu cu cung cp in cho cc a ph-ng pha Nam tr nn ht sc cp bch. 4. T ngy khi cng n nay, cc n v thi cng thc hin -c khong 90% khi l-ng o t, khong 40% khi l-ng b cng ct thp. 5. Theo ng Nguyn B Mn, Tr-ng ban Qun l cng trnh, th hu ht cc hng mc cn bn u t ng yu cn v tin thi cng. 6. Trung tun thng 11/1993, Th t-ng V Vn Kit n kim tra tnh hnh thi cng cng trnh thu in thc M. 7. Nhng ng-i lnh o cng trnh khng nh vi Th t-ng rng c y c s m bo khi ng t my s 1 vo thng 6 nm 1994. 8. Vic chn dng sng B tin hnh vo thng 12 ny. 9. Nh- vy s c mt s trng hp c ngha l cng mt thi im vi vic khi ng t my s 1 thu in thc M, h thng ti in 500 Kw Bc Nam cng -c hon thnh. 10. Vi cc cng trnh ny, nm 1994, min Nam thot khi tnh trng i in. E. Translate the following sentences into Vietnamese 1. Although the state budget for teaching aids at schools of all levels has been icreased since 1990, it is still far below the demand to fully equip schools and improve training quality. 2. President Putin affirmed that Russia has always attacted importance to its relations with Vietnam, its traditional friend and stragic partner in Southeast Asia. 3. It is projected to extend integration opportunities to 3000 disabled children in three provinces, one in mountainous areas, one in the central coast and one in remote areas. 4. They discussed a series of measures intended to ensure comprehensive cooperation in economy, trade, science and technology. 5. Efforts are being made to raise womens awareness of their rights to have labour safety or hygiene conditions at work through an expanded communication network. 6. It is more likely that schools in the southern provinces have more computer labs used in teaching foreign languages than schools in the northern provinces. 7. There have been four foreign invested projects in education, with investment capital from the World Bank and the Asian Development Bank.

55 8. Of 50 foreign language students surveyed recently by the Vietnam Courier, 38 said they are not interested in working for foreign invested companies. 9. Vietnam and China agreed to set up negotiations for the signing of a land border agreement delineating the sea boundary in the Bac Bo ( Tonkin ) Gulf no later than 2000. 10. Most recently the government has offered incentives like tax reduction or preferential loans to employers who have employed a large number of women.

56

ASSIGNMENT 3:
I. THEORY:
1. What lexical features should be considered when you translate a text? Give some examples to support your ideas. 2. Why do you have to take the time to read the source language text carefully before translating it?

II. EXERCISES:
A. Translate the following sentences into English. 1. Ngay t nhng ngy u thng Chp ( m lch) Tt lng vng vng ngoi thnh H Ni. 2. C l b con nng dn ngoi thnh l ng-i cm nhn thy Tt hn ai ht bi t vic vun xi rau qu, c hoa cho vic v bo ln, g u nhm phc v tt. 3. Nu i t pha Kinh Bc xung, ta s nhn thy bt ngn hoa xun, nht l layn khoe sc mu. 4. St vi vng Ni Thnh l vng hoa Nht Tn , Nghi Tm, Qung B vi nhiu loi : o hng thm, qut vng mng, tim tm vilt v rc hoa ng tin. 5. Vi ba nm tr v tr-c, ni y l rng hoa, p ng nhu cu ca ng-i H Ni v hoa cnh. 6. B con vng ny l nhng ngh nhn c truyn thng trng hoa lu i. 7. Tic thay, t trng hoa hin nay b thu hp dn do s chuyn h-ng lm n ca khng t ngh nhn. 8. Ng-i th bn t b ngh, ng-i th t b vn hoc l lin kt vi ng-i b vn hn hp xy dng cc bit th sang trng dng lm khch sn mi ni phc v khch n-c. 9. Ca hng, ca hiu mc ln nh- nm loi hng ho t bnh dn n cao cp. 10. Chng cn nghi ng g na, H Ni thi m ca ang i thay, ang pht trin. Mong sao H ni v ng-i H Ni mi mi xng danh vi mnh t ngn nm vn hin. B. Translate the following sentences into Vietnamese. 1. The centerpiece of the festivities was a show entitled A Flock of Birds to Good Land staged simultaneously on the three different grand stages in the downtown area. 2. The whole area around the temple was virtually packed with people, leaving only a small opening for the rituals to proceed. 3. To reduce the costs while increasing accessibility of education for disabled children, the government has launched a program of community-based education and integration.

57 4. In recent years, to restore public order, Hanoi removed a number of unofficial marketplaces into designated areas. But out of the four marketplaces targeted, only Dong Tam market was moved from the Dong Da residential quarter to the Dai La area. 5. Besides the investment from the State budget, all the schools had to look for other financial sources to buy teaching equipment. However, these sources made up only 13% and 21% of the state budget for general education schools and universities respectively. 6. State budget revenues have approximately achieved the level originally set. Regular expenditure has been ensured, while irregular spending in support of area hit by storms, floods and droughts have been made. The budget deficit has been kept at a permissible level of 3.6% of GDP in 1998, down from 4.2% in 1997. 7. The economic development of Vietnam has to be viewed in the context of long periods of wars. It is the context of long periods of wars that has caused loss of peoples lives and damage to property, public facilities and resources. 8. The television network is being established throughout the country. Apart from the relatively modern and long-standing television stations in Hanoi and Ho Chi Minh City, 25 provincial stations were set up in 1988. These relay the important transmissions of the central TV stations and broadcast their own program. 9. The Vietnams Women Union is represented in the National Assembly and its president is entitled to attend the regular meeting of The Council of Ministers where she can express the Women Unions view-points and propose the regulations related to the Union. 10. The Vietnamese families have been affected by the agricultural civilization. Due to the open-door policy, the industrial civilization has exerted a daily and hourly effect on the life of Vietnamese families.

ASSIGNMENT 4:
I. THEORY:
1. Name and discuss the four Ts of a translation project. 2. Explain what is meant by exegesis.

II. EXERCISES:
A. Read the English text and answer the questions.

Deforestation
Population growth is one factor in rainforest destruction. However, it is a myth to assume that the expansion of subsistence agriculture to feed more mouths is the main factor. The majority of deforestation in Latin America, South-east Asia and the Pacific is caused by clearing land to grow cash crops for export and by commercial logging operations, and not by shifting cultivators or landless peasants. Each year commercial logging eliminates 45000 square kilometers of forest, much of the timber being exported to the United States and Japan. No clearer connection between deforestation and the demands of affluent societies can be found than in Central America and Brazil, where tropical forest has been converted to grazing

58 land because cattle raising offers export earnings that help with external debt payments. These heavy payments, which affect the poor the most, have arisen largely from external loans taken out to finance the purchase of luxury items and arms by military and governing elite. The establishment of large ranch-style cattle grazing properties is the principal reason for the elimination of 20000 square kilometers of rainforest each year in Central or South America. The cleared land is mainly devoted to the export of beef for the fast-food industries in North America, Europe and Japan- the aptly named hamburger connection. 1. What is the authors purpose of writing this text? 2. What is the text about? 3. How many times have you read the text to understand it completely? 4. Do you have any difficulty in finding the Vietnamese meaning of the English words : subsistence agriculture, cash crops, commercial logging operations, shifting cultivators, landless peasants, affluent society, external debt payment, military and governing elites, ranch-style cattle grazing property, hamburger connection ? 5. Do you have any difficulty in finding the equivalent Vietnamese structures of the following English sentences? a. However, it is a myth to assume that the expansion of subsistence agriculture to feed more mouths is the main factor. b. No clearer connection between deforestation and the demands of affluent societies can be found than in Central America and Brazil, where tropical forest has been converted to grazing land because cattle raising offers export earnings that help with external debt payments. 6. Translate the text into Vietnamese. B. Read the Vietnamese text and answer the questions.

NON NC
Cha ng ta ung n-c sng Hng, Sng , Sng Cu Long v tng sng cht vi sng n-c ny. Cc bn th ngh xem rt t ngn ng trn th gii li c s thng nht nh- ting m ca chng ta. Vit Nam th n-c( trong sng, h, bin.) li ng ngha, ng m vi n-c trong ngha t quc qu h-ng. Sng n-c v con ng-i y kt hp vi thin nhin v lch s nh- mt khi bt t bt dit bi mt th xi mng tr-ng tn. l lng yu n-c th-ng ni ca dn tc Vit Nam. Trn th gii, c nhiu quc gia t tnh n sang tnh kia ni l khng hiu nhau ri. Nh-ng Vit Nam, d bt k u, ng-i Nam k Bc, h gp nhau ln u ni l hiu nhau ngay.

1. What is the authors purpose of writing this text? 2. What is the text about? 3. How many times have you read the text to understand it completely?

59 4. Do you have any difficulty in finding the English meaning of the Vietnamese words : cha ng, sng cht, s thng nht, kt hp cht ch, xi mng tr-ng tn, lng yu n-c th-ng ni, hiu nhau? 5. Do you have any difficulty in finding the equivalent English structures of the following Vietnamese sentences? a. Cc bn th ngh xem rt t ngn ng trn th gii li c s thng nht nh- ting m ca chng ta. b.Nh-ng Vit Nam, d bt k u, ng-i Nam k Bc, h gp nhau ln u ni l hiu nhau ngay. 6. Translate the text into English.

ASSIGNMENT 5:
I. THEORY:
1. What are the goals of the translator as he prepares the initial draft? 2. What is the purpose of the evaluation? 3. What kinds of evaluation checks can be made?

II. EXERSISES:
A. Translate the following sentences into Vietnamese. 1. In the human history, science has been seen as having a mission to liberate people from ignorance and superstition, to lessen human misery, and to increase human understanding of the world. 2. The News Atlantic hailed the scientists of the time as merchants of light who would penetrate the darkness and open the way to mans control over nature. At that time, utopian invetions such as aircrafts, submarines, and telephones were foreseen. 3. People involved in the computer industry believe we are experiencing a computer revolution. Why is this revolution occuring? What will be its social consequences? To answer these questions , it is necessary to consider briefly the history of computers. 4. The forerunner of modern computer goes back some 5000 years to the first calculating machine invented by the Chinese- the abacus. Until the 17th century, Europe had nothing to rival the abacus for speed and accuracy of calculation. 5. Computers were developed simultaneously in Germany, England and the USA to aid the speedy and accurate calculations necessary to decode the enemys messages during the Second World War. 6. Many of the jobs now being performed by people in the manufacturing and service sectors of our economy can be done faster and more cheaply by modern computers or electronic devices controlled by computers. 7. Robot machines are replacing assembly line workers in manufacturing. They have already done so in the Fiat car factory in Italy and the Nissan car plant in Japan. By 1980, 50 robots were in use in Australia by companies such as General Motors, Ford, Nissan and Simpson Pope.

60 8. Firms that do not adopt the new computer technology are enable to compete with their cheaper electronic rivals. Such has been the fate of the $200 million a year Swiss watch industry, which was wiped out by electronic watches in a couple of years. 9. With the mechanization of some work processes, the new factories initially resulted in large-scale structural unemployment. Previously, much sought-after, skilled, cottage industry artisans suddenly found themselves redundant and de-skilled by the new technology. 10. The heroic image of science grew through the 18th and 19th centuries. The Industrial Revolution, which started in England in the late 18th century, strongly reinforced faith in a technological society, although the social costs and benefits were far from equal share. B. Translate the following sentences into English. 1. Vnh Dung Qut nm pha ng bc huyn Bnh Sn, tnh Qung Ngi. Vnh c chiu di 18 km v -c che ch kn o bi cc dy ni t nhin. 2. B pha nam vnh l mt vng t bng phng, c kt cu a l n nh vi din tch hng chc cy s vung. 3. Ni y s hnh thnh cc khu cng nghip nng v ho cht, nh my lc du, khu ch bin hi sn, khu ch bin nng sn, khu cng nghip nh v mt khu dn c- th hin i vi khong 60 vn dn. 4. Mt diu kin thun li na l Dung Qut nm cch -ng -ng st, -ng ti in v cp quang xuyn Vit khong 12 Vic cung cp n-c ngt cho khu ny l ht sc thun li tr l-ng l 3 t mt khi /nm, vi ngun n-c t sng Bng. b, km. vi Tr

5. Ngy nay chng ta ang tri qua mt cuc bin i x hi rt su sc nh- s thay i trong cuc cch mng cng nghip ln th nht. Do vy, vic nh ngha li khi nim vic lm c l l cn thit.

ASSIGNMENT 6:
I.THEORY:
1. Name some kinds of errors that a translator could make when he/she translates a text. 2. Why does a translator often make structural and lexical errors when he/she translates a text? 3. Give some examples of errors in word collocation that a translator could make when he/she translate a text.

II. EXERCISES:
A. Translate the following sentences into English. 1. Do ph sa bi p ca dng sng Cu Long lam phong ph va la y p ny, t-ng tr-ng cho ngun l-ng thc ca c

61 n-c cng nh- phong cch sinh hot k cn sng n-c ca c- dn trong vng. 2. T nhng dng sng rng ln n nhng m-ng rch mnh mai ch tin cho nhng chic thuyn nh b ra v, Sng Cu Long cho ta mt cnh quan honh trng khi n chy vo Vit Nam, trm cui cng ca hnh trnh 4500km ni ca ng bin ng. 3. iu ng qu l kiu bo lun h-ng v t quc, gn b vi gia nh qu h-ng, t n-c, yu qu v gi gn bn sc vn ho v hun c nn tnh cch con ng-i Vit Nam. 4. Ngoi vic gip ng-i thn n-c nh, nhiu kiu bo cn ng gp xy dng qu h-ng, h-ng ng vic cu tr nhng ni trong n-c b thin tai v tham gia cc vic ngha vi truyn thng nhiu iu ph ly gi g-ng. 5. Tr-c nm 1988, nh h-ng ca h thng ngn hng i vi s pht trin v qun l kinh t v m l khng ng k. khuyn khch h thng ngn hng hot ng c mc ch hn, chnh ph ra cc bin php mi bao gm t chc li h thng ngn hng, -a vo cc chnh sch tn dng hn nh, chnh sch mi v li sut v cho php t do bun bn vng trn th tr-ng. 6. Chnh ph xc tin mt cuc ti thit ton din v l-ng bng ca cng nhn vin nh n-c bng cch chnh n li nhng khon bao cp cho ng-i tiu dng trn danh ngha hoch nh li ch l-ng. Mc d mc l-ng ti thiu hng thng tng, nh-ngl-ng thc t vn gim xung ng k do lm pht. 7. Cuc iu tra do hi ph n Vit Nam tin hnh cho thy rng nhng ph-ng php trnh thai truyn thng ang -c p dng rng ri. Cuc iu tra cho thy rng 39% ph n c gia nh dng ph-ng php hin i, ph-ng php th-ng dng nht l t vng trnh thai B. Translate the following sentences into Vietnamese 1.The nuclear energy proponents also pressed the theme that it was inevitable that the world would increasingly go nuclear. It is suggested that the opponents were standing against the tide of history and were akin to the Luddites at the beginning of the Industrial Revolution, who broke machines. 2. Doctors have shown for the first time they can rebuild the immune systems of people infected with the AIDS virus, dramatically increasing the blood cells that HIV destroys. 3. In the field of medicine training, what was done in the past years has been remarked by distinguished fact that many specialists and medical colleges in different countries set forth the necessity for reconsidering training subjects for health workers. 4. Today, the physicians should be considered as men of health. Hence, the responsibility of the physicians is to know how to discover, cure, and rehabilitate the health of the individuals and the community.

62 5. It is obvious that a healthy body helps a sound mind because it is the sound minds that direct the orientation of the values systems. A healthy man should be healthy not only physically but also mentally. 6. Nowadays people are inclined to worry too much about their physical health. However, I would like to lay stress on the importance of psychological health. Being mentally healthy is very important, and a truly healthy man is one who can enjoy the proper equilibrium between his body and mind.

ASSIGNMENT 7:
Translate the following texts into English 1.Nhng thnh tu ca qu trnh i mi trong thp nin va qua to ra nhng c hi cho ph n t -c mc ch ca mnh. Cuc sng ca ph n -c ci thin v ph n bt nhc nhn hn. Cc dch v x hi gip ph n bt nhc nhn trong cng vic nh v to Iu kin cho ph n tham gia vo cc hot ng x hi . 2. Hi ph n Vit nam I din cho ph n Vit Nam trong c n-c i mi t chc v cch lm vic v vy thu ht ngy cng nhiu ph n tham gia vo cng tc x hi. H ph n gip cho ph n gii quyt nhng kh khn trong cuc sng hng ngy. Hi cng trnh ln nh n-c nhng iu lut v chnh sch nhm pht huy mi tim nng ca ph n trong tin trnh i mi. 3.Nhn ra nhng nhn t to nn vic hc ngoi ng nhanh v hiu qu ngy cng tr nn quan trng v a s ng-i hc l ng-i ln rt lo lng khi hc mt ngoi ng chuyn ngnh s dng trong th-ng mi,nghin cu v ngoI giao. Nhu cu hc mt ngai ng c hiu qu cn -c xem xt theo kha cnh ng-i hc, ng-i dy v ch-ng trnh ging dy. 4.Sc hp dn ln nht i vi du khch l bn sc vn ha ca dn tc Vit Nam. Hng nghn di tch lch s, di tch cch mng -c nh n-c xp hng, trong hng trm di tch c gi tr lch s v ngh thut cao. Vit Nam l mt cng ng ca 54 dn tc vi nhiu phong tc, tp qun, vn ha ngh thut dn gian c sc. S hin din ca hng trm lng ngh truyn thng sn xut ra hng nghn loi sn phm th cng m ngh ni ting. 5. Nu du khch n vi cc vng dn tc thiu s th cn c th tham d vo nhng sinh hot vn ha k th ca vng ni rng nhit i. Mt l hi m tru chng hn. S phi c mt tr-c l hi hng tun cng ng-i dn i tm tre sa nh rng, lm cy nu xua ui ma qu. Trong nhng ngy du khch cn -c quan st cch chn cc v r-u cn v nht l vic chn tru m.

63 6. Phc li x hi l chnh sch x hi ln ca Vit Nam da trn truyn thng t-ng thn t-ng i gip ln nhau c t ngn x-a. Nguyn tc c bn ca chnh sch ny l kt hp trch nhim ca nh n-c, ca cng ng v mi c nhn t v-n ln ha nhp vI x h. Chnh sch ny ang tng b-c m ra cho mi i t-ng vi nhiu hnh thc khc nhau. 7. S lc hu v nguy c tt hu hn v kinh t ang l ni trn tr canh cnh trong lng mi ng-i Vit Nam trong n-c cng nh- ang sinh sng n-c ngoi. Nu tt hu xa hn c ngha l rI vo s phn ca mt n-c cung cp nguyn liu v nhn cng trong s phn cng lao ng quc t, chu lp v , thua thit trong hp tc cnh tranh. thc l mt thch thc ln i vi dn tc Vit Nam trong bi cnh quc t ngy nay. 8. Bn cht nhn vn ca tr-ng phi ngoi giao Vit Nam l mt nt c th. Mc d l nn nhn ca bit bao nhiu cuc xm l-c, nh-ng ng-i Vit Nam khng bao gi mt I lng nhn i. Hn th na , chnh lng nhn I l nhn t to nn sc mnhca dn tc v nn ngoI giao Vit Nam. Nguyn TrI , ng-i anh hng dn tc ca th k 15 lI ph-ng chm l-u truyn cho mI n hm nay : Ly I ngha thng hung tn, Ly ch nhn thay c-ng bo.

ASSIGNMENT 8:
Translate the following text into English C l Bc Kinh l ni tp trung quyn lc chnh tr nh-ng Th-ng Hi cng c quyn t ho l mt th th-ng mi. Bc Kinh c l l ni tp trung quyn lc chnh tr nh-ng danh hiu mt th th-ng mi li thuc v Th-ng Hi. Nhng a im lch s ch mi c t gn 80 nm tr-c Th-ng Hi, tuy th hu ht du khch u b chinh phc tr-c v quyn r ca thnh ph c bit ny, ni m mi tr-ng l tt c. Ch ring ci tn Th-ng Hi cng dy nn mt ln sng nh nim thch th v tn. Th-ng Hi vn l mt thnh ph nh chuyn ngh nh c v dt mi cho n na th k 19 khi n bt u pht trin nh- mt trung tm cng nghip v th-ng mi. Nhng ng-i ch hng bun v cc ng c vin chnh tr t khp ni trn th gii v y v pht trin n thnh mt trong nhng thnh ph quc t snh iu nht th gii. T nhng nm 1920 tr i, n tr nn ngy cng tai ting nh- l mt ni m bt c vic g cng c th xy ra. Cc ngn hng v cc cng ty th-ng mi loi t xy dng cho h nhng tr s chnh sang trng trng ra ni m sau l nhng cnh ng la mnh mng tri di hai b sng Hong Ph.

64 Ton b di t ny vn cn tn ti sau nhng thi k san bng t v ngy nay n lm nn mt bo tng m c o v kin trc ca nhng nm 1930. Mt cuc tn b dc b l khng th thiu i vi nhng ai n thm ni y, / Du khch khng th b qua mt cuc tn b dc b khi n thm ni y, ni m vn -c nhiu ng-i cng nhn l thnh ph trng im ca Trung Quc. Nhng to nh chc tri, bao gm mt vi to nh cao nht th gii mc ln chnh ni m x-a kia la tng mc. im ni bt nht l thp truyn hnh Hn Ngc Vin ng - nu thi gian cho php, mt ci nhn ton cnh t nhng tng cao ca thp s l mt k nim kh qun. D-i s nh-ng b ca ng-i Php tr-c y, tng on qu kh nh- vn cn hin hu u trong nhng bit th tao nh v nhng con -ng rp bng cy. Vng qua gc , khch sn Ho Bnh v ban nhc Jazz ng knh ca n l nhng chng tch ni ting ca mt thi k ho hip. Nh-ng Th-ng Hi cng cn c nhiu khch sn tuyt vi khc t nhng nm 1930, phn ln ang -c phc hi nhng nt ng yu t thi hong kim tr-c y ca chng. Th-ng Hi s hu mt trong nhng bo tng tht s ln ca th gii, -c m ca vo nm 1996. Trong mt thi gian ngn khng th tham quan ht to nh gi tr ny -c, nh-ng thm ch ch cn mt gi trong nhng phng tr-ng by ng, iu khc v gm cng em li nhng k nim kh phai.

ASSIGNMENT 9:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese In a keynote speech at H Ni National University (HNU) yesterday, leader Jiang urged the youth of Vietnam and China to work for strengthening the friendship between the two countries and contribute to peace and development in Asia and the world. A bright future will be created by you, the young people, and the future belongs to you, the Chinese General Secretary and State President told the students. Jiang stressed that a better future awaited China-Vietnam relations in the 21st century, and joint efforts by the youth of both countries cannot be separated from this. The younger generation in both our countries must stick to their ideals and work tirelessly for socialism, he said.

65 The youth of China and Vietnam need to inherit and bring into full play the revolutionary spirit of their elders, to be persistent in ideology, study hard, to strive for the cause of developing socialism, and for the wealth and prosperity of their respective motherlands, he said. He expressed his hope that the Chinese and Vietnamese young people will cherish, maintain and promote China-Vietnam relations, have more exchanges and learn from each other to enhance mutual understanding. He pledged that the Chinese party and Government would fully back such exchanges. In history, both Vietnam and China have suffered invasion by the imperialists but we both successfully fought off the imperialists, liberated our peoples and unified our countries, said Jiang. He said that the friendship between Vietnam and China derives not only from history but also the fact, as noted by H Ch Minh, that the two peoples are comrades and brothers. The foundation of China-Vietnam ties was mutual trust, long-term stability, the pre-condition, and friendly neighborliness, the guarantee, he said. Comprehensive co-operation is the bridge and the target a prosperous future, he added. Jiang left Hanoi yesterday Central Vietnam where he toured the ancient imperial capital of Hu, recognized by the UNESCO as a World Heritage Site, and met with leaders of the port city of Nng. He is scheduled to visit the ancient port town of Hi An and the Ho Th Textile Company before concluding his three-day visit to Vit Nam.

ASSIGNMENT 10:
Translate the following text into English i vi mt t nc cn nhiu kh khn nh chng ta, th vn tit kim chng lng ph phi lun c coi l quc sch. Nhng trong thc t, nhng nm qua khp ni, vn cn trn lan nhng hin tng lng ph. No l lng ph trong qun l, s dng ngn sch, lng ph trong u t xy dng c bn, lng ph trong qun l t ai, tr s lm vic, lng ph trong lnh vc doanh nghip Nh nc v ri lng ph cn len li trong dn chng vi nhng th tc ci xin y tn km Lng ph thc s v ang l vn bc xc ca x hi, l mt trong nhng nguyn nhn gy nh hng ln ti nn kinh t ca t nc. Bi v trong nm u (1998) sau khi c php

66 lnh thc hnh tit kim, chng lng ph c U Ban thng v Quc Hi kha X thng qua ngy 26-02-1998 v c hiu lc thi hnh t ngy 1-5-1998, qua s liu bo co ca 12 B, c quan ngang B, s chi thc nm 1998 gim so vi quyt ton nm 1997, c th nh: Hi ngh ph: 12,8 t ng; cng tc ph: 12,43 t ng, chi ph in thoi, fax: 9,57 t ng; chi ph sa cha ln TSC: 80,94 t ng; chi mua sm ti sn c nh phc v chuyn mn nghip v: 153,7 t ng. D ton NSNN nm 1999 tip tc thc hin tit kim 10% d ton chi thng xuyn. Mt s khon chi thng xuyn gim mnh t 30% n 70% nh chi mua sm thit b lm vic, chi hi ngh l tn Nhng s liu gim chi trong khi thc hin Php lnh thc hnh tit kim chng lng ph thi gian qua, thc s l nhng con s bit ni, cho thy tn hiu ng mng v s chuyn bin trong cng tc ny, song iu cng chng t by lu nay vic chi tiu cn qu bung lng, nn tht cht li cc khon chi tiu l vic cn lm. Qua thanh tra ti chnh, bo co quyt ton hng nm pht hin nhiu c quan n v hnh chnh s nghip, doanh nghip vi phm cc nguyn tc qun l hnh chnh. Mt trong nhng vn chi tiu c coi l bc xc v c th ni l ht sc tn km hin nay l: Chi tiu i vi cc l n nhn hun huy chng, ngy thnh lp ngnh, hi tho Mi cuc nh m nh vy tn khng bit bao l tin ca, no tin thu hi trng, tin n ung, qu biu Vo dp cui nm ny, ngi ta cn thy cc nh hng cht kn bi cc thng hu ht l cc cn b ch ngi dn thng th ly u ra ngn qu m vui v nh vy! Trong khi cuc sng ca nhng ngi dn t do cn ang vt v bn chi tng ngy vi nhng chi tiu hn hp th vic tit kim chng lng ph trong c ch chi bao cp l vic nht thit cn phi lm.

ASSIGNMENT 11:
Translate the following texts into Vietnamese GAZA CITY -Israel and palestinians negotiated through the night in what US envoy Dennis Ross termed "a good evening of work" aimed at breaking an impasse over Israel's delayed pullout from the West Bank town of Hebron.

Ross left Palestinian leader Yasser Arafat's office early yesterday - three hours after he arrived - but negotiators stayed behind to corntinue talks.

"The meeting was positive (and) constructive," Arafat said. He added that he and Ross "solved some of the obstacles which were between me and him," apparently referring to his own suggestion last week that Ross was biased toward Israel.

Ross, who was to leave later yesterday, agreed that "We had a good set of discussions." Referring to the negotiations, he said : "This has been a good evening of work, but there are still issues to be overcome."

67 Inside Arafat's headquarters, the Palestinian team led by chief negotiator Saeb Erekat continued deliberations with Israel's delegation, led by Maj. Gen. Shaul Muhfaz and Yitzhak Molcho, a top advisor to Prime Minister Benjamin Netanyahu. The talks began on Sunday afternoon in Jerusalem and moved to Gaza.

Israeli media speculated that if the meeting was successful, Ross might delay his departure and Netanyahu and Arafat might hold a summit either yesterday or today.

Israel was to have pulled out of Hebron - the last West Bank city under occupation in March, but delayed it after a series of terrorist attacks in Israel. Netanyahu, a hardliner elected in May, has delayed the pullout further, trying to tighten security for the 500 settlers who live in the town of 130,000 Arabs.

The Palestiians have refused to reopen the existing agreement, and also seek to link the Israeli redeployment to a further pullout elsewhere in the West Bank that was also promised in the signed autonomy accords.

In Hebron on Sunday, the army rounded up about 100 Palestinians after two fire bombs were thrown at a Jewish enclave without causing injuries. They were questioned and held at gunpoint for about an hour, but most were released. The army spokesman said several Palestinians were arrested.

A Palestinian walking past the Beit Hadassah enclave was hit and injured by a metal ladder that fell or was thrown from the roof, and he was taken to the city hospital. HCM CITY - The number of foreign tourists arriving in Viet Nam has been increasing year after year. On average, it grows by 30 per cent a year, according to recent statisties released from Viet Nam Tourism Administration. Though the number of tourists is on the rise, occupancy rates of hotels have dropped significantly as compared to previous years. Over the past six years, joint - venture hotels and guest houses operated at an average capacity rate of 85 to 90 per cent. They are now operating at a capacity rate of only 60 per cent. A rate which is much worse than that of state - owned hotels and private guest - houses. One of the main reasons for the decline in hotel capacity rates is the muchrooming of joint venture hotels which has caused severe competition among hotels for room - rates and hotel services. Several hotels have become burdens to their owners, with low gross earnings and high taxes, many are about to be forced to close down. Most foreign visitors have come here eager to experience something new and to travel to places of wild and natural beauty during their stay. For this reason, Viet Nam's tourist industry needs to reorganise its management and set goals in order to satisfy the current demands of tourists.

68 Though there has been growth in the number of tourists over the past several years, the number of visitors that come for a second visit is low. It is evident that the attraction of Viet Nam's tourist industry is still inadequate and tourist sites, transport and accommodation facilities have not yet reached international standards.The country now has some 22 provinces and cities which have completed detailed master plans for tourist resorts.

However, these projects are yet to be developed and are still under discussion. Even though each year the government has spent tens of billion of dongs on upgrading national historical relics and tourist resorts, due to a lack of management expertise and investment knowledge, these sites have failed to help boost the development of the tourist industry. To improve quality of tourist resorts and to boost hotel operations, Viet Nam's tourism industry now requires more investment from the government. Translate the following text into English Cng ngy cng c nhiu ng-i Vit nam tm cch i hc n-c ngoi bng chi ph ring ca mnh. T gia nm 1992 dn thng 5 nm nay, s ng-i t b tin ra hc cn t, nh-ng hy vng s l-ng s tng trong vng 5 nm ti v nn kinh t Vit Nam tt hn v chnh ph hp l ha cc th tc lm cho vic hc t tc d dng hn. Nh-ng cuc qung co ln nht nhm thc y nhng ng-i Vit Nam mnh dn u t- tin bc cho bn thn hoc con ci ca mnh -c hc trong mt nn gio duc t chun quc t l nh vo vic m mt cuc trin lm c bit v gio dc n-c ngoi t chc ti thnh ph H Ch Minh v H Ni trong hai thng va qua. -c gi l Educasia, cuc trin lm cao cc tr-ng i hc, cc tr-ng h-ng nghip v cc nh cung cp thit b tr-ng hc ca cc n-c Anh, Php, c, Hoa K v Thy S. Cuc trin lm cp n ch-ng trnh o to v nn gio dc m cc sinh vin t tc Vit Nam ang tm kim v li gii p ca nhng c s o to ny n-c ngoi i vi nhng thc mc ca sinh vin. Cc kha hc v vin thng,xy dng bng c gii, ngnh khch sn du lch v nu n -c c bit cao. Cho n by gi hu ht nhng sinh vin Vit nam i ra n-c ngoi hc thm theo hc bng quc t hay ca mt chnh ph n-c ngoi cp. Hng nm Vit Nam gi i khong 77 sinh vin v 100 chuyn vin bc cao ra n-c ngoi thng qua nhng ch-ng trnh hc bng -c chnh thc bo tr. Phn ln nhng sinh vin i hc t tc i hc Nga, mt s i cc n-c ng u v mt s rt t i hc H Lan, B, Hoa K, an Mch v Thi Lan. Nh-ng vo thng t- nm nay, cc sut hc bng ring dnh cho cc sinh vin n-c ngoi Nga v ng u tm ngng. Hin

69 nay c nhng iu kin dnh cho sinh vin Vit Nam mun hc n-c ngoi l phi tt nghip ph thng v phi theo hc cc kha hc ngoi ng ph hp v phi c kin thc v vi tnh. Tuy nhin vn cn thiu nhng thng tin v cc rc ri m sinh vin t tc n-c ngoi th-ng gp phi, c bit l vn v thi gian v trnh m cc kha hc i hi. c nhng lng ph v thi gian cng nh- tin bc khng th trnh khi.

ASSIGNMENT 12:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese The United States is a country of immigrants. These immigrants come from all over the world. They speak many different languages. In the past, new immigrants had a hard time in American schools. They could not understand their school work in English, so they often became discouraged and dropped out of school. They were not able to get good jobs without a good education. Now, many schools in the United States have bilingual programs. ("Bi" means "two" and "lingual" means "language".) For example, a school with many Spanish-speaking students might have a bilingual program. The Spanish-speaking students study their subjects in both English and Spanish. A school with a large Chinese population might have an English Chinese bilingual program. Students in bilingual programs continue their general education and learn English at the same time. After a period of time, they can take all of their classes in English with English speaking students. Bilingual education is "controversial." This means some people like it, and other people do not like it. The people in favor of bilingual education say, "It helps students to understand their school work in history, mathematics, science, etc., at the same time, they are learning English." These people say bilingual education helps students succeed in school. They can get better jobs and be better citizens after graduation. The people against bilingual education say, "It's a waste of time and government money. English is the national language of the United States." Everyone living in the United States, they say, should learn to speak English as quickly as possible. They say, "Bilingual education is too expensive." In other words, the government spends too much money on bilingual education. They want to put the money for bilingual programs into English programs. In such programs, everyone will learn English a lot faster. At least, those against bilingual education think so. Translate the following text into English Ng-i ngho th-ng c nhiu con hn nhng ng-i thuc gii trung l-u v th-ng l-u. V dn cc n-c km pht trin th c nhiu con hn dn ca cc n-c pht trin. Ngy cng c nhiu chuyn gia v dn s thy -c mi quan h khng kht gia s con trong gia nh v s pht trin kinh t.

70 Ti mt vi vng, dch v k hoch ha gia nh ca chnh ph c l khng c i vi dn ngho do iu kin a l. Chng hn nh- ng-i dn nng thn sng qu xa trung tm k hoch ha gia nh. Do vy h khng nhn -c thng tin v cch thc hn ch sinh . Nhn chung th dn thnh th c nhiu thng tin hn dn nng thn. Dn thnh th -c h tr dch v k hoch ha gia nh, v h c gia nh t con hn. V th chng ta c th ni rng v tr a l ni m ng-i dn sng ng mt vai tr qan trng trong vic quyt dnh mt gia nh nn sinh bao nhiu con: Gia nh sng thnh th th c t con hn gia nh sng nng thn. Nhng l do khc l g? S pht trin kinh t gia nh, hay mt phm vi ln hn l ca mt n-c, l mt nhn t quan trng trong vic quyt nh s con trong gia nh. Ng-i c nhiu tin th c t con. Ng-c li, ng-i ngho n-c km pht trin mun c nhiu con. Ti sao? Do h phi l thuc vo s chm sc ca con ci khi v gi. H khng c bo him, tin h-u, hay s gip ca chnh ph. Khi h gi c th ai s gip h. Cu tr li rt n gin. H c th v s quay sang nh con ci gip . Con ci ca h by gi tr thnh ng-i ln v ang i lm vic. Tt c con ci ca h u phi chia s v gnh vc trch nhim chm sc cha m. i vi nhiu ng-i ngho, mt gia nh ng con l mt cch thc hoch nh cho t-ng lai. Chng ta c th ni rng gia nh ng con l ngun bo him cho tui gi.

ASSIGNMENT 13:
Translate the following text into English Cc nh xut khu c uy th ca Trung Quc ang cha tm ngm ca mnh vo Vit Nam, nhn ra n-c lng ging ph-ng nam nh chn mui cho mt k hoch qung co trong vic mua sm hng ha tiu dng v my mc, cc nh qun l iu hnh Trung Quc pht bin nh- th vo hm th nm. Cc nh qun l Trung Quc ni trong bui l khai mc hi ch t chc ti H Ni : Nh-ng Vit Nam c mt kinh nghim lu di tr-c khi nhn ra hng xut khu ca mnh vo Trung Quc tng ln khi mt vi sn phm l c th xm nhp vo th tr-ng Trung quc m rng hn. Khong 60 cng ty Bc Kinh tr-ng by nhng mt hng ca h t chi bng nha r tin v cc trang tr cho n

71 cc loi xe c ti hi ch H Ni, mt hi ch u tin trin lm cc mt hng Trung Quc k t khi hai n-c c quan h tr li vi nhau. Jeep- Bc Kinh, mt lin doanh sn xut t Trung-M, hi vng s chen chn vo th tr-ng xe hi ang ln mnh ti Vit Nam, nh-ng ang i mt vi mt s cnh tranh khc nghit vi th tr-ng xe hi Nht Bn xy phng tuyn xung quanh y, ng Guo Fengli, ph ch tch cng ty Xut Nhp Khu t Bc Kinh pht biu nh- vy. Theo li ca ng Guo th th tr-ng y ang m ra kh nhanh cho cc sn phm ca chng ti, c bit l khi gi c ca chng ti thc s cnh tranh -c vi cc i th ca chng ti. BAIEC ang mong mun thit lp quan h mu dch vi Vit Nam nh-ng cng ang phi i u vi vic tm kim cc mt hng thch hp buon bn, mc d l ng Guo ngh l c th tm ra li gii p cho mt vn bnh th-ng. Cng ty Trung Quc d kin trao i xe hi ly l-ng thc, v s l-ng thc ny s em bn Nam Trung Quc. Tuy nhin h vn thch trao i nhng mt hng c gi tr cao hn. Chng ti khng bit nhiu v nhng g m Vit Nam mi cho. ng Guo ni n iu ny, mt quan im -c cc nh doanh th-ng khc nhc li nhiu ln. Nhng ng-i nn nng bn hng hn l mua hng. Vic bun bn qua bin gii tng vt k t ngy hai n-c m li bin gii vo nm 1991. Ni mt cch chnh thc th, vic bun bn hai chiu c gi tr khong 500 triu la d cho vic bun bn bt hp php c th cao hn nhiu. Trung quc -c h-ng mt gi tr thng d- to ln. Trong chuyn ving thm Trung Quc tun tr-c, Ph th t-ng Phan Vn Khi ku gi hai bn thay th vic bun bn qua bin gii bng nhng tha hip chnh thc gia cc cng ty th-ng mi v cc nh ch to m cch lm ny s lm tng gi ca cc sn phm Vit Nam. Vit Nam mun y mnh hn na vic xut khu than v du kh cho cc trung tm sn xut ang bng pht Nam Trung Quc, ni xa ngun nng l-ng ca Trung Quc c hng ngn cy s.

72 ng Phan Vn Khi cn nhn mnh thm v gi go v cc mt hng thc phm khc v pha Vit Nam nhp nhiu hn na cc my mc ch to v cc cng ngh khc ca Trung Quc.

73

ASSIGNMENT 14:
Translate the following text into English Dn s ca A Rp Xa U i l 8853000 ng-i. a s l nhng ng-i A Rp Hi gio. Hay ni cch khc, h l nhng tn Hi gio. A Rp l mt quc o. V vua ca n-c ny va l mt ng-i lnh o chnh tr va l mt nh lnh o tn gio ca t n-c. Do lut ca chnh ph -a ra l lut ca Hi gio, v ngn ng ca n-c ny l ting A Rp. o Hi rt quan trng i vi nn gio dc ca A Rp. Tr-c nm 1950, hu nh- ton b nn gio dc ca A Rp l nn gio dc tn gio. Hc sinh hc Kinh Koran, sch kinh thnh ca do Hi. Chng phi c gng nh nhng iu trong cun sch ny cng nhiu cng tt. Tr-c nm 1949, khng c bt k mt tr-ng cao ng hay i hc no m ch c mt vi tr-ng tiu hc v trung hc n-c ny. Vo nm 1953, chnh ph A Rp thnh lp B Gio Dc. y thc s l b-c m u cho mt nn gio dc hin i cho n-c ny. Khi nhng k s- pht hin ra du A Rp th t n-c ny tr nn giu c. Cc nh lnh o ca n-c ny bt u nhn thy rng cng ngh Ph-ng Ty l cn thit gip t n-c pht trin. Cc nh lnh o vn tin rng nn gio dc tn gio l rt quan trng, nh-ng mt n-c hin i khng th pht trin cng ngh m ch da vo mt h thng gio dc tn gio truyn thng. H quyt nh b sung cc mn hc khc vo h thng gio dc. H mun kt hp nn gio dc tn gio truyn thng vi nn gio dc cng ngh hin i ca Ph-ng Ty. Tn gio vn l mt yu t quan trng trong nn gio dc ca A Rp. Tuy nhin hin nay hc sinh, sinh vin A Rp cng hocj tt c cc mn hc khc nh- : ngn ng ( c bit l ting Anh), lch s, khoa hc, ton hc, vi tnh v.v.. Tr-c nm 1950 ch c 20000 hc sinh, sinh vin A Rp. Nm 1982 con s ny ln ti 1780000. H thng gio dc ca A Rp pht trin nhanh hn bt k mt n-c no trn th gii. Tt c cc tr-ng hc a Rp l min ph. Chnh ph cng cho sinh vin cao ng v i hc thm tin nhm ng vin h. Tuy nhin cc nh lnh o tn gio khng thch cho ph n i hc. H cho rng ph n c hc c th gy nhng nh h-ng xu cho gia nh v x hi. Do vy, lm cho cc nh lnh o tn gio chp nhn cho ph n i hc th chnh ph phi dt vic gio dc ph n theo cc tn ch ca cc nh lnh o tn gio.

74 Ph n theo hc cc tr-ng cao ng v c bit l theo hc cc khoa v ph n cc tr-ng i hc dnh ring cho ph n. Gio vin y l n. V khng c gio vin n nn chnh ph cho php gio vin nam ging dy ph n A Rp thng qua ph-ng tin truyn hnh. Tr-c ht, ph n theo di cc bi ging trn v tuyn v sau h c th ni chuyn vi thy gio qua in thoi hi v nhng thc mc. Thy gio v sinh vin n khng -c php gp nhau. Sau khi tt nghip, ph n A Rp c nhiu c hi xin vic ging nh- nam gii. H tr thnh cc gio vin, bc s, cc nh hot ng x hi, cc nh khoa hc v nhiu vic khc na. Ni lm vic hu nh- cng tch ri ph n vi nam gii. iu c ngha l ph n v nam gii khng -c php lm vic cng mt ch ch tr bnh vin. Ph n A Rp muons c nhiu c hi tm vic lm hn. Nh-ng mt vi ph n khng mun cng lm vic vi nam gii. Trong mt bi bo gn y dng trong mt tp ch c tn gi Tp Ch Trung ng, mt vi sinh vin n ni rng h thc s khng mun lm vic cng nam gii.

ASSIGNMENT 15:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese After getting high on the hopes of striking black gold off the shores of Vietnam, the world's oil giants have now glumly awoken to the hazards- - the immense coot of investment and, so far, the meagre rewards. The mood was subdued among foreign companies exhibiting their technological wares this week at the second International Oil and Gas Fair in Hanoi. "The results aren't bad, but they, are not as great as some had hoped, "said Melchior de Matharel, head of Southeast Asia operations with the French firm Total. If caution is now the watchword, disappointed foreign petroleum companies may draw comfort from the recent. "encouraging" discoveries of oil made by Mitsubishi Oil and the Malaysian firm Petronas Carigali, and of gas made by British Petroleum (BP), off the coast of southern Vietnam. "Oil exploration is plainly hazardous. But the good news is that the Vietnamese basin is oilbearing", Matharel said. Prospectors enthusiasm was abruptly dampened last May, when BHP Petroleum of Australia announced the reserves at the Dai Hung ("Great Bear") site, 375 kilometers (235 miles) southeast of Ho Chi Minh City, were far smaller than projected. BHP initially estimated the site to contain 700 million to 800 million barrels of oil, but has now downgraded it to 100 million to 200 million. Production is scheduled to begin neat month, at a modest level of 25,000 barrels per day. That was a tough -blow for BHP. It has already invested 240 million dollars in Vietnam- - and half of it went into the first phase of the Dai Hung project.

75 BHP headed an international consortium, selected in April 1993, to develop the field at a total cost estimated at 1.5 billion dollars. BHP holds 43.75 percent of the consortium, with Petronas holding 20 percent, and state - owned PetroVietnam 15 percent. The remaining 21.25-percent share is equally split between Total and the Japanese firm Sumitomo. For the moment, it is the Japanese- the main buyers of Vietnam's crude oil- who appear to have had the best luck. The Japan Vietnam Petroleum Co. (JVPC), a branch of the Mitsubishi Oil group, announced in June a "very promising" discovery at the Rang Dong (:Dawn) site. According to the results of an exploratory well, the field may be "of the same caliber" as neighbouring Bach Ho ("White Tiger") the only site now being commercially exploited in Vietnam. Bach Ho's reserves are estimated at a maximum of :300 million barrels.But et will take at least another year and other drillings to precisely determine the scope of the Japanese discovery, industry experts in Honoi cautioned. Pessimists say it will take four to five years in all to gauge Vietnam's oil potentially. Gas exploration and exploitation have also proven to be a risk business, although fortune has so far smiled on British Petroleum, which announced in September the discovery of two gas pockets, estimated to be 57 billion cubic metres (1,995 billion cubic feet), in Nam Con Son, south of Ho Chi Minh City. BHP and the Norwegian national company, Statoil, bought shares in the offshore concession, held by the Indian state firm Oil and Natural Gas Co. (ONGC), in 1992. The consortium, with ONGC holding 55 percent, BP 30 percent. and Statoil five percent, has conducted exploration and tests under a shared - production contract with PetroVietnam, which in turn has taken a five percent stake on the interests of each of the European partners. Translate the following text into English Vic hng hc ca mt b phn tu v tr con thoi iu khin bng phn lc vo hm th t- buc c quan NA SA phi hon mt cuc kho st tri t bng radar khi chuyn bay nghin cu mi sinh 10 ngy ca tu Endeavour bay qua mc na phi trnh. C quan Qun Tr Hng Khng v Khong Gian Quc Gia cho bit vn ny l mt tr lc i vi phng th nghim Radar tr gi 384 triu la, nh-ng khng gy ra mt nguy him no i vi cc nh du hnh v tr. Cc vin chc ni rng b phn chm in t kim tra nhin liu b hang, khng pht hin -c mt h thng r ritrong b phn ddaayr b nghi l nguyn nhn lm ng-ng hot ng nm b phn khc gi l vcn (verniers) cn thit chnh li cho ng -ng i ca tu con thoi trong quyx o v ch dn chnh xc kh c trong khoang hng n mc tiu trn hnh tinh. Kelly Humphries, ng-i thuyt minh chuyn bay, vo chiu hm th t- gi s gin on mang tnh khoa hc ny l s ngh

76 tm thi trong lc cc k s- trn mt t vi ngh ra mt cch cc my tnh ca con thoi khng n b phn kim tra nhin liu b hng. Theo ng Rich Jackson, Gim c iu khin chuyn bay th con tu Endeavour vi 38 b phn y ln hn s tiu th qu nhiu nhin liu v loi tr iu mong i con tu s lm lan ra tai ha thin nhin quanh a cu. Vo chiu hm th t-, tu con thoi bay theo ph-ng thc t li (hoa tiu t ng) v phi hnh on lm vic theo hai ca sut 24 gi lin k t lc ct cnh khi Florida vo hm th su, h-ng mt gi ngh gii lao bt ng. ng Jackson d on rng khong phn mm s sn sng lm vic vo chiu th ba, khong 24 gi sau khi trc trc k thut xy ra. Ni vi cc phng vin ti trm kim sot chuyn bay ti Houston, ng Jackson cho bit: B phn cht hng v nhm kim sot chuyn bay ang l vic rt tch cc phc hi vic kim sot cc vecn v gim thiu nh h-ng trong thi gian c s c. Cc nh khoa hc ni rng s trc trc ny khng lm h- hng cc hnh nh, nh-ng s phi mt mt thi gian lu n gp 5 ln x l cc d liu ra a v my tnh ca chng.

77

ASSIGNMENT 16:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese Britain is divided into 651 constituencies and people in each constituency select one person to represent them in the House of Commons. The simple majority system of voting is used in parliamentary elections in Britain and voting is by secret ballot. There are moves to have this changed to a preferential system. Voting is voluntary. All British people who are 18 years of age or over and not legally barred from voting can vote. Members of the Royal Family peers and peeresses who are members of the House of Lords and foreign nationals are not allowed to vote. People who are disqualified include those who are kept in hospital for mental health reasons people serving prison sentences and people convicted within the previous five years of corruption. Candidates Anyone aged 21 or over holding British citizenship, or a citizen of another commonwealth country or the Irish Republic, who is qualified. May stand for election to Parliament. People who are not qualified are members of the House of Lords, elegy of the Church of England, Church of Ireland, Church of Scotland and the Roman Catholic Church. Neither are bankrupts, public servants and officials and those who have been sentenced to more than one years imprisonment. Candidates in a constituency have to pay a sum of money, about 1,000, as a deposit and if they get at least 5% of the votes they will get the money back. General Elections In theory, the election for or seats in the House of Commons takes place every five years. But, elections are usually held before the end of the five-year term. The Prime Minister has the right to decide when to hold a general election. Then the queen formally dissolves parliament and calls for the election of the new one. Britain is divided into areas called constituencies of roughly equal population. General elections often happen on a Thursday and people still go to word as usual. Therefore, the hours of voting are flexible, from 07:00 to 22:00; to give voters are given a ballot paper with the names of the candidates for that constituency, usually in alphabetical order, and sometimes with a brief description of the candidates backgrounds or their parties. After that, spoiled ballots are eliminated. The legal ballot papers are counted and the candidate with the most support is the winner and becomes the Member of Parliament for the constituency. The Campaign Three weeks before a general election is the time for the campaign. The campaign takes place in every constituency all over Britain. Candidates resort to different means to attract their supporters. Canvassing Canvassing means local party workers go from door to door and ask people how they intend to vote. In this way, candidates can know peoples voting intentions and attitudes so that they can adapt their campaign tactics. Party workers also revisit those who have promised to support their party and urge them to do so on polling day.

78 Public meetings Candidates have the right to hold public meetings whenever and wherever available during an election campaign. They invite guests including influential members of their parties, and wellknow people such as writers, actors and actresses, who support them, to the meetings and try to influence voters. Such meetings are often covered in detail by the media. The mass media Because newspapers and magazines in Britain are privately owned and financially independent of the political parties, the owners and the editors can decide to support any party they like, but radio and television are required to be impartial. News programmes cover all aspects of the major parties campaigns. On these occasions, candidates appear on television and radio day and night. They are televised in factories, school, youth centers, and the farms, giving speeches about their party policies. Talkback radio allows people to pose questions to political leaders, and reports and commentaries from journalists holding interviews with leading figures from all the parties are broadcast. Manifestos The main parties publish manifestos during the election campaign. Manifesto are often launched by each party at a press conference and inform people of their policies and what they will do if they win the election. Manifestos might include the past achievements of the party and can attack the policies of the their opponents.

ASSIGNMENT 17:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese Ha Noi- Ha Noi is trying to nearly double its Gross Domestic Product (GDP) to US$1,100 per capita over the next five years. The ambitious projection has been based on the current annual GDP growth rate of 11.9 per cent. Participants at yesterdays Ha Noi Communist Party Conference were told if the current growth rate continues as expected, it should reach 15 per cent by the turn of the century. This should translate into a doubling of the GDP. The conference was also told the traditional rural and small industry base of the capital citys economy had rapidly been replaced by industrial endeavor and the trading and services industries, and that about 19 per cent of Hanoi families could now be classified as well-off. Last years average GDP was estimated at $650 per capita compared with $470 in 1991. The sharp rise was due to massive investments from both foreign and domestic sources estimated as VND32, 570 (about $3.257 billion), according to a senior Ha Noi party official. Deputy Secretary of the Ha Noi Party Committee Le Xuan Tung told participants at the conference yesterday that part of the investment was spent on transfer of new technology and renovating equipment in existing industrial plants. The major part of the investment, however, was for setting up new joint ventures with foreign partners. By the end of 1995, up to 210 foreign investment projects had been licensed to operate in Ha Noi involving $3.3billion of prescribed capital. Of this amount $1.3billion has been consumed, Tung said.

79 This has helped Ha Noi along its chosen path to restructure its economic base towards industries and services rather than rely on its traditional agricultural and small industry underpinning. The proportion of industries and that of trade and services in Ha Noi GDP in the 1991-1995 period rose sharply to 33.1 per cent and 61.6 per cent respectively. Meanwhile the agricultural share fell to just 5.3 per cent of the total GDP share, Tung said. Tung said the change in the economic face of Hanoi was because of the sharp increase in the annual growth rate for the past five years. He said that a growth rate of 11.9 per cent was ensured year after year, which is almost double the figure set for the same period by the Ha Noi Party Committee back in 1991. Tung told participants that by the year 2000 the growth rate would reach 15 per cent per year and GDP per capita would be estimated at $1,100. By that stage the industrial share in Ha Noi GDP should reach 40 per cent, up seven per cent on the current rate. Five industries have been targeted as the key industries for the city, Tung said. They include mechanical engineering and electrical equipment production; textiles, garments and leather goods; the food processing industry electronics; and construction materials. In the next five years Ha Noi would need up to $9 billion in investment to develop new industrial zones, renovate existing industrial zones and build more high rise buildings in the inner city for office space, trade centers and entertainment centers. Hanoi has about 10 established and five new industrial zones. Many of the existing industrial areas need intensive-investment to replace old technology, and expand their premises for more plants. However the deputy party secretary for Hanoi reminded participants to the conference that more effort was needed to keep development in line with what he termed as a socialistoriented market economy. Ha Noi authorities had failed to pay due attention to the consolidation of socialist production relationships while the administration at all levels remained weak and the role of the Party in different economic and social organizations remained limited, he said. Tungs comments were supported by Party General Secretary Do Muoi, who also addressed the conference. The party leader told the Ha Noi conference that despite its initial success, Ha Noi should be more aware of economic development and human resource development. About six per cent of Hanois population remained unemployed which, Do Muoi said, was a challenge Ha Noi had to tackle. Part of the solution was to set up production groups, which could be engaged in small industries and the services industry. Deputy Secretary Tung said that in the 1991-1995 period the number of well-to-do families increased to nearly 19 per cent while those families classified as financially needy dropped to about two per cent.

80

ASSIGNMENT 18:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese Gardening is a traditional occupation in Vietnam and appeared at the same time or earlier than water rice cultivation. But VAC (abbreviation for vuon (garden), ao (pond for keeping fish) and chuong (husbandary) is an economic model that was introduced only 10 years ago. Foreigners who have come to Vietnam to learn about VAC in Vietnam say it is not very efficient in production scale and performance, but is a uniform cultivation model bringing both economic benefit and environmental advantages. From its first days of operation VAC has continually cemented its role in the national economic development. VAC now operates in 53 provinces, with over 10 million farmer households using the model. In recent years, VAC has been expanded in most localities throughout the country. Tens of thousands of hectares (on average) farms were set up in 13 midland and mountainous provinces) and -orchards were expanded to 350000-400,000 ha. This application of VAC became the main fruit suppliers for the country, simultaneously meeting export demand. According to the FAO, Vietnam's fruit output is at nearly four million tones per year, world's fruit output per capital at 65 kg, Asia Pacific 31 kg and Vietnam 61 kg. VAC has now become significant for the country's poverty alleviation and hunger eradication campaign providing on - the - spot jobs, prevention of malnutrition, permanent agriculture and settlement and for plantations for bare hills and barren land. Living standards of VAC households have improved greatly with revenue from VAC operations usually providing 60% of household's total income. VAC output value accounts for one of third of agricultural output value and will probably in-crease further. VAC has made rapid growth in the last 10 years, but has not penetrated all rural areas. If intensive cultivation and crop specialization was carried out through out the country, Vietnam's fruit output could reach 8 million tones per year in the 21st century. VAC should be considered as a national agricultural programme. If VAC is encouraged to reach its full potential, it will certainty obtain further effective growth contributing to the national economy and the environmental protection.

81

ASSIGNMENT 19:
Translate the following text into English Hm th Hai va ri, cc nh nghin cu cho rng h c bng chng kt lun rng ph-ng php iu tr thc nghim bng cch truyn huyt t-ng lm cho bnh pht trin chm lai cho bnh nhn nhim HIV d-ng tnh v ko di thm thi gian sng cho cc bnh nhn AIDS. Tuy nhin, ng Abraham khoa huyt hc ca H Cambridge, ni rng mc d cch cha bnh min nhim th ng l s t ph trong vic iu tr bnh AID S v khng gy phn ng ph no, th cng khng nn m t n nh- mt ph-ng php cha tr. Trong phn trnh by ca mnh ti mt hi ngh Lun n ng ni:Dt khot khng phi l mt ph-ng php cha tr. Chng thy g l cha tr c, nh-ng hnh nh- n l hnh thc cha tr tt nht. ng Karpasni vic nghin cu ca Php v M v cch cha bnh min nhim th ng -c thng bo ti hi ngh lm cho nghin cu ban u ca ng vng chc hn. ng tuyn b trong mt cuc phng vn qua in thoi rng: Vic nghin cwuws c tnh cht m mm v hn ch bng thuc trn an chng t rng vic cha tr ny c li cho bnh nhn mc bnh AID S v ko di thm thi gian sng ca h. ng ni rng nhng nghin cu do cng ty Hemacare Califonia v hai bnh vin Pa ri tin hnh cng cho they rng cch cha tr min nhim th ng gip lm chem. Li s tn cng d di cuarv bnh AIDS cc bnh nhn khi xt nghim they c HIV d-ng tnh, loi vi rt gy ra bnh cht ng-i ny. Qua cch cha tr min nhim th ng, hng thng cc bnh nhn -c truyn na lt huyt t-ng ly t ng-i khe mnh c nhim HIV d-ng tnh. Mu -c ly ht cc hng cu v bch hang cu v khng c vi rt HIV, nh-ng c scws khng trung ha cao dit -c vi rt. ng Karpras ni l ln u tin vo nm 1985 ng pht hin nhng ng-i khe mnh nh-ng b nhim HIV c sc khng ny mc cao trong mu trong khi cc bnh nhn AID S mt cc khng th trung ha ny c kh nng chng li bnh truyn nhim. Bn bnh nhn Cambridge l nhng ng-i u tin -c cha tr theo cch ny v sau cc th nghim trn qui m nh -c

82 tin hnh Lun n vo nm 1988 v 1989. Tuy nhin ng Karpras ni rng ng khng nhn -c quyx dnh cho cc nghin cu ny n-c Anh do vic nghin cu phi -c tin hnh M v Php. Th nghim ca Hemancare nghin cu tnh hiu qu ca cch cha tr min nhim th ng -c tin hnh trn 220 bnh nhn AIDS hn 3 nm. Trong 12 thng u cuc thc nghim cho they mc t vong gim rt nhiu trong khi bnh nhn -c truyn huyt t-ng, trong khi bnh nhn trong nhm kim ch bng thuc trn an khng -c cha tr th t l t vong cao gp 5 ln. Nhm -c iu tr c 1 ng-i b cht trong s 21 ng-i, trong nhm ng-i -c iu tr bng thuc trn an th c 6 trong tng s 30 b t vong. Hn na, s bnh ly nhim do bnh AID S gy ra thp hn nhiu trong nhm -c iu tr v chnh bn thn nhng ng-i hin mu hnh nh- h cng they c li. Cc nh nghin cu cho rng vic hin mu c v nh- kch thch vic sn sinh cc khng th trung ha trong mu ca cc bnh nhn nhim HIV d-ng tnh. ng Karpras ni rng cc nghin cu ca Php nhng kt qu t-ng t. ng ni l cc nghin cu M v Php cho bng chng kt lun u tin l min nhim th ng l mt ph-ng php iu tr hiu. cng tiu cch bnh em biu cha AIDS li ca tr hu

ASSIGNMENT 20:
Translate the following text into English Hm khc, b li k v mt gio s b bit. Vo mt m, ng ta thc gic v thy mt ng-i l mt ang da vo cui gi-ng ng. Mt cht lo s, v gio s bnh tnh hi xem ng-i mun g. Th-a, con mun x-ng ti, vi mt ging khn khn, ng-i n ng p. V gio s bo ng-i rng hy i n sng mai v lc ny khng tin x-ng ti. Ng-i n ng li th-a: Ln tr-c con n x-ng ti, nh-ng v xu h, con khng nhc n mt ti li con gy ra, v iu ny lun m nh trong tm tr con cho n gi. V gio s bit y l mt tr-ng hp rt ti t. Ng-i n ng thiu thnh tht khi x-ng ti v c l ng ta s phi nhn lnh ti cht.V gio s chong dy v chun b o qun. n lc ting g bt u gy ngoi sn, ng nhn quanh nh-ng khng thy ng-i

83 u c, ch ngi thy mi g chy. ng nhn li gi-ng nh-ng cng khng thy du i bn tay ang b chy. L do l v ng-i n ng thiu chn thnh lc x-ng ti. Cu chuyn li trong ti mt ni kinh hong. iu ti t nht l lc b Ryan by cho chng ti cch phn xt l-ng tm. Chng ta ku tn c Cha Tri c v c khng? Chng ta c phi tho knh vi cha m khng? (Ti hi b ta l c phi knh trng ng b khng v b bo l c!) C yu th-ng hng xm nh- chnh cho bn thn mnh khng? (Ti li ngh n s tin m Nora c -c vo th su hng tun.) Tnh li th ti cng vi phm 10 iu rn, tt c ch v b ni ti. V n by gi ti c th nhn ra rng chng no ni ti cn trong nh ti, chng ti vn cn tip tc phm ti. Ti s x-ng ti n mt hn va. Ngy c lp i, ti gi v au rng, hy vng s vng mt ca ti s khng gy s ch . Nh-ng vo lc 3 gi, khi ti ang cm thy yn n th mt anh chng chy dn, cng vi li nhn ca b Ryan bo rng ti phi x-ng ti vo ngy th by t nh nguyn cng v nhng ng-i cn li. Ti t hn na, m ti khng i cng ti m li l Nora. Gi y, Nora nm bun b. n bnh Nora c cch lm ti au n m m khng h bit. ly tay ti khi chng ti xung chn i, mm c-i Ch y t v th-ng hi ti nh- th ch ang -a ti vin cho mt ca m.

i Cha i! Xin hy gip chng con! Nora rn r. M cng chng c g ng tic v em u phi l mt a b ngoan phi khng Jackie? i, Jackie, tim ch ang nhi au v em y! Em s ngh nh- th no v ti li ca mnh nh? Ny, ng qun x-ng ci ti em phm vi b y nh! em i! , va ni ti c git tay mnh ra khi tay Nora. Em khng mun i x-ng ti u Sao li khng, em phi i Jackie ! Nora cng p li vi ging iu y v th-ng hi . Em phi i, nu khng cha x s n nh tm em y. C Cha mi bit, ch khng cm thy ti cho em cht no c. Em c nh ci ln em c git ch bng con dao ct bnh m khng? V c nhng li l em ni na? Ch khng bit ri Cha s lm g vi em. C th Cha s gi em cho c Gim Mc.

84 Mi tn by gi ti vn cn nh l ti suy ngh mt cch cay ng n th no. Ti ngh nu ti c i x-ng ti th ch y s khng bit n mt na nhng g ti s phi ni v lc y ti bng hiu ti sao ci anh chng trong cu chuyn ca b Ryan x-ng ti mt cch khng thnh tht. D-ng nhuwtooi cng cm thy rt xu h v mi ng-i khng ngng ch trch anh chng y. Ti vn cn nh nh- in ci i c con dc dn xung nh th. Ti cn nh c nhng nh t d-ng tri di hai bn ngn i nm xa xa ci thung lng bn b sng. Trong cnh t-ng y, khi quay nhn li nhng khong khng ca nhng ngi nh nm cch nhau, ti bng lin t-ng n ci nhn cui cng ca Adam v v-n a ng. Khi Nora ko ti xung ht nhng bc tam cp n sn nh th, ch y bng i ging. Nora tr nn hung d v c c nhchnh con ng-i tht ca ch y. n ri Nora ct cao ging rt t mn ri quay manh ng-i i nhanh vo ca nh th. Khi sp b-c i, ch khng qun nm mt cu na: V tau hi vng Cha s cho my c tht nhiu kinh hi li. ng l hn. Ri th ti bit mnh b lc lng tht s. Ti ang ng tr-c Ta phn xt. Khi ti b-c vo, cch ca vi nhng knh y mu sc bng ng sm sau l-ng ti. nh mt tri vt tt nh-ng ch cho bng ti thm su. Gi c xo xc bn ngoi lm cho s im lng bn trong d-ng nh- v ra lnh gi d-i chn ti. Nora ngi , i din vi cu b Jackie, bn cch ta x-ng ti. Tr-c Nora c thm hai c gi na. Ri bng nhin, mt bng en trng rt thm hi ang di n ng sau l-ng ti c nh- th kp ti vo gia ti khng th no thot -c du ti c can m n u. Ci bng en mi n - mt ng-i n ng- ng , vng tay li, mt di ln cao cu nguyn vi mt ging rt i thng hi. Lc y ti t hi mnh liu ng y c phi l ng-i cng ging ni ti khng. Bi v ch c b mi khin cho mt chng trai phi c- x mt cch thm th-ng nh- vy. Nh-ng d sao, anh y vn tt hn ti. t ra anh ta n y x-ng ti. Cn ti, c th ti s khng x-ng ti mt cch thnh tht, ri ti s b cht i trong bng m v lin tc tr v ph phch c.

85

ASSIGNMENT 21:
Translate the following texts into Vietnamese 1. Generally, after a time of stagnation, HCMC' s private textile embroidery industry has recovered and develop somewhat since 1991. Yet development is not stable because most private units work according to foreign orders. Consequently, they can't control their production plan, and labour price for making garments is limited by foreign partners (the labour cost of 1995 is equal to 65 - 70% of that in 1991 - 1992). Due to the very nature of the industry, the average wage of those working in this branch is only about VND 400,000 per month. Under the current fierce competition, the amount of 15% of total wages for social insurance and 2% for medical insurance that enterprises must contribute, if the proposed social insurance scheme comes into effect, will push up production costs to very high levels, making it difficult for Vietnamese ventures to compete effectively and occupy the market. To help private textile embroidery businesses survive, Mr. Nam has suggested, the State should amend the contribution rate of non - State ventures to Social Insurance schemes, as follows: - Social Insurance: 10% by enterprise, 3% by employee. - Medical Insurance: 1 % by enterprises, 1 % by employee The State should also issue a regulation concerning employees who are trained and recruited by an enterprise, and are obligated to work for at least two years. It is necessary that employees working at non-- State ventures should be given a work card. Employer agreement may be required if an employee want to leave his or her job. All members of HCMC's Textile - Embroidery Association agree on the implementation of contributing a part of total wages to Social and Medical Insurance, in compliance with the Labour Code. 2. Business leaders of big companies in HCMC have voiced difficulties they are facing with in the fierce competition against foreign companies, especially world giants. At a meeting on "How to encourage foreign investment and protect domestic production" held in HCMC last week, producers of Tico and Lux Detergent, P/S Cosmetics, Tribeco Soft Drink, Viet Thang Textiles, Saigon Beer and HCMC Poultry Company, had the same opinion that local enterprises are not in an equal footing in competing with foreign counterparts as they do not enjoy tax incentives as foreign-invested enterprises. Only a year after the US embargo was lifted, soft drink giants such as Coca Cola and Pepsi Cola, which have enjoyed superior advantages in capital, marketing policies and preferences under the Foreign Investment Law, have gradually eaten into the market shares of local producers. Other products are also in the same situation. Saigon Beer has to compete fiercely with breweries of foreign Joint-ventures. Local detergent producers, although capable of meeting domestic demand to the year 2000, have driven into the corner by giants such as Procter & Gamble and Unilever. To protect domestic production, local producers have proposed several measures to the Government. First, the State should devise specific development plans for foreign investment in terms of business field and geographical area and should not encourage foreign investment in products, which local enterprises can produce such as soft drink, detergent, paper and

86 cigarettes. Second, licenses should be granted only to JVs or 100% foreign-owned enterprises, which involve in projects requiring large capital, advanced technology or producing goods for export. Third, a law should be enacted against unfair competition that can lead to monopoly, dumping or price inflation that does not benefit consumers. Fourth, there should be a policy to encourage domestic investment and to grant domestic enterprises the same tax incentives as foreign investors enjoy. Fifth, a campaign to motivate local consumers to use domestic goods should be launched, creating conditions for domestic enterprises to develop.

ASSIGNMENT 22:
Translate the following text into English Ng-i ngho th-ng c nhiu con hn nhng ng-i thuc gii trung l-u v th-ng l-u. V dn cc n-c km pht trin th c nhiu con hn dn ca cc n-c pht trin. Ngy cng c nhiu chuyn gia v dn s thy -c mi quan h khng kht gia s con trong gia nh v s pht trin kinh t. Ti mt vi vng, dch v k hoch ha gia nh ca chnh ph c l khng c i vi dn ngho do iu kin a l. Chng hn nh- ng-i dn nng thn sng qu xa trung tm k hoch ha gia nh. Do vy h khng nhn -c thng tin v cch thc hn ch sinh . Nhn chung th dn thnh th c nhiu thng tin hn dn nng thn. Dn thnh th -c h tr dch v k hoch ha gia nh, v h c gia nh t con hn. V th chng ta c th ni rng v tr a l ni m ng-i dn sng ng mt vai tr qan trng trong vic quyt dnh mt gia nh nn sinh bao nhiu con: Gia nh sng thnh th th c t con hn gia nh sng nng thn. Nhng l do khc l g? S pht trin kinh t gia nh, hay mt phm vi ln hn l ca mt n-c, l mt nhn t quan trng trong vic quyt nh s con trong gia nh. Ng-i c nhiu tin th c t con. Ng-c li, ng-i ngho n-c km pht trin mun c nhiu con. Ti sao? Do h phi l thuc vo s chm sc ca con ci khi v gi. H khng c bo him, tin h-u, hay s gip ca chnh ph. Khi h gi c th ai s gip h. Cu tr li rt n gin. H c th v s quay sang nh con ci gip . Con ci ca h by gi tr thnh ng-i ln v ang i lm vic. Tt c con ci ca h u phi chia s v gnh vc trch nhim chm sc cha m. i vi nhiu ng-i ngho, mt gia nh ng con l mt cch thc hoch nh cho t-ng lai. Chng ta c th ni rng gia nh ng con l ngun bo him cho tui gi.

87

ASSIGNMENT 23:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese Indonesia will face a record food deficit this year as a result of lower harvests and a financial crisis that has raised the cost of imports, two UN food agencies said yesterday. In a joint report, the Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO) and the world Food programme (WFP) said large - scale international assistance would be needed to meet a short fall in rice, the country's main staple food. " FA0 - WFP urge donor countries to assist Indonesia in managing its drought- and financial crisis- related food problems " the report by the two Rome - based organizations said. Steep food price increases and rapidly growing unemployment were adding large numbers of people to those already living below the poverty line, the report added. " Approximately 7,5 million poor Indonesians in 15 provinces may experience acute food short ages during the upcoming dry season ". said the report on the world's fourth - most populous country whose economy has been shattered. The report was based on findings of an 11-- member mission from the two agencies, which visited the country from March 9 to April 1 in 1998. This years yield would be about 47.5 million tones, 3.6 percent below last year's production. The shortfall was due to one of Indonesia's worst droughts this century. The report said the Indonesian government planned to import about 1.5 million tones of rice between April and September but this would still leave a deficit of two million tones. The shortfall would have to be made up by the international community in order to help the country to revive its battered economy. The major challenge facing the country was to ensure the food supply for some 7.5 million poor people since rice and overall food prices have increased by about 60 percent in the last 12 months, the report said.

ASSIGNMENT 24:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese Vietnam on Wednesday said it would join the Association of Southeast Asian Nations (ASEAN) next year, dispelling speculation that Hanoi might put off membership until it. was better prepared. "Vietnam is now actively preparing all necessary conditions to become a full member of ASEAN next year," Deputy Prime Minister Phan Van Khai told business people over lunch organised by the Switzerland - based World Economic Forum (WEF), which is hosting a three day meeting here. Khai said that Hanoi would also participate in other regional organisations and would join the 17 - member Asia Pacific Economic Cooperation (APEC) forum "When it is possible".

88 In Jakarta, Vietnamese Deputy Foreign Minister Vu Khoan was quoted as saying that his country would file an application for ASEAN membership by the end of this month or early in November. Khoan, who was speaking after meeting Jakarta - based ASEAN Secretary - general Ajil, Singh, said he did not expect any difficulties in joining, as quoted by the Antara news agency. APEC 's members include the ASEAN countries- - Brunei; Indonesia, Malaysia, the Philippines, Singapore and Thailand- - as well as the United States, Canada, Japan and China. An informal APEC leaders meeting will be held in Indonesia next month. Vietnam, which gained observer status in ASEAN in 1992, has said it is keen to become a full member of the group, which has ambitious programmes for cooperation, including the launch of an ASEAN Free Trade Area within 10 years. ASEAN officials had hoped that Vietnam might join ASEAN before leaders of the group 's six current members hold their next summit in Thailand in December 1995. "There are already regulations for cooperation in ASEAN. Once we are a member we will follow all regulations," Khai told reporters later, adding that Hanoi would work with others in Southeast Asia to ensure regional peace. Khai said his government would push ahead with reforms to improve conditions for foreign investment by putting a new legal framework and better administrative procedures in place. "We deeply understand that Vietnam is facing great challenges of global economic competition and so must try hard to do away with the danger of being left far behind by neighbouring countries, "he said

ASSIGNMENT 25:
Translate the following texts into Vietnamese 1. Ngnh sn xut pht trin ng k trong thi k ti thit nn kinh t ca Philippines sau Chin tranh Th gii th II. Vic kim sot hng ho nhp khu ca chnh ph thc y s pht trin ngnh cng nghip nh sn xut cc mt hng tiu dng cho th trng trong nc. Vo nhng nm 70, chnh ph xy dng bn c khu kinh t nhm tng cng sn xut hng ho xut khu. Cc ngnh cng nghip trong cc khu ch xut ny c khuyn khch sn xut cc mt hng xut khu truyn thng. Nhng c khu kinh t ny thu ht vn u t ca nc ngoi vo Philippines mt phn nh vo chnh sch min thu cho cc doanh nghip c vn u t nc ngoi. Xy dng thnh cng nhng c khu kinh t ny to tin cho s ra i cc khu cng nghip c qui m ln hn. Chng hn nh, cn c hi qun Subic Bay ca M trc y nay tr thnh mt khu thng mi-cng nghip khng l Manila. Mt khu cng nghip-thng mi ln vi c s h tng hin i v c min thu thu ht cc ngnh cng nghip sn xut hng xut khu v u t nc ngoi. 2. Vit Nam n lc duy tr s n nh chnh tr x hi, pht trin kinh t v quan h ngoi giao trong nhng nm gn y. Nhng thay i tch cc ca lut php nh hng khng nh n tnh hnh sn xut, ti chnh v thng mi. Nh nng nghip thch ng vi th trng t do nn Vit Nam c xp l nc xut khu go ln th hai trn th gii sau Thi Lan. Ti Thnh ph H Ch Minh v vng ph cn nhng hot ng dch v v sn xut pht trin v thay i nhanh chng. Kinh t pht trin mnh mt phn nh vo ngun u t vn v cng ngh ca gn 2 triu Vit Kiu cc nc trn th gii. a s h quay tr v Vit Nam u t v lin lc vi b con.

89

3. Ch 1 nm sau khi lnh cm vn ca M -c bi b, cc cng ty n-c gii kht khng l nh- Coca-cola, Pep si- Cola -c h-ng -u i v vn, chnh sch tip th v cc -u i khc theo lut u T- N-c Ngoi, nn cc cng ty ny dn dn thm nhp th phn ca cc nh sn xut trong n-c. Cc sn phm khc cng ri vo hon cnh t-ng t. Bia Si Gn phi cnh tranh quyt lit vi cc cng ty bia lin doanh vi n-c ngoi. Cc nh sn xut bt git trong n-c, mc d c th p ng nhu cu trong n-c n nm 2005, nh-ng li b cc cng ty khng l nh- Procter & Gamble v Unilever dn vo th b. 4. bo v vic sn xut trong n-c, cc nh sn xut trong n-c ngh vi chnh ph mt s bin php. Th nht, nh n-c nn c k hoch pht trin dnh ring cho vic u t- n-c ngoi v lnh vc kinh doanh v phn b theo vng a l v khng nn khuyn khch u t- n-c ngoi vo vic sn xut ra cc sn phm m cc doanh nghip trong n-c c kh nng sn xut -c nh- n-c gii kht, bt git, giy v thuc l. Th hai, vic cp giy php nn -c p dng cho cc cng ty lin doanh hay cc doanh nghip c vn u t- n-c ngoi tham gia vo cc d n i hi c nhiu vn, cng ngh cao hay sn xut cc mt hng xut khu. Th ba, l nn c mt o lut chng i vic cnh tranh khng lnh mnh c th dn c quyn kinh doanh, ph gi lm hi ng-i tiu dng. 5. Trong ting Vit, t nc va c ngha l quc gia, va c ngha l nc, mt lin kt v ngn ng m mi rng buc cng thy r rng sau mt chuyn i thm vng t ph nhiu nht Vit Nam: ng bng sng Cu Long. Do ph sa bi p ca dng sng Cu Long lm phong ph va la y p ny, tng trng cho ngun lng thc ca c nc cng nh phong cch sinh hot k cn sng nc ca c dn trong vng. i vi du khch, ng bng sng Cu Long l mt trong nhng a ch tham quan p nht ng Nam , kt hp ci k o ca vng sng nc lung linh vi cnh quan y phn khi ca mt nn vn ho vui ti th hin qua cch sinh hot ca dn a phng cng hot ng thng mi. Trong khi nhng thnh ph ln nh Cn Th, M Tho, Long Xuyn lp thnh th vng cho cc tnh ca ng bng sng Cu Long th mng li knh rch mnh mng li l ci duyn c mt khng hai ca vng ny. Sinh hot vui nhn ca vng ny khng ging my vi cch sinh hot ca Thnh ph H Ch Minh. Tuy nhin iu khng c ngha l phi kh khn lm mi ti c ng bng sng Cu Long thot khi ci n o no nhit ca thnh ph ln nht Min Nam ny. Ch mt chng ba gi ng h bng xe trn Quc l 1 l bn l bn n M Tho, th ph ca tnh Tin Giang v l im xut pht tt cho cuc thm d vng ng bng ny.

90

CHAPTER 3:
ASSIGNMENT 1:
II. EXERCISES:
A. 1. change of form 2. change of meaning 3. change of form 4. change of meaning 5. change of form B

ASSIGNMENT KEYS

6.the jug contains water/ the jug of water/ 7. a car was bought by John/ John owned a car/ A car belonged to John. 8. the day is hot/ the day, which is hot 9. a blue long dress of mother/ mother has a blue long dress 10. the house of Peter/ Peter is the owner of the house/ Peter owns the house C. 1. the place where doctor works/ the docter owns the office 2 someone is treated by the doctor 3. thec doctor owns the book 4. the relative of the doctor/ the kinship 5. the hand is part of the doctor 6. the doctor owns the house D. 1. the same in meaning 2. different in meaning 3. the same in meaning 4 . the same in meaning 5. the same in meaning 6. the same in meaning 7. the same in meaning 8. different in meaning 9. the same in meaning 10. different in meaning E.

91 1. Where did you have/ get your shirt made? 2. Da Lat, which is surrounded by the great/imposing hills and mountains, takes up/covers/is situated in a large area on the Lam Vien Plateau. 3. Despite the great improvement in the woman status, other things must be done to improve womens health, nutrition and education. 4. Nowadays, the world has been facing a number of serious problems in spite of the fact that there have been dramatic progress in science, technologyand knowledge. One of the problems is the population explosion/boom in the developing countries. The population is growing in geometric progression while thee production of goods is growing in arithmetic prgression . 5. Charles Dickens, who belongs to the school of critical realism, is one of the greatest novelists in the world. What we value in his works is the criticism about evils and the contrast between the wealth and poverty in the English bougeois society of his time. The world he describes is that of the middle and lower classes in London.

ASSIGNMENT 2:
II. A. 1. b. B. 1. Foreign tourists usually at Kinh Do Hotel for this hotel has been recommended by their friends. 2. Since the USA lifted the embargo against Vietnam, many foreign countries have been investing in Vietnam. 3. Hue is famous for its delicious dishes and beautiful landscapes. 4. The participants discussed the causes of pollution environment. 5 . A motorcycle rider was robbed at Kampung early yesterday morning. C. 1. change word order 2. change structure/ change word collocation 3. change set expression 4. change the meaning of the verb and adjective 5. omitting relative clause D. 1. Thac Mo is a hydroelectric works with a designed of 150000 KW, annually produce 600 million KWH/ has an average annual output of 150000 KWH. 2. To construct this, nearly 15 million cubic meters of earth and stone must be dug up and banked up; over 350000 cubic meters of filtering layers were embanked; about 220000 cubic 2.a 3. a 4.a

92 meters of concrete were used and nearly 7000 tons of equipment and metal structures were installed. 3. Despite such enormous volume, the government has decided to have the construction finished in two years since the demand in power supply of southern localities has become very pressing. 4. So far, the construction units have carried out about 90% of the dug-up earth volume, concreted some 40% of the concrete volume. 5. According Mr. Nguyen Ba Man, head of the work managing committee, nearly all the basic items have met the demand in construction speed. 6. In mid November 93, the Prime Minister Vo Van Kiet came to inspect the building of Thac Mo Hydroelectric works. 7. The field leaders assured the Prime Minister that they already have grounds to ensure the operation of Turbine 1 in June 1994. 8. The task of blocking the current of Song Be River will start in December. 9. Thus, there will be a significant coincidence when Turbine 1 of Thac Mo Hydro-electric Plant starts operating. The North-South 500 KV transmission line will also be completed simultaneously. 10. With these sources of power in 1994, the South will basically free itself from the hunger for electricity.

D.
1. Mc d k t nm 1990, ngn sch nh n-c dnh cho cc tr-ng hc -c tng ln nh-ng vn cn rt thp so vi nhu cu trang b y cho tr-ng hc v ci tin cht l-ng o to. 2. Tng thng Putin khng nh rng n-c Nga lun coi trng mi quan h vi Vit Nam , ng-i bn truyn thng v l i tc chin l-c ng Nam . 3. Ng-i ta lp d n tng thm c hi hi nhp cho 3000 tr em khuyt tt ba tnh , mt vng ni, mt vng duyn hi Min Trung v mt vng su vng xa 4. H tho lun mt lot cc bin php nhm mc ch bo m s hp tc ton din v kinh t, th-ng mi, khoa hc v k thut. 5. Ng-i ta ang thc hin mi n lc nng cao nhn thc ca ph n v vic h c quyn -c h-ng s an ton lao ng , hay iu kin v sinh lao ng thng qua mng l-i truyn thng m rng. 6. R rng rng cc tr-ng hc cc tnh pha nam c nhiu phng my v phng thc hnh -c dng vo vic ngoi ng hn cc tr-ng cc tnh pha Bc. 7. c bn d n u t- n-c ngoi cho gio dc. Vn u tch yu t Ngn Hng Th Gii v Ngn hng Pht trin Chu .

93 8. 38 trong s 50 sinh vin ngoi ng -c bo Vietnam Courier ni rng h khng thch lm vic cho cc cng ty -c n-c ngoi u t-. 9. Vit Nam v Trung Quc ng m cc cuc m phn k kt mt hip nh v lnh th v bin gii v mt hip nh v lnh hi tr-c nm 2000. 10. Mi y chnh ph d-a ra bin php khch l nh- gim thu hoc cho vay -u i cho nhng ch nhn s dng nhiu cng nhn n.

ASSIGNMENT 3:
Translate the following sentences into Vietnamese 1. Since early in the last lunar month, Tet has already roamed around the vicinities of Hanoi. 2. The peasants in the suburbs are probably the ones to feel the presence of Tet before anyone else because all their tasks from taking care of vegetables, fruits, grass, flowers to fattening pigs and poultry are for Tets sake. 3. Moving down from Kinh Bac, we will see immense fields of flowers especially gladioli of all colors. 4. Adjacent to the inner city are flower districts: Nhat Tan, Nghi Tam, Quang Ba with a number of varieties: dark pink peach blossoms, juicy golden kamquat, purplish violet and bright red gerbera . 5. A few year ago, here was a vast land of flowers sufficiently meeting the need of ornamental plants for Hanoi people. 6. The local inhabitants have long been artisans devoting their lives to growing flowers. 7. It is a regret to see the narrowing flower acreage due to a change in business of a number of artisans. 8. Some have sold their land and left their occupations forever. Others have turned to building luxury villas rented out as mini hotels to foreign tourists with their own capital or in cooperation with those who have capital. 9. Stores and shops have musroomed, selling all kinds of goods from the most popular to the top-graded ones. 10 No wonder why Hanoi has changed and been developed in the open-door time. Hopefully, Hanoi and its people will always deserve the land of age-old culture. B 1. Mn trnh din chnh ca l hi l mt mn din mang tn t Lnh Chim u d-c trnh din ng thi ba sn khu ln khu trung tm. 2. Ton b khu vc quanh n tp trung c kn ng-i, ch cha my khong nh cho nhng nghi l -c tin hnh.

94 3. gim bt chi ph trong vic tng kh nng tip cn cu tr em tn tt vi gio dc, chnh ph pht ng ch-ng trnh gio dc v hi nhp cng ng. 4. Trong nhng nm gn y lp li trt t cng cng, H Ni di mt s khu ch tm n nhng vng -c qui nh. Nh-ng trong s 4 khu ch -c qui nh , th ch c ch ng Tm -c di t khu dn c- ng a sang khu vc i La. 5. Ngoi vic u t- t ngn sch nh n-c, tt c cc tr-ng hc phi tm cc ngun ti chnh khc mua dng dy hc. Tuy nhin, cc ngun ny ch bng 13% ngn sch nh n-c dnh cho cc tr-ng ph thng v 21% cho cc tr-ng i hc. 6. Tng thu nhp ngn sch nh n-c t xp x mc ra ban u. Nhng ngun chi tiu bnh th-ng vn -c m bo, trong khi cc khon chi bt th-ng cho cc vng b bo, lt, hn hn vn -c thc hin. Vic thm ht ngn sch nh n-c -c gi mc cho php l 3,6% tng thu nhp quc ni vo nm 1998, thp hn nm 1997 l 4,2%. 7.. S pht trin kinh t ca Vit Nam phi -c xt trong hon cnh chin tranh ko di. Hon cnh chin tranh y gy ra nhiu thit hi v sinh mng v ti sn cng nh- cc cng trnh cng cng v ti nguyn. 8. Mng l-i truyn hnh ang xy dng rng khp c n-c. Ngoi nhng i truyn hnh t-ng i hin i, c t lu i nh- i truyn hnh H Ni v Thnh Ph H Ch Minh, cn c 25 i thuc cc tnh -c thnh lp vo nm 1988. Nhng i truyn hnh ny s truyn nhng ch-ng trnh quan trng ca i truyn hnh trung -ng v pht ch-ng trnh ca i mnh. 9. Hi Lin Hip Ph N Vit Nam -c c i din Quc Hi v ch tch hi -c quyn tham d cc cuc hp th-ng k ca Hi ng B Tr-ng by t quan im ca Hi v ngh nhng iu l lin quan n ph n. 10. Gia nh Vit Nam chu nh h-ng r rt ca nn vn minh nng nghip. Do chnh sch m ca, nn vn minh cng nghip ang tc ng tng ngy, tng gi vo cuc sng gia nh Vit Nam.

ASSIGNMENT 4:

95 A. 1. to give information 2. about invironmental protection / to be more exact, it is about deforestation. 3. It depends on the leaners ability. 4. yes/ a bilingual dictionary and the context could help to discover the meanings of these words. 5.yes 6. `

NN PH RNG

S gia tng dn s l mt nhn t gy ra nn ph rng nhit i. Tuy nhin, nu cho rng vic m rng mt nn nng nghip t cung t cp nui sng nhiu ming n hn l nguyn nhn chnh, th y l mt gii thch v cn c. i b phn rng Chu M La Tinh, N v Thi Bnh D-ng b tn ph l do vic khai hoang trng cc loi nng sn xut khu v do cc hot ng bun bn g , ch khng phi do nn du canh, du c- v t in gy nn. Hng nm hot ng bun bn g ph hu 4500 km2 rng, phn ln g -c xut khu sang M v Nht. Mi lin h gia nn ph rng v nhu cu thnh lp x hi phn vinh -c thy r nt nht Trung M v Brazin ni nhng cnh rng nhit i b bin thnh ng c chn th v vic nui gia sc mang li cc khon li nhun xut khu gip tr n n-c ngoi. Khon n n-c ngoi khng l ang nng ln vai dn ngho ch yu -c dng trang tri cho cc khon mua sm xa x ca chnh ph v qun i. Vic xy dng cc in trang chn th rng ln l nguyn nhn chnh dn n vic ph hu 2000 km2 rng nhit i hng nm Trung v Nam M. t khai hoang ch yu dng cho vic nui b xut khu phc v cho ngnh cng nghip thc n nhanh Bc M, Chu u v Nht- vng xng vi tn gi l vng giao l-u hamburger A. 1. to give information 2. about Vietnam,its language and people 3. It depends on the leaners ability. 4. yes/ a bilingual dictionary and the context could help to discover the meanings of these words. 5.yes COUNTRY Our ancestors drank the water from the Red River, Da River, Me Kong River and tried hard/ spare no pain to protect them. Just think about the fact that very few languages in the world enjoy the uniformity as in the case of our mother tongue. In Vietnam, the word nuoc (in the river, lake and sea) have a synonym and homonym of the word nuoc signifying homeland.

96 Here like an immortal bloc the rivers and people are closely linked to the nature and people by a kind of everlasting cement. That is the patriotism of the Vietnamese people. In the world, there are many countries where people cannot communicate with one another when they travel from one province to another. In Vietnam, on the contrary, no matter where they are from, the north or the south, people are able to understand one another right at the first meeting.

ASSIGNMENT 5:
A. 1. Trong lch s loi ng-i khoa hc -c xem nh- c s mnh gii phng con ng-i khi s ngu dt, s m tn, gim i ngho v tng tm hiu bit ca con ng-i v th gii. 2. T N. A ca ngi cc nh khoa hc ca thi i l cc nh truyn b nh sng, nhng ng-i s xua tan bng m v m ra con -ng cho con ng-i chinh phc thin nhin. Trong thi k , nhng pht minh khng t-ng nh- my bay, tu ngm v in thoi -c d bo tr-c. 3. Nhng ai quan tm n ngnh cng ngh my tnh tin rng chng ta ang tri qua mt cuc cch mng v my tnh. Ti sao cuc cch mng ny xy ra ? iu ny c mang li hu qu g cho x hi? tr li nhng cu hi ny, cn pha s l-c v lch s my tnh. 4. My tnh u tin -bn tnh , do ng-i Trung Quc pht minh cch y 5000 nm l tin thn ca my tnh hin i sau ny. Cho n th k th 17, Chu u ch-a c g c th snh bng bn tnh v tc cng nh- chnh xc trong tnh ton. 5. My tnh -c pht trin ng thi c, Anh v M tng thm tc cng nh- chnh xc trong tnh ton cn cho vic gii m thng ip ca k th. 6. Ngy nay , nhiu cng vic trong cc khu sn xut v dch v do con ng-i m trch c th -c thc hin nhanh hn v t tn km hn nh s tr gip ca cng ngh my tnh v cc thit b -c my tnh kim sot. 7. Ng-i my ang dn thay th cng nhn trong dy chuyn sn xut nh- nh my ch to t Fiat ca v Nissan ca Nht. Vo nm 1980, 50 robot -c cc cng ty ca c s dng chng hn nh- hng General Motors Ford, Nissan v Simpson Pope 8. Cng ty no khng s dng cng ngh my tnh u khng th cnh tranh -c vi cc i th p dng cng ngh ny. Bng chng l s tht bi ca cng nghip sn xut ng h Thu S trong 2 nm va qua do b ng h in t cnh tranh nn tht thu 200 triu la mi nm.

97 9. Cng vi vic c gii ho mt s qui trnh sn xut, b-c u gy ra nn tht nghip vi s l-ng ln. Nhng ngh nhn lnh ngh trong ngnh tiu th cng nghip vn khan him tr-c y, nay bng d-ng t h cm thy tha d- v thiu k nng trong nn cng ngh hin i. 10. Nhng t-ng khoa hc v i ny pht trin vo th k 18 v 19. Cuc cch mng cng nghip Anh vo cui th k 18 cng cng c nim tin vo mt x hi khoa hc k thut mc d li nhun x hi thu vo khng b -c chi ph x hi b ra . B 1. Dung Quat Bay is to the northeast of Binh Son District, QN Province. It is 18 km long and is protected by mountain ranges. 2. To the south of the bay is an area of flat land having geographical structure with an area of tens of square kilometers. 3. Here will be formed / established heavy industry and chemical zones, oil refineries, sea products processing zone, light industry zone, and a modern urban residential area with about 600000 inhabitants./ with a population of about 600000. 4. Another advantage is that Dung Quat lies about 12 km from roadway, railway lines, power transmission line and the trans-Vietnam optic cable. Thev supply of fresh water for this area is very convenient with a reserve of about 3 billion cubic meters per year taken from the Tra Bong River. 5. Today, we are going through a period of profound social changes like that of the first industrial revolution. It may be necessary for us to re-define the very notion of work itself.

ASSIGNMENT 6:
A. Translate the following sentences into English. 1. The silt from the Mekong River helps to bring an ample granary representing the whole countrys source of food as well as the local inhabitants riverside lifestyle 2. The Mekong river itself with its huge tributaries and small canals navigable for tiny boats creates a majesty landscape as it flows through VN, the last part of its 4500 km-long journey, pouring into the East Sea. 3. It is significant that these overseas Vietnamese always direct their attention to their homeland, cherish a close link with their families and preserve the national identity which typifies the Vietnamese. 4. In addition to their support for their relatives, a number of overseas Vietnamese have contributed to the welfare of their country and taken part in relief movements to help those who suffer from natural calamities. They have also participated in the charity work following the tradition the luckier should help the sufferer. 5. Before 1988, the effect of the banking system on the development and macro-economic management was minimal. In order to encourage the banking system to play a more constructive role, the government has taken new measures including the reorganization of the

98 banking system, the introduction of restrictive credit policies, and new policies on interest and free trade of gold in market. 6. The government implemented a comprehensive reconstructuring of wages and salaries of the governmental employees with a consolidation of consumer subsidies into the nominal wage structure. Though the monthly minimum wage increased, real salaries have declined substantially as a result of inflation. 7.The survey conducted by the VWU shows that traditional contraceptive methods have been widely used. The survey also indicates that 39% of married women used modern methods, the most frequent method being intra uterine device (IUD). B. 1. Nhng ng-i khi x-ng ra vic dng nng l-ng nguyn t nhn mnh rng th gii ny ri y chc cn s tr thnh mt th gii ca nguyn t. Ng-i ta cng cho rng nhng ng-i chng i li vic s dng nguyn t ang chng li tro l-u ca lch s v c mi quan h gn gi vi dng h Luddites vn l nhng ng-i ch tr-ng p ph my mc ngay t khi cuc cch mng cng nghip bt u. 2. Cc bc s cho thy ln u tin h c th ti to cc h min nhim ca nhng ng-i b nhim vi rt bnh AIDS bng cch t ngt tng s l-ng t bo mu m vi rt HIV hu dit. 3. Trong lnh vc o to y khoa, nhng vic lm -c trong nhng nm qua -c nh du bng s kin ni bt l vic nhiu chuyn gia v o to y khoa , nhiu tr-ng i hc trn th gii dt vn phi xem xt li ni dung o to i ng cn b y t . 4. Ng-i thy thuc ngy nay nn l ng-i ca sc kho . V vy ng-i thy thuc cn phi bit pht hin , gii quyt , phc hi nhng vn sc kho ca c nhn v cng ng. 5. R rng rng mt thn th kho mnh gip cho mt tm hn lnh mnh, v chnh nhng tm hn lnh mnh iu khin h-ng i ca h thng gi tr. Mt ng-i kho mnh l mt ng-i kho mnh v mt th cht ln tinh thn. 6. Ngy nay con ng-i c khuynh h-ng lo u v sc kho th cht. Tuy nhin ti mun nhn mnh ti tm quan trng ca sc kho tm l. Mnh kho v mt tinh thn l rt quan trng v l mt ng-i thc s kho mnh l ng-i t -c s thng bng hp l gia th cht v tinh thn.

99

ASSIGNMENT 7:
1. The achievements of the renovation process in the past ten years have provided opportunities for women to obtain their goals. Their lives have been improved and women have become less burdened. Social services have helped to ease their housework and create favourable conditions for them to participate in social activities. 2. The Vietnam Womens Union which represents Vietnamese women nationwide , has renovated their organization and work style , thus attracting more and more women to social activities. It has also helped women deal with difficult matters of every life. It has proposed to the state laws and policies that make full use of womens potentials in the process of renovation. 3. Identification of the factors that leads to fast effective foreign language learning has become increasingly important because of a majority of learners who are very anxious , as adults, to learn a foreign language for a specific purpose : business, study, and diplomacy. The requirements for effective language learning may be taken into account in terms of the learners, the teachers and the curriculum. 4. The greatest attraction to the tourists is the age-old traditions typical of the Vietnamese culture. Thousands of historical and revolutionary relics have been graded by the government , hundreds of which have high artistic and historical value . Vietnam is a large community consisting of 54 ethnic groups with different traditions , customs and unique folk culture. hundreds of traditional handicraft villages have produced thousands of famous handicraft and fine art products. 5. If tourists go to an ethnic minority region, they will have an opportunity to engage in other fascinating cultural activities typical of the rainforest region. Take the buffalo stabbing ceremony as an example. Tourists should have to be present about a week before the ceremony to join the local inhabitants in looking for a suitable kind of bamboo to repair the Rong House (The community House) and to make a Neu tree ( The New Year Tree) to chase evil spirits. The ceremony provides tourists with a chance to observe the decoration of jars and the way they are chosen to store wine. They also have an opportunity to observe the way people choose the buffalo for the ceremony. 6. Social welfare is a major policy of Vietnam which has its origin in the age-old national traditions of solidarity and mutual assistance. The basic principle of the policy is to combine the responsibility of the state, the community, and the efforts of each individual within the society. This policy is being gradually extended to all the inhabitants in various forms. 7. Economic backwardness and the danger of lagging behind in the economic development are the great concerns of all the Vietnamese at home and abroad . If Vietnam lags far behind other countries, it will be a supplier of raw materials and cheap labour in the international division of labour. It will have to accept an inferior position and losses in the international cooperation and competition. This is the great challenge facing Vietnam in the current international context. 8. The humanism of the Vietnamese diplomatic line constitutes a typical characteristic. Though the Vietnamese have been victims of countless aggressions, they never lose their compassion . Also, their compassion is a factor which creates the strength and the diplomacy of the nation. Nguyen Trai, a national hero of the 15th century, left a legendary guiding principle which remains today: Using great justice to vanquish cruelty Humanism to subdue brutality

100

ASSIGNMENT 8:
Translate the following text into English

Beijing may be the seat of political power, but Shanghai can lay claim to the title of commercial capital. Historic sites date back less than 80 years in Shanghai, and yet most visitors fall under the spell of this unique city where ambience is everything. The very name Shanghai still sends a ripple of excitement down most spines. It was a minor weaving and fishing town until the mid 19th century, when it began to develop as a trading and industrial center. Entrepreneurs and carpetbaggers from all over the world descended and developed it into one of the world's most cosmopolitan and sophisticated cities. From the 1920s on it became increasingly notorious as the place where anything could - and usually did - happen. Banks and commercial companies of all kinds built opulent head offices for themselves overlooking what were then open rice fields beyond the banks of the Huangpu river. This whole stretch has survived the busy bulldozers and today it forms a unique open - air museum of 1930s architecture. A stroll along the Bund is a must for everyone who visits what is still regarded by many as China's leading city. Skyscrapers, including some of the world's tallest buildings, have sprouted where the rice used to grow. The most prominent is the Oriental Pearl TV Tower - if time allows, the panoramic views from the upper levels make an unforgettable experience. The past is still tangible in sections of the former French concession, with its elegant villas and tree - lined streets. Around the corner from the Bund, the Peace Hotel and its venerable Jazz Band Are the best-known survivors from a more gracious age, but Shanghai has many other exquisite hotels from the 1930s, most of which are being lovingly restored to their former glory. Shanghai boasts one of the world's truly great museums, opened in 1996. It would be impossible to tour the entire treasure huose in a short visit, but even an hour in the galleries devoted to the bronzes, stones sculptures and ceramics will provide lasting memories.

ASSIGNMENT 9:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese Ngy hm qua, trong bi din vn chnh pht biu ti trng i Hc Quc Gia H Ni, Tng B Th Giang Trch Dn ku gi gii tr Vit Nam v Trung Quc n lc nhm tht cht tnh hu ngh gia hai nc, gp phn vo s nghip ho bnh v pht trin chu cng nh trn ton th gii. Tng B Th-Ch Tch nc Trung Quc ni vi sinh vin: Cc bn tr thn mn, chnh cc bn l nhng ngi to ra tng lai ti sng v tng lai thuc v cc bn. Tng B Th Giang Trch Dn nhn mnh rng mi quan h Vit -Trung s pht trin tt p trong th k 21, trong n lc chung ca thanh nin hai nc l khng th thiu.

101 ng ni: th h tr c hai nc phi theo ui l tng ca mnh v lao ng khng mt mi xy dng Ch Ngha X Hi. ng pht biu rng: Gii tr Trung Quc v Vit Nam cn k tha v pht huy mnh m tinh thn cch mng ca cha ng, c t tng vng vng, chm ch hc tp, n lc v s nghip pht trin Ch Ngha X Hi, v s giu c v thnh vng ca mi nc. ng hy vng gii tr Trung Quc v Vit Nam s gn gi, duy tr v pht trin mi quan h Vit-Trung, trao i v hc hi ln nhau tng cng hiu bit. ng bo m ng v Chnh ph Trung Quc s hon ton ng h s trao i . Ch tch nc Giang Trch Dn ni: Trong lch s, c Vit Nam v Trung Quc u b quc xm lc nhng chng ta u nh bi chng, gii phng dn tc v thng nht t nc. Theo ng tnh hu ngh gia Vit Nam v Trung Quc khng ch xut pht t lch s m cn t thc tin, nh Ch Tch H Ch Minh tng nhn mnh hai dn tc l ng ch, l anh em. ng ni quan h Vit-Trung da trn c s tin tng ln nhau, s n nh lu di, tin , tnh lng ging thn thin v s bo m . ng ni thm: Hp tc trn c s hiu bit ln nhau l cu ni v cng l mc tiu cho tng lai thnh vng. Ch Tch nc Giang Trch Dn ri H Ni ngy hm qua n min Trung Vit Nam. , ng i thm c Hu, c UNESCO cng nhn l di sn th gii, v gp g cc ng ch lnh o ca thnh ph cng Nng. Theo lch trnh, ng s n thm ph c Hi An v cng ty dt may Ho Th trc khi kt thc chuyn i thm ba ngy n Vit Nam.

ASSIGNMENT 10:
Translate the following text into English Concerning a poor country like ours, practising thrift and fighting against waste must be always the national policy. In reality, however, waste has still been spreading everywhere. Waste appears in management, using budget, in basic construction investment, in land and office management, in State-owned enterprises, and waste also exists in the masses with costly weddings. Waste has really been a pressing problem of the society and one of the causes which considerably affects the economy of our country. As in the first year (1998), after the decree of

102 practising thrift and fighting against waste passed by the National Assemblys Standing Committee 10th session in Feb 26th 1998 and taking effective since May 1st 1998, the real expenses in 1998, according to reports of 12 Ministries and bodies functionally equivalent to Ministries, reduced in comparison with the balance in 1997, for instance, conference expenses: VND12.8 billion, business expenses: VND12.43 billion, telephone, fax expenses: VND9.57 billion, expenses for great reparation of fixed assets: VND80.94 billion, expenses for purchasing professionally fixed assets: VND153.7 billion. The States budget in 1999 is estimated to continue economizing 10% of estimated regular expenses. Some regular expenses have sharply fell from 30% to 70%, e.g. expenses for purchasing office equipment, for conferences and receptions Reducing expenses statistics while the Decree of practising thrift and fighting against waste is being carried out are really speaking numbers, which show that this campaign is taking a turn for better. These numbers, however, indicate that spending has so far been loose and that it is necessary to limit expenses. Financial inspections and annual balance reports helped to find out a breach of rules of administrative management of many enterprises and administrative bodies. One of the most pressing and costly expenses nowadays is: expenses for medal reception, branch forming celebration, conferences Such festivities have cost so much money for hiring halls, parties, gifts At the end of the year, restaurants are crowded with Gods, most of whom are public servants, because inhabitants have no such budget for those parties. While free inhabitants are leading a poor life and spending thriftily, practising thrift and fighting against waste in subsidy spending mechanism is a must.

ASSIGNMENT 11:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese 1. Thnh ph Gaza- Nhng ng-i lnh o ca Israel v Palestin tin hnh m phn sut m m theo cch ni ca ng Dennis Ross - Phi vin ca Hoa K l mt m tt lnh cho cng vic nhm ph v s b tt trong vic Israel tr hon ruts qun khi th trn West Bank ca Heebron. ng Ross ri khi vn phng ca nh lnh o Palestin- Yasser Arafat, sm hm qua sau 3 g ng h c mt trong khi nhng ng-i tham d m phn vn tip tc cc cuc hi m. ng A ra fat ni : Cuc gp g din ra theo chiu h-ng tch cc v c tnh xy dng. ng cn ni thm rng ng v ng Ross gii quyt mt s khc mc gia ti v ng y, cp mt cch r rng n gi ca chnh ng tun tr-c l ng Ross c bnh vc Israel. ng Ross- d nh s tr v n-c vo ngy hm qua - ng rng: Chng ti c mt lot cc cuc tho lun tt p. Khi cp n cc cuc m phn, ng ni: l mt bui ti

103 lm vic tt p, nh-ng cn mt s vn cn -c gii quyt. Bn trong ta tr s chnh ca ng Arafat, nhm i din Palestin do ng tr-ng on m phn Saeb Erekat dn u tip tc cc cuc bn tho vi Israel do hai ng MaJ Gen Shaul Muha faz v Yitzhak c vn cao cp ca Th t-ng Benjamin Netanyahu dn u. Cc cuc hi m bt u vo chiu Ch Nht Ze ru sa lem v sau chuyn n Gaza. Cc c quan truyn thng Israel phng on rng nu cuc th-ng l-ng thnh cng th ng Ro ss c th hon li chuyn bay ca ng v hai ng Netanyahu v Arafat c th t chc mt cuc hp th-ng nh ni trong ngy hm qua hoc hm nay. Israel sp sa rt qun ra khi Hebron - thnh ph Westbank, vng cui cng b chim ng- vo thng 3 th phi hon li sau mt lot tn cng ca bn khng b Israel. ng Netanyahu, mt nhn vt cng rn -c bu lm th t-ng vo thng 5 va qua, tr hon vic tip tc rt qun, v n lc bo m an ninh cho 500 c- dn ang sng trong th trn ca 130.000 ng-i rp. Ng-i Palestin t chi vic ni li cc cuc m phn v yu cu Israel tip tc rt qun nh- cam kt trong bn Hip -c v quyn t tr -c k kt. Vo ngy Ch Nht ti Hebron, qun i vy bt khong 100 ng-i Palestin sau khi c k nm 2 qu bom vo lnh th ca ng-i Do Thi nh-ng khng c ng-i no b th-ng. H b qun i cha sng thm tra v bt gi trong vng na gi nh-ng sau phn ln -c th ra. Pht ngn vin ca qun i ni rng nhiu ng-i Pale stin vn ang cn b bt gi. Mt ng-i Pale stin ang i ngang qua vng lnh th Beit Hada ssah th b mt ci thang lm bng kim loi ri hoc ai nm t mi nh xung lm b th-ng; ng-i ny -c -a n bnh vin thnh ph cha tr 2. TP H Ch Minh - S l-ng du khch n-c ngoi n Viet Nam ngy cng tng. Theo s liu thng k gn y ca Tng Cc Du Lch Vit Nam th l-ng du khch tng bnh qun hng nm l 30%. Mc d l-ng du kahchs tng, nh-ng tnh trng khch li khch sn gim ng k so vi nhng nm va ri. Hn 6 nm qua,, cc khch sn lin doanh v cc nh khch ch khai thc

104 -c t 85-90% s phng hin c. Hin gi ch cn t mc 60%, thp hn nhiu so vi cc khch sn ca nh n-c v nh khch t- nhn. Mt trong nhng nguyn nhn chnh ca s tt gim l-ng khch l do khch sn lin doanh mc ln nh- nm, iu ny dn n vic cnh tranh khc lit v gi phng v gi dch v. Nhiu khch sn c tng doanh thu thp trong khi li chu mc thu cao, ang tr thnh gnh nng cho cc ng ch v c nhiu khch sn sp sa buc phi ng ca. a s du khch n-c ngoi hm h n Vit Nam tm mt ci g mi m v mun i n nhng vng c v p t nhin v hoang d trong thi gian l-u li ca h. V l do ny, du lch Vit Nam cn t chc li vic qun l v t ra nhng mc tiu nhm tha mn nhu cu hin nay ca du khch. Mc d l-ng du khch vn tng trong nhng nm qua nh-ng s du khch tr li Vit nam ln th hai rt t. R rng rng ngnh du lch Vit Nam vn ch-a sc hp dn du khch. Thm vo , cc im du lch v cc ph-ng tin n i li ch-a t n tiu chun quc t. Vit nam hin c khong 22 tnh v thnh ph ang hon tt nhng k hoch tng th chi tit xy dng cc khu ngh mt cho du khch. Tuy nhin nhng n ny vn ch-a -c trin khai, vn ang cn ang -c tho lun. Mc d hng nm chnh ph chi hng chc t ng nng cp cc di tch lch s quc gia v cc khu ngh mt, nh-ng do s yu km v chuyn mn qun l nn nhng ni ny vn ch-a c th thc y s pht trin ca ngnh du lch n-c nh. ci thin cht l-ng ca cc nh ngh v tng c-ng hot ng ca khch sn, ngnh du lch Vit nam cn chnh ph u t- nhiu hn na. Translate the following text into English More and more Vietnamese people are seeking study abroad at. their own expense. While the number of people who have already done so is relatively small - 2970 from mid 1992 to May this year - the numbers are expected to increase within the next. few years a: the Vietnamese economy strengthens and the government streamlines the procedures to make it. easier. But t he biggest boost to Vietnamese people courageously investing their money for themselves or their children to gain an international standard education has come through the staging of a special overseas education exhibition held in Ho Chi Minh City and Hanoi over the past two months. Called "Edukasia", the. exhibition featured universities, vocational schools and school equipment suppliers from Great Britain, France, Australia, The United States and Switzerland. The exhibition sought to establish what training or education private Vietnamese

105 students were seeking and the overseas institutions companies explained what they could offer. Courses in telecommunications, machine building. the hotel industry, tourism and cooking wt-re particularly featured. Up until now, most Vietnamese students have been going abroad for further study as recipients of international scholarship or funding from foreign government. Vietnam has been annually sending about 77 students and 160 senior level experts abroad through such officially sponsored scheme. Most of the private students have been going to Russia. Some to eastern European countries and a trickle to the Netherlands. Belgium, the USA, Denmark and Thailand. But. in April this year, a temporary halt has been put. on private places being offered to foreign students in Russia and Eastern Europe. While these existing avenues for Vietnamese students have required secondary school graduation and intensive courses in the relevant foreign language and computers, often these schemes were deficient in anticipating the problems foreign private students may encounter, particularly regarding duration and the level of the courses being offered. There has been an avoidable waste of time and money, and an attrition rate.

At "Edukasia", the courses on offer are delivered abroad it Vietnam by correspondence or distant training. Those student who want to go abroad for study must first of all be able to speak English which is an indispensable condition for initial contact: and assimilation of knowledge:

Educational standards are also set, such as marks obtained it each subject and health condition. A number of schools give priority to students with high marks in intelligence tests and offer them scholarship. But 90% of tested students have to pay education fees.

According to Mr. Charles Wilmot, the director of Edukasia, the fees are high, depending on the institution and the courses. But they are reasonably calculated. The lowest level is 2500 USD/year; while the most reputed USA schools and purses generally demand 3000 USD/year to 6000 USD/year. Fees for remote training are less, about 300 USD/year, and graduation diplomat are also recognized as equivalent to the regular training diplomas These institutions are ready to receive Vietnamese students and to facilitate entry visas. The remaining question depends upon a decision by the Vietnamese government. Mr. Wilmot stressed that in general, the accommodation and studying conditions of students in countries where there were Vietnamese students were very good. In Great Britain especially, there are organizations specialized in helping foreign students. Most Vietnamese studying abroad begin their training at the age of 18 to 19, the lowest allowed aged is 13. There is no limit for a maximum age studying abroad depends now only on these students willing to receive an advanced knowledge of the world.

ASSIGNMENT 12:
Translate the following text into English Poor people often have larger families than middle class and upper class people. And people in underdeveloped countries have more children than people in developed countries. More and

106 more experts in population growth see the strong relationship between family size and economic development. In some areas, government family planning services may not be available to poor people due to geographic location. For example, people in rural areas may live too far away from family planning services. Therefore, they don't receive information about ways to control family size. In general, people in urban areas have much more information available to them than people living in rural areas. Urban people have help with family planning, and they have smaller families. So we can say that geography where people live - plays a part in determining family size: Urban families are smaller than rural families. What are the other reasons? Economic development of families and, on a larger scale, of nations, is an important factor in determining family size. People with a lot of money have fewer children. On the other hand, poor people in underdeveloped countries choose to have many children. Why? Because they have to depend upon their children to take care of them in their old age. They have no insurance, pensions, or government help. When they grow old, where can they get help? The answer is simple. They can and will turn to their children. Their children will be adults then, and they will be working. The children can all share the costs and other responsibilities of taking care of their parents. For many poor people, a large family is a way of planning and preparing for the future. We could say that a large family is insurance for old age in some societies.

ASSIGNMENT 13:
Translate the following text into English China's powerful exporters are training their sights on, Vietnam, seeing their southern neighbour as ripe for a boost in purchases of consumer goods and machinery, Chinese executives said here Thursday. But Vietnam has a long way to go before it sees its exports to China grow as few products are likely to break into the more developed Chinese market, the executives said at the opening of a trade fair here. Some 60 firms from Beijing are showing off their wares ranging from cheap plastic toys and ornaments to off - road vehicles at the fair in Hanoi in what is the first exhibition of Chinese goods here since the two countries began patching up their relations. Beijing Jeep, a Sino - American auto manufacturer, is hoping to squeeze into Vietnam's growing car market but is facing stiff competition from Japanese firms already entrenched here, said Beijing Automotive Import Export Corp. (BAIEC) vice president Guo Fengli. "The market here is opening up quite quickly for our products, particularly as we are very competitive in pricing with our rivals," Guo said. BAIEC is looking to set up barter deals with Vietnam but is facing problems finding suitable moods to trade although Guo thinks he may have found the answer in the humble sweet potato. The Chinese firm is planning to trade cars for foodstuffs that will be sold in southern China but would prefer to exchange higher value goods.

107 "We don't know much about what Vietnam has to offer, "said Guo, a point repeated by other traders who were more eager to sell than buy. Cross border trade has boomed since the frontier was reopened in 1991. Officially, two - way trade stands at around 500 million US dollars although the illegal frontier trade is believed to b! much higher, with China enjoying a massive surplus. During a visit to China last week, Deputy Prime Minister Phan Van Khai called for both sides to replace the cross border trade with official agreements between trading companies and manufacturers that would boost sales of Vietnamese products., Vietnam wants to step up exports of coal and oil to southern China's booming manufacturing centres, which are thousands of kilometres (miles) from China's own sources of energy. Khai also called for more sales of rice and other food products and for Vietnam to import more manufacturing machinery and other technology from China.

ASSIGNMENT 14:
Translate the following text into English Saudi Arabia has about 8.,853,000 people. Almost all of these people are Arab Muslims. In other words, they are followers of the Islamic religion. Saudi Arabia is a religious nation. The king of Saudi Arabia is both the political leader and one of the religious leaders of the country. The government laws are Islamic law (Muslim religious law), and the national language is Arabic. The Islamic religion is very important in the Saudi educational system. Before 1950 almost all education in Saudi Arabia was religious education. Students studied the Koran, the Islamic holy book. They tried to memorize as much as possible from this book. There were no colleges or universities before 1949 and only a few elementary and secondary schools. In 1953, the Saudi government established the Ministry of Education. This was really the beginning of the modern educational system in Saudi Arabia. When engineers discovered oil in Saudi Arabia, the country started to become very wealthy. Saudi leaders realized that Western technology was necessary for the country to develop. The leaders still believed that religious education was very important, but a modern country could not develop technologically with only a traditional, religious educational system. They decided to add other subjects to the educational system. They wanted to combine traditional religious education with modern technological education from the West. Religion is still an important part of Saudi education. Now, however, Saudi students study all kinds of other subjects too: languages (especially English), history, science, mathematics, computer technology, etc. Before 1950, there were about 20,000 students in Saudi Arabia. In 1982, there were 1,780,000 students. The educational system has grown faster in Saudi Arabia than in almost any other country in the world. All schools in Saudi Arabia are free.

ASSIGNMENT 15:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese

108 Sau khi t nhiu hi vng vo vic khoan trng cc m du kh ngoi khi Vit Nam, cc cng ty du m khng l trn th gii nhn ra nhng ri ro. Ci gi u t- khng l nh-ng li nhn -c mt khon li nhun cm ci. Tm trng gim i trong s nhng cng ty n-c ngoi tham gia trin lm tr-ng by cc mt hng ca ngnh cng ngh ti cuc Trin lm Du v kh t Quc t ln th hai H Ni. ng Melchior de Matharel, V Tr-ng ng Nam ca hng Total Php pht biu : Kt qu khng phi l t, nh-ng khng ln nh- mt s ng-i hy vng. Nu s ch by gi l khu hiu lm tht vng cc cng ty du la n-c ngoi c th to ngun an i t nhng khm ph y khch l va qua v du do cng ty Mitsubishi v cng ty du Petrornas Cairigali ca Malaisia, v v kh t ca BP, ngoi b bin nam Vit Nam. Vic thm d du kh thm lc a Vit nam l ht sc kh khn. Tuy nhin, ng Matherel ni rng thm lc a Vit Nam l mt ni cha du. S nhit tnh ca nhng ng-i thm d t nhin suy gim vo thng 5 tr-c khi cng ty du BHP ca c thng bo tr l-ng du v tr m i Hng, 375 cy s ng nam thnh ph HCM l t i hn so vi d tr. Ti v tr ny, BHP -c tnh s khi l tr l-ng y khong t 700 n 800 triu thng du, nh-ng hin nay con s y xung 100 n 200 triu thng. Vic sn xut -c d kin bt u vo thng ti, mc khim nh-ng l 25000 thng mt ngy. iu l mt n ging mnh cho BHP, mt cng ty u t- n 240 triu la Vit Nam v mt na ca kinh ph ny -c s dng cho d n i Hng. BHP n u mt hip hi quc t bu chn vo thng 4/1993 c trch nhim trin khai tng kinh ph 1,5 t trong lnh vc ny. BHP chim 43,75% tng s vn ca Hip hi, Petronas chim 20%, cng ty quc doanh Petro-Vietnam chim 15%. Phn 21,25% cn li chia u cho cng ty Total (Php) v cng ty Sumitomo ca Nht. Vo thi im , chnh Nht Bn l khch mua hng chnh ca du th Vit Nam, l din c -c mt c may tt nht.

109 Cng ty Du Kh Vit nam- Nht bn (JVPC), mt chi nhnh ca tp on du kh Mitsubishi thng bo trong thng 6 l c mt s khm ph rt ha hn ti v tr Rng ng. Theo kt qu ghi nhn -c t mt t mt ging du thm d, khu vc khai thc c th c cng cht l-ng nh- v tr m Bch H gn mt a im duy nht hin gi ang -c kinh doanh khai thc Vit Nam. Tr l-ng ca Bch H -c tnh mc cao nht l 3000 triu thng. Nh-ng t nht cn phi mt nm na v cn n vic khoan d na th mi c th xc nh chnh xc -c mc tiu vic thm d ca cng ty Nht. Nhng ng-i bi quan th cho rng cn n khong 5 nm mi nh gi ng v y tr l-ng du ca Vit Nam. Vic thm d v khai thc kh t cng chng t l mt dch v ang gp kh khn, d c may mm c-i vi vi cng ty BP Anh, mt n v m trong thng 9 thng bo l pht hin ra hai ti du kh, -c tnh t -c 57 t mt khi Nam Cn Sn, pha nam thnh ph HCM. Cng ty BHP v cng ty Quc gia Na Uy Statoil mua li cc phn c nh-ng ca cng ty kh t v du kh quc gia n (ONGC) vo nm 1992. Lin hip, vi ONGC nm 55% c phn, BP 30% v Statoil 5% tin hnh thm d v th nghim theo mt hp ng phn chia sn phm vi Vit Nam, mt n v ln l-t nhn 5% tin gp vo, cn c trn quyn li ca mi i tc Chu u. Translate the following text into English The failure of a space shuttle steering jet Wednesday forced NASA to suspend a radar survey of Earth as Endeavour's 10 day environmental research flight passed the halfway mark. The problem was a hindrance to the $384 million space Radar Laboratory but not a danger to the astronauts, the National Aeronautics and Space Administration said. Officials said a fuel temperature sensor failed, disabling a leak detection system in the suspect thruster and triggering a shutdown of five others, called verniers, which are needed to fine-tune the shuttle's orbital path and precisely point cargo bay instruments at targets on the planet. Mission commentator Kelly Humphries late Wednesday called the scientific hiatus "temporary pause" while ground engineers hastily devised a way for shuttle computers to ignore the broken sensor.

110 Maneuvering Endeavour with its 38 larger thrusters would consume too much full and eliminate hope of extending the natural disasters around the globe, according to flight director Rich Jackson. Late Wednesday the shuttle was flying on autopilot and the crew, which has been working in two shifts around the clock since Friday's liftoff from Florida, was enjoying an unexpected time-out., Jackson predicted the software patch would be ready by Thursday afternoon, about 24 hours after the malfunction occurred. "The payloads community and the flight control team are working very hard to regain venire control and minimise the impact. in the intervening time period". Jackson told reporters at Mission Control in Houston. Scientists said the problem would not harm the images but that it would take up to five times longer to process the radar data in their computers.

ASSIGNMENT 16:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese N-c Anh -c chia lm 651 khu vc bu c ng-i dn mi khu vc chn ra mt ng-i i din cho mnh h vin. Anh h thng bu c n gin -c s dng trong cc cuc bu c quc hi theo ph-ng thc b phiu kn. Hin nay, h thng ny c nhng iu chnh ngy cng tr nn ti -u hn. Vic bu c l hon ton t ngun. mi ng-i dn Anh t 18 tui tr nn khng b t-c quyn bu c do phm php, u c th b phiu bu c. Nhng ng-i khng c quyn bu c bao gm: thnh vin ca hong gia, cc nh qu tc l thnh vin ca th-ng ngh vin hoc l c- dn n-c ngoi. Ngoi ra cn c bnh nhn nm vin do c vn v tm thn phm nhn ang thi hnh n v nhng ng-i b kt n, trong vng nm nm tr-c v ti tham nhng.

ng c vin:
Bt c ai trn 21 tui l cng dn n-c Anh cc n-c trong khi thnh v-ng chung hoc l n-c cng ho Ai Len, c tcch th u c th ng c vo quc hi, nhng ng-i khng c quyn ng c l thnh vin ca th-ng ngh vin, tng l, gio s thuc gio hi Anh, gio hi Ai Len, gio hi SctLan v gio hi Thin cha gio La M, nhng ng-i b ph sn, ng-i lm dch v cng cng v nhng ng-i b kt n t t 1 nm tr ln cng khng -c tham gia tranh c. Cc ng c vin trong mt khu vc bu c phi tr mt khong tin 1000 bng nh- l mt khong tin t cc. Nu dnh -c t nht 5% phiu bu c th h s -c nhn li s tin . Tng bu c:

111 Theo nguyn tc, bu c h ngh vin -c t chc 5 nm mt ln. Nh-ng cc cuc bu c th-ng -c t chc tr-c khi kt thc mt nhim k 5 nm. Th t-ng l ng-i c quyn quyt nh thi gian t chc tng bu c. N Hong c th gii tn Quc hi v ku gi mt cuc bu c lp nn quc hi mi. N-c Anh -c chia thnh cc vng gi l khu vc bu c da trn s l-ng dn c- xp x nhau. Tng bu c th-ng -c t chc vo th 5 v mi ng-i vn i lm nh- th-ng l. Do , thi gian bu c rt linh ng ko di t 7h n 22h cho tt c mi ng-i u c th n b phiu. Ti cc a im b phiu, c tri -c pht phiu bu c in tn cc ng c vin khu vc bu c , danh sch th-ng sp xp theo th t anphabe i khi cn c mt bn tm tt v tiu s ng c vin v ng ca h -c i km vi l phiu. Sau , cc phiu khng hp l s b loi v ng-i ta s tin hnh kim phiu i vi s phiu hp l v ng c vin no nhn -c nhiu phiu ng h nht s l ng-i thng cuc v tr thnh thnh vin Quc hi i din cho khu vc ca mnh. Chin dch tranh c: Chin dch tranh c din ra trong vng 3 tun tr-c ngy tng bu c. Chin dch tranh c din ra mi khu vc bu c trn ton quc. Cc ng c vin s dng mi loi ph-ng tin, sch l-c thu ht s ng h ca ng-i dn. Vn ng tranh c: Vn ng tranh c c ngha l nhn vin ca ng a ph-ng i n tng gia nh v hi ng-i dn v nh ca h, xem th l h nh bu ai. Bng cch ny, cc ng c vin c th bit -c nh cng nh- thi ca ng-i dn, t h c th iu chnh cc chin l-c ca mnh. Ngoi ra nhn vin s quay tr li nhng gia nh c ng-i ha l s ng h ng ca h thc gic h b phiu cho ng-i ca ng mnh trong ngy bu c. Mt tin: ng u gm ni vi ln c vin c th t chc mt tin bt c ni no bt c ni c th trong sut chin dch bu c. Khch mi ca h bao nhng ng-i c tm nh h-ng ln ttrong ng, nhng ng-i ting ng h h nh- nh vn, din vin gy nh h-ng i c tri. Nhng cuc mt tin nh- th th-ng -c -a trn vn cc ph-ng tin thng tin i chng.

Thng tin i chng: Do bo v tp ch Anh th-ng l thuc s hu t- nhn v c lp v mt ti chnh i vi cc ng phi chnh tr nn ng-i ch bt hoc ng-i bin tp c th ng h bt c ai h mun.

112 Tuy nhin, i pht thanh v i truyn hnh th khc lun lun cng bng, khng thin v. Ch-ng trnh tin tc -a tin v mi mt ca chin dch tranh c ca cc ng. Trong thi gian ny, cc ng c vin xut hin trn i v tivi sut ngy m, ta c th thy h nh my, x nghip, tr-ng hc, trung tm thanh nin v c cc nng tri. H pht biu cc chnh sch ca ng mnh. Ch-ng trnh i thoi trc tip trn cho php mi ng-i t cu hi cho cc nh lnh o chnh tr. Bn cnh , cc bi t-ng thut, bi bnh lun do cc phng vin ghi li trong cc cuc phng vn vi cc nh lnh o ca cc ng cng -c pht sng. Bn tuyn ngn: Cc ng ln cho xut bn bn tuyn ngn ca ng mnh trong sut chin dch bu c. Mi ng u -a ra bn tuyn ngn ca ng mnh nh- l mt n phm tham kho. N cung cp cho ng-i dn nhng thng tin v chnh sch ca ng, v nhng g h s lm nu h c c. Cc bn tuyn ngn cn bao gm nhng thnh cng tr-c y ca ng. Ngoi ra i khi n cn cha ng s cng kch ca ng ny i vi ng i lp.

ASSIGNMENT 17:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese H Ni ang c gng tng gp i GDP ln 1100 la M trong vng 5 nm ti. K hoch y tham vng ny -c -a ra trn c s 11,9% t l tng GDP hng nm ca thnh ph. Ti i hi i biu ng B thnh ph H Ni -c t chc va qua, cc i biu -c thng bo: nu t l tng tr-ng vn tip tc nh- d tnh th GDP s t khong 15% vo u th k. iu c ngha l GDP tng gp i. i hi cng cp n vn c s CN nh truyn thng ca nn kinh t th tng nhanh b thay th bi cc hot ng CN v nghnh cng nghip dch v-th-ng mi. Ngoi ra i hi cn -c bo co l khong 19% s h gia nh H Ni c th xp vo din h giu. Mc GDP bnh qun nm ngoi ca thnh ph -c -c tnh l khong 650 la. Cao hn so vi 470 la nm 1991 (tc tng tr-ng mnh m). S tng tr-ng ny l kt qu ca hng lot cc d n u ttrong n-c v n-c ngoi -c tnh vo khong 32,570VND (khong 3.275 triu USD).

113 Ph ch tch hi ng Nhn Dn thnh ph H Ni, ng L Xun Hng bo co vi i hi rng: Mt phn ca s vn u t- -c s dng cho qu trnh chuyn giao cng ngh, i mi thit b trong nghnh CN. Phn ln s vn u t- cn li -c dng vo vic thit lp cng ty lin doanh vi i tc n-c ngoi. Vo cui nm 1995 c n hn 210 d n u t- n-c ngoi -c cp giy php kinh doanh trn a bn thnh ph H Ni vi tng s tin ln ti 3,3 t la. ng Tng ni trong s l 1 phn 3 t la -c s dng. iu ny gip H Ni trong vic la chn h-ng c cu li c s kinh t theo h-ng CN-DV thay cho c cu c vi vai tr tr ct ca CN nh v nng nghip truyn thng. Theo li ng Tng, t l sn phm CN, th-ng mi, dch v trong tng sn phm quc ni ca thnh ph H Ni giai on 1991-1995 tng ln n 33,1% i vi cng nghip v 61,6% i vi th-ng mi v dch v. Trong khi t l nng nghip li gim xung tng GDP. cn 5,3% trong

ng Tng cn ni s thay i ca b mt kinh t H Ni cn nh vo s tng vt ca t l tng tr-ng hng nm ca 5 nm tr-c. ng ni t l tng tr-ng 11,9% hng nm cng -c m bo chc chn, con s ny cao hn gp i so vi t l ra nm 1991. ng Tng bo co vi cc i biu rng vo nm 2000 t l tng tr-ng ca thnh ph s t 15% 1 nm. GDP -c tnh t khong 1000 la. Vo thi im t l sn phm cng nghip tng s GDP ca thnh ph H Ni s t 40% tng 7% so vi hin ti. Nm ngnh cng nghip t -c mc ch tr thnh ngnh cng nghip then cht ca thnh ph bao gm: ngnh sn xut thit b in, my mc, c kh; ngnh dt; ch bin thc phm; in t; vt liu xy dng. Trong 5 nm ti H Ni cn khong 9 t USD u t- xy dng pht trin nhng khu cng nghip mi, i mi cc khu cng nghip c, xy dng cc to nh ln trung tm thnh ph lm cc vn phng i din, khu th-ng mi, khu vui chi gii tr, H Ni c khong 10 khu cng nghip v 5 ci khc ang -c xy dng. Nhiu khu cng nghip hin nay cn nhng khong u t- theo chiu su thay th cc k thut c, m rng xy dng nhiu nh my hn na.

114 Tuy nhin ph b th- ng u thnh ph H Ni cn nhc nh cc i biu rng cn phi n lc hn na gi vng s pht trin theo h-ng nn kinh t th tr-ng theo nh h-ng x hi ch ngha. ng cn ni chnh quyn thnh ph H Ni tht bi trong vic xy dng s on kt cc quan h sn xut kinh doanh x hi ch ngha. Trong khi b my hnh chnh cc cp cn yu v vai tr ca ng trong cc t chc kinh t x hi khc nhau vn cn hn ch. Nhng tham vn ca ng Tng cn -c Tng b th- M-i cng c thm, ng Tng ch pht biu vi i hi rng: Bn cnh nhng thnh cng ban u H Ni cn ch n vic pht trin kinh t v xy dng ngun nhn lc. ng ch ni 6% nhn dn thnh ph H Ni tht nghip l mt thch thc m thnh ph cn phi gii quyt. C th l bng cch lp nn cc nhm sn xut t hnh thnh cc c s cng nghip nh v pht trin cng nghip dch v. ng ch ph b th- L Xun Tng ni rng: trong giai on 1991-1995 s l-ng cc gia nh giu tng ln gn 19%. S h ngho gim xung ch cn khong 2%.

ASSIGNMENT 18:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese Lm v-n l mt ngh truyn thng Vit Nam, n xut hin ng thi hay sm hn ngh trng la n-c. Nh-ng VAC ( vit tt ca v-n, ao, chung) l mt m hnh kinh t hin i mi -c -a vo hoat ng cch y 10 nm. Ng-i n-c ngoi n Vit Nam nghin cu m hnh VAC y ni rng: Tuy n khng c hiu qu cao trong vic thc hin qui m sn xut nh-ng l mt m hnh sn xut ng b mang li li ch kinh t ln li ch v mi tr-ng.T nhng ngy u tin ca qu trnh hot ng, m hnh VAC lun gn cht vai tr ca mnh trong s pht trin ca nn kinh t quc dn. Hin nng ang hng ni, nay VAC c mt trn khp 53 tnh vi hn 10 triu ch h s dng m hnh ny. Trong nhng nm gn y VAC v -c pht trin trn hu ht cc vng khp c n-c. Vi chc ngn hecta t canh tc cc tnh Trung du v min v-n cy n qu m rng t 350,000 n 400,000 hecta

115 M hnh VAC -c p dng tr thnh ngun cung cp rau qu chnh cho c n-c, ng thi cng p ng cho nhu cu xut khu..Theo FAO ( T chc L-ng Nng Th Gii) th sn l-ng rau qu Vit Nam t xp x 4 triu tn mi nm. Sn l-ng rau qu bnh qun u ng-i trn th gii l 65 Ki l, chu -Thi Bnh D-ng l 31 kg v Vit nam l 61 kg. Hin nay VAC c mt ngha quan trng trong vic xa i gim ngho i vi cc n-c chm pht trin, t chc hot ng ti ch ngn chn suy dinh d-ng, to dng cc v-n cy hay n in trn khu t trng i ni trc, to ra s pht trin mt nn nng nghip lu di v n nh.mc sng ca cc h nng dn thc hin m hnh VAC -c ci thin ng k vi mc thu nhp hng nm t hot ng VAC t 60% tng thu nhp. Gi tr sn phm VAC chim 1/3 gi tr tng sn phm v s tng hn na. Mc d m hnh VAC pht trin nhanh nh-ng n ch-a -c thc hin ng lot thn. Nu tp trung m rng thm canh loi cy trng tren khp c n-c, th nam c th t -c 8 triu tn mi nm trong vng 10 nm qua, tt c cc vng nng v chuyn mn ha cc sn l-ng rau qu Vit th k 21.

VAC nn -c xem nh- l mt ch-ng trnh nng nghip quc gia. Nu VAC -c khuyn khch pht huy ht mi tim nng ca n th chc chn s t -c hiu qu cao, gp phn vo vic pht trin n-c nh v gp phn vo vic bo v mi tr-ng.

116

ASSIGNMENT 19:
Translate the following text into English Researchers said on Monday they had conclusive evidence an experimental AIDS treatment using plasma transfusions delays the onset of the disease in HIV positive patients and prolongs the lives of AIDS sufferers. DR. Abraham Karpas of the University of Cambridge's department of haematology said, however, that although Passive Immune Therapy (PIT) was "breakthrough" in treating AIDS and had no known side effects it should not be described as a cure. "It is definitely not a cure. There is no cure in sight, but it looks as if it is the best form of treatment," he said in his presentation to a London conference. Karpas said U.S. and French studies on PIT released at the conference confirmed his original research. "Their double - blind, placebo - controlled studies showed that this treatment benefits AIDS patients and prolonged their sure, survival,'' he stated in a telephone interview. He said the studies, conducted by the Hemacare Corporation of California and two Paris hospitals, also showed that PIT helped to delay the onset of full - blown AIDS (Acquired Immune Deficiency Syndrome) in people tested positive for HIV, the virus that causes the deadly disease. Under PIT, patients receive a monthly transfusion of half a litre of plasma taken from healthy HIV - positive individuals. The blood has the red and white cells removes and is free of HIV but has high levels of neutralising antibodies that kill the virus. Karpas said he first discovered in 1985 that people with HIV who were otherwise healthy had high levels of these antibodies in their blood while AIDS patients lost these neutralising antibodies and their ability to fight infections. Four patients in Cambridge were the first to receive the treatment and subsequently small scale trials were carried out in London in 1988 and 1989. But Karpras said he has failed to receive funding for his research in Britain and studies had therefore been set up in the US and France. The Hemancare trial studied the effect of PIT on 220 AIDS patients over 3 years. It found that in the first 12 months the mortality rate was greatly reduced in the group who received the plasma transfusion while those in the control group, where no treatment was given, had a death rate of five time higher. The treated group had one death in 21 people while the placebo group had six deaths in 30. Moreover, the number of AIDS - linked infections was far lower in the treated group and the blood donors themselves also appeared to benefit. The researchers said donating blood appeared to stimulate the production of neutralising antibodies in the blood of HIV - positive patients. The French studies produced similar results, Karpas said he said the U.S. and French studies represented the "first conclusive evidence that PIT is an effective AIDS treatment".

117

ASSIGNMENT 20:
Translate the following text into English Another day she said she knew a priest who woke one night to find a fellow he didn't recognize leaning over the end of his bed. The priest was a bit frightened -naturally enough but he asked the fellow what he wanted, and the fellow said in a deep, husky voice that he wanted to go to confession. The priest said it was an awkward time and wouldn't it do in the morning, but the fellow said that last time he went to confession, there was one sin he kept back, being ashamed to mention it, and now it was always on his mind. Then the priest knew it was a bad case, because the fellow was after making a bad confession and committing a mortal sin. He got up to dress, and just then the cock crew in the yard outside, and to and behold! When the priest looked round there was no sign of the fellow, only a smell of burning timber, and when the priest looked at his bed didn't he see the print of two hands burned in it! That was because the fellow had made a bad confession. This story made a shocking impression on me. But the worst of all was when she showed us how to examine our conscience. Did we take the name of the Lord, our God, in vain? Did we honour our father and our mother? (I asked her did this include grandmothers and she said it did.) Did we love our neighbours as ourselves? Did we cover our neighbour's goods? (I thought of the way I felt about the penny that Nora got every Friday.) I decided that, between one thing and another, I must have broken the whole ten commandments, all on account of that old woman, and so far as I could see-,, 9-n long ac, he remained in the house, I had no hope of ever doing anything else. I was scared to death of confession. The day the whole class went I let on to have a toothache, hoping my absence wouldn't be noticed; but at three o'clock, just as I was feeling safe, along comes a chap with a message from Mrs. Ryan that I was to go to confession myself on Saturday and be at the chapel for communion with the rest. To make it worse, Mother couldn't come with me and sent Nora instead. Now, that girl had ways of tormenting me that Mother never knew of. She held my hands as we went down the hill, smiling sadly and saying how sorry she was for me, as if she were bringing me to the hospital for an operation. "Oh, God, help us!" she moaned. "Isn't it a terrible pity you weren't a good boy? Oh Jackie, my heart bleeds for you! How will you ever think of all your sins? Don't forget you have to tell him about the time you kicked Gran on the shin." "Let me go!" I said, trying to drag myself free of her, "I don't want to go to confession at all." "But sure, you'll have to go to confession, Jackie," she replied in the same regretful tone. "Sure, if you didn't, the parish priest would be up to the house, looking for you. Isnt God knows, that I'm not sorry for you. Do you remember the time you tried to kill me with the bread knife under the table? And the language you used to me? I don't know what he'll do with you at all, Jackie. He might have to send you up to the bishop." I remember thinking bitterly that she didn't know the half of what I had to tell - if I told it. I knew I couldn't tell it, and understood perfectly why the fellow in Mrs. Ryan's story made a bad confession, it seemed to me a great shame that people wouldn't stop criticizing him. I remember that steep hill down to the church, and the sunlit hillsides beyond the valley of the river, which I saw in the gaps between the houses like Adam's last glimpse of Paradise.

118 Then, when she had maneuvered me down the long flight of steps to the chapel yard, Nora suddenly changed her tone. She became the raging malicious devil she really was. "There you are!" she said with a yelp of triumph, hunting me through the church door." And I hope he'll give you the penitential psalins, you dirty little baffler.' I knew then I was lost, given up to eternal justice. The door with the coloured-glass panels swung shut behind me, the sunlight went out and gave place to deep shadow, and the wind whistled outside so that the silence within seemed to crackle like ice under my feet. Nora sat in front of me by

ASSIGNMENT 21:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese 1. Nhn chung sau mt thi gian hot ng tr tr, nn cng nghip dt thu t- nhn ca Thnh ph H Ch Minh -c khi phc v pht trin mc nht nh k t nm 1991.Tuy nhin s pht trin khng n nh bi v hu ht cng vic ca cc x nghip t- nhn u ph thuc vo n t hng ca n-c ngoi.Do vy, h khng th kim sot -c k hoch sn xut, v gi lao ng cho sn phm may mt b cc i tc n-c ngoi qui nh rt thp ( tin cng lao ng nm 1995 ch bng 65%-70% so vi cc nm 1991 v 1992.).Do tnh c th ca ngnh ny, nn l-ng trung bnh ca cng nhn trong ngnh may-thu ch khong 400.000 ng/thng. Vi s cnh tranh gay gt hin nay, bo him x hi chim n 15% v bo him y t l 2% trong tng s l-ng m cc doanh nghip phi ng, v nu nh- k hoch d kin ca bo him x hi -c ph duyt, th gi thnh sn xut s rt cao gy kh khn cho cc nh sn xut Vit Nam trong vieec cnh tranh c hiu qu v chim lnh th tr-ng. gip cc doanh nghip thu-may t- nhn sng cn, ng Nam ngh nh n-c nn sa i t l ng gp ca cc doanh nghip ngoi quc doanh i vi chnh sch bo him x hi nhsau: - Bo him x hi: 10% i vi doanh nghip v 3% i vi cng nhn - Bo him y t cng nhn : 1% i vi doanh nghip v 1% i vi

Nh n-c cng nn ban hnh mt qui nh c lin quan n ng-i lao ng -c cc doanh nghip tuyn dng v o to buc phi lm vic ti thiu l 2 nm. Cc cng nhn lm vic trong

119 cc doanh nghip ngoi quc doanh cn phi -c cp th lm vic. Nu mt cng nhn no mun thi vic th phi -c doanh nghip c qun ng . Tt c mi thnh vin ca cc cng ty may-thu Thnh ph H Ch Minh u ng thc hin y vic ng gp mt phn l-ng vo bo him x hi v y t, th theo ng qui nh ca lut lao ng. 2. Cc ch doanh nghip ca cc cng ty ln TP H Ch Minh nu ra nhng kh khn m h phi -ng u trong vic cnh tranh gay gt vi cc cng ty n-c ngoi, c bit l vi cc cng ty khng l th gii. Ti mt cuc hp bn v : Lm th no khuyn khch u tn-c ngoi v m bo sn xut trong n-c -c t chc ti TP H Ch minh tun qua, cc nh sn xut ca cc cng ty bt git Tico v Lux, M phm P/S, n-c gii kht Tribeco, dt Vit Thng, bia Si gn v cng ty gia cm vt nui TP H Ch Minh u thng nht mt kin l cc doanh nghip trong n-c khng cn sc trong vic cnh tranh vi cc i tc n-c ngoi v h khng -c h-ng chnh sch -u i thu nh- cc doanh nghip c vn u t- n-c ngoi. Ch 1 nm sau khi lnh cm vn ca M -c bi b, cc cng ty n-c gii kht khng l nh- Coca-cola, Pep si- Cola -c h-ng -u i v vn, chnh sch tip th v cc -u i khc theo lut u T- N-c Ngoi, nn cc cng ty ny dn dn thm nhp th phn ca cc nahf sn xut trong n-c. Cc sn phm khc cng ri vo hon cnh t-ng t. Bia Si Gn phi cnh tranh quyt lit vi cc cng ty bia lin doanh vi n-c ngoi. Cc nh sn xut bt git trong n-c, mc d c th p ng nhu cu trong n-c n nm 2000, nh-ng li b cc cng ty khng l nhProcter & Gamble v Unilever dn vo th b. bo v vic sn xut trong n-c, cc nh sn xut trong n-c ngh vi chnh ph mt s bin php. Th nht, nh n-c nn c k hoch pht trin dnh ring cho vic u t- n-c ngoi v lnh vc kinh doanh v phn b theo vng a l v khng nn khuyn khch u t- n-c ngoi vo vic sn xut ra cc sn phm m cc doanh nghip trong n-c c kh nng sn xut -c nh- n-c gii kht, bt git, giy v thuc l. Th hai, vic cp giy php nn -c p dng cho cc cng ty lin

120 doanh hay cc doanh nghip c 100% vn u t- n-c ngoi tham gia vo cc d n i hi c nhiu vn, cng ngh cao hay sn xut cc mt hng xut khu. Th ba, l nn c mt o lut chng i vic cnh tranh khng lnh mnh c th dn c quyn kinh doanh, ph gi lm hi ng-i tiu dng. Th t- nn c chnh sch khuyn khch u t- trong n-c v cho cc doanh nghip trong n-c -c h-ng chnh sch -u i thu nh- cc nh u t- n-c ngoi. Th nm, nn pht ng mt chin dch ng vin ng-i Vit Nam dng hng ni a, to iu kin cho cc doanh nghip trong n-c pht trin.

ASSIGNMENT 22:
Translate the following text into English Poor people often have larger families than middle class and upper class people. And people in underdeveloped countries have more children than people in developed countries. More and more experts in population growth see the strong relationship between family size and economic development. In some areas, government family planning services may not be available to poor people due to geographic location. For example, people in rural areas may live too far away from family planning services. Therefore, they don't receive information about ways to control family size. In general, people in urban areas have much more information available to them than people living in rural areas. Urban people have help with family planning, and they have smaller families. So we can say that geography where people live - plays a part in determining family size: Urban families are smaller than rural families. What are the other reasons? Economic development of families and, on a larger scale, of nations, is an important factor in determining family size. People with a lot of money have fewer children. On the other hand, poor people in underdeveloped countries choose to have many children. Why? Because they have to depend upon their children to take care of them in their old age. They have no insurance, pensions, or government help. When they grow old, where can they get help? The answer is simple. They can and will turn to their children. Their children will be adults then, and they will be working. The children can all share the costs and other responsibilities of taking care of their parents. For many poor people, a large family is a way of planning and preparing for the future. We could say that a large family is insurance for old age in some societies.

ASSIGNMENT 23:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese Hai c quan l-ng thc ca Lin Hp quc ngy hm qua cho rng Indonesia s i mt vi s thiu ht l-ng thc trm

121 trng trong nm nay. l hu qu ca nhng v ma tht thu v ca cuc khng hong ti chnh lm tng gi nhp khu. Trong mt bn bo co chung, t chc L-ng Nng th gii (FAO) v Ch-ng Trnh L-ng Thc Th Gii (WFP) cho rng vic gip ca th gii l cn thit gii quyt vic thiu ht go tm thi, ngun l-ng thc chnh ca t n-c. Bn bo co chung ca hai t chc c vn phng t ti Rome th hai t chc FAO v WFP thc gic cc n-c ti tr gip Indonesia gii quyt cc vn lin quan n hn hn v khng hong ti chnh. Bn bo co ni thm rng gi l-ng thc ngy cng tng cao, s ng-i tht nghip ngy cng ng lm tng thm s ng-i sng d-i mc ngho i. Mt bn bo co v mt n-c ng dn th t- trn th gii m nn kinh t b tn ph cho rng : Vo khong 7,5 triu ng-i Indonesia ngho kh 15 tnh c th phi sng thiu n trong ma kh. Bn bo co da trn nhng c liu do mt nhm cng tc gm 11 thnh vin ca hai t chc ny. Nhm ny n Indonesia t ngy 9 thng 3 n 1 thng 4 nm 1998. Sn l-ng nm nay ch -c t 47,5 triu tn, thp hn 3,6% so vi nm ngoi. S tt gim ny do mt trong nhng t hn hn nghim trng nht Indonesia trong th k ny gy nn. Bn bo co cn cho bit mc d chnh ph Indonesia d nh nhp khu 1,5 triu tn go t thng 4 n thng 9, nh-ng n-c ny vn cn thiu 2 triu tn na. Khon thiu ht ny s -c cng ng quc t gip nhm cu vn nn kinh t ang lm vo cnh khn cng. Bn bo co cho bit thch thc chnh m t n-c ny ang i mt l bo m cung cp l-ng thc cho 7,5 triu ng-i ngho i v gi go v cc loi l-ng thc khc tng 50% trong vng 12 thng qua.

ASSIGNMENT 24:
Translate the following text into Vietnamese Hm th t-, Vit Nam tuyn b l s gia nhp Hip Hi cc n-c ng Nam , nhm xua i phng on l H Ni mun ln la vic tr thnh hi vin chnh thc cho n khi chun b tt mi iu kin. Vit Nam hin gi ang tch cc chun b mi iu kin cn thit tr thnh hi vin chnh thc ca ASEAN vo nm ti. Ph Th T-ng Phan Vn Khi tuyn b nh- vy vi cc doanh nhn ti mt ba n tr-a do Din n Kinh t th gii (WEF) -

122 tr s t ti Thy S- t chc. WEF l c quan ng ra duy tr cuc hp ko di 3 ngy y. Ph Th T-ng Phan Vn Khi cho bit Vit Nam cng mun tham gia vo Din n Hp Tc Kinh T Chu - Thi Bnh D-ng ( APEC) vi 17 thnh vin. khi c iu kin. Ti Jakarta, Th tr-ng ngoi giao Vit Nam V Khoan ni rng n-c ng s n xin tr thnh hi vin A SEAN va cui thng ny hay u thng 11. Th tr-ng V Khoan, sau khi gp ng A Jit Singh Tng th- k A SEAN- vn phng t ti JaKarta, pht biu rng ng khng mun c mt tr ngi no trong qu trnh gia nhp A SEAN. Thng tn x Antara trch dn li tuyn b ca ng. Cc thnh vin APEC bao gm cc quc gia thuc Indonesia, Malaisia, Phillipine, Xingapore v cc n-c M, Canada, Nht v Trung Quc. Mt chnh thc ca cc nh lnh o cc n-c tham t chc ti Indonesia vo thng ti. A SEAN- Bruny, Thi Lan- cng cuc hp khng giaAPEC s -c

Vit nam t -c kt qu l tr thnh quan st vin ASEAN trong cuc hi ngh ca khi ny vo nm 1992, tuyn b l thit tha mong mun tr thnh hi vin chnh thc ca t chc ny, c nhng ch-ng trnh vi nhiu hoi bo v s hp tc, bao gm c vic pht ng khu vc t do mu dch A SEAN trong vng 10 nm. Cc vin chc ASEAN cng hy vng l Vit Nam c l s gia nhp A SEAN tr-c khi cc nh lnh o ca 6 quc gia thnh vin tham d cuc hp th-ng nh t chc ti Thi Lan vo thng 12 nm 1995. sn c nhng qui nh v vic hp tc trong khi A SEAN. Mt khi chng ti l hi vin th chng ti s tun theo mi qui nh. Ph Th T-ng ni thm rng H Ni s lm vic vi cc n-c khc ti ong Nam bo m nn an ninh khu vc. Ph Th t-ng Phan Vn Khi cho bit chnh ph ca ng s y mnh cc n lc bng nhng vic ci cch hon thin cc iu kin cho s u t- n-c ngoi qua s hnh thnh mt c cu lut php mi v cc th tc hnh chnh thch hp hn. Ph Th t-ng ni: Chng ti hiu -c l Vit Nam ang i ph vi nhng th thch ln lao ca s cnh tranh kinh t ton cu v nh- th chng ti phi c gng tht tch cc gt b i mi nguy c tt hu ng sau cc n-c lng ging.

ASSIGNMENT 25:
Translate the following texts into English

123 1. The manufacturing sector expanded significantly during the post-World War II reconstruction of the Philippine economy. Government controls on imports promoted the development of light industries that produced consumer goods for the domestic market. In the 1970s the government created four special economic zones designed to stimulate manufacturing for the export market. Industries in these export-processing zones receive incentives to produce traditional exports. The zones have helped to stimulate foreign investment in the Philippine economy, in part because they are exempt from certain taxes and restrictions on foreign ownership of businesses. The success of these zones has led to the creation of other types of special economic zones, such as large industrial estates. Businesses receive tax exemptions and other incentives in these zones. The former U.S. naval base at Subic Bay, for example, is now a huge industrial-commercial zone in Manila. Its modern facilities and duty-free economic zone have attracted new export-focused industries and foreign investment 2. Vietnam has sought to maintain socio-politic stability, develop economic and diplomatic establishment in recent years. The positive legal changes have had a tremendous influence on the production, financial and commercial situations. Vietnam ranked as the worlds secondlargest rice exporter to Thailand because its agriculture responded dramatically to free market. In manufacturing and service activities the rapid growth and change occurred in and around HCM City. Much economic expansion was partially driven by an influx of investment and technology from some 2 million overseas Vietnamese in many different countries worldwide, most of whom had returned to Vietnam for their investment and contacts with their relatives. Only a year after the US embargo was lifted, soft drink giants such as Coca Cola and Pepsi Cola, which have enjoyed superior advantages in capital, marketing policies and preferences under the Foreign Investment Law, have gradually eaten into the market shares of local producers. Other products are also in the same situation. Saigon Beer has to compete fiercely with breweries of foreign Joint-ventures. Local detergent producers, although capable of meeting domestic demand to the year 2005, have driven into the corner by giants such as Procter & Gamble and Unilever. 3. To protect domestic production, local producers have proposed several measures to the Government. First, the State should devise specific development plans for foreign investment in terms of business field and geographical area and should not encourage foreign investment in products which local enterprises can produce such as soft drink, detergent, paper and cigarettes. Second, licenses should be granted only to JVs or foreign-owned enterprises which involve in projects requiring large capital, advanced technology or producing goods for export. Third, a law should be enacted against unfair competition that can lead to monopoly, dumping or price inflation that does not benefit consumers. 4. In Vietnamese the word nuoc carry a double meaning of country and water, a linguistic association recognizable after a journey to the most fertile land in Vietnam- the Mekong Delta. The silt from the Mekong River helps to bring an ample granary representing the whole country source of food as well as the local inhabitants riverside lifestyle. For tourists, the Mekong Delta is one of the most fascinating tourist destinations in South-east Asia. It offers the marvel of the glittering waters coupled with the gaiety of a culture demonstrated by the local lifestyle and commercial activities. The big cities such as Can Tho,

124 My Tho and Long Xuyen provide a vantage for the nine provinces of the Mekong Delta while the immense network of rivers and canals is regarded as the great boon second to none in this region. The exciting life in this region is not very similar to that in HCM City. However, it does not suggest any difficulty in reaching the Mekong Delta to escape the excitement of the greatest city in Southern Vietnam. It takes only a three-hour drive( by bus, though) on the National Highway Number 1 to get to My Tho, the capital of Tien giang & an ideal departure point for exploring this delta region.

125

REFERENCES
Bolinger, Dwight. 1977. Meaning and Form. Longman, London, UK. Catford, J.C. 1985. A Linguistic Theory of Translation. Oxford University Press, London, UK. Halliday, M.K.A. 1976. Cohesion in English. Longmans, London, UK. Larson, Mildred L. 1998. Meaning-based Translation.University Press of America. Maryland, USA. Newmark, Peter. 1989. A Textbook of Translation. Prentice Hall International, Hertfordside, USA Palmer, F.R. 1981. Semantics. Cambridge University Press, London, UK. Reyburn, D. 1979. Cultural Equivalences in Translation. Oxford University Press, London, UK. Rose, Marilyn. 1982. Translation Spectrum. State University of NY Press, New York, USA Steiner, G. 1985. Aspects of Language and Translation. Oxford University Press, London, UK. Tosh, Wayne. 1975. Syntactic Translation. The Hague, Mouton, USA

CONTENTS
Introduction Chapter 1: THEORY OF TRANSLATION Lesson 1: Form and Meaning Lesson 2: Kinds of Translation Lesson 3: Steps in a Translation Project Lesson 4: Strategies for Translators Lesson 5: Patterns and Sources of Errors Chapter 2: ASSIGNMENTS Assignment 1 Assignment 2 Assignment 3 Assignment 4 Assignment 5 Assignment 6 Assignment 7 Assignment 8 Assignment 9 Assignment 10 Assignment 11 Assignment 12 Assignment 13 Assignment 14 Assignment 15 Assignment 16 Assignment 17 Assignment 18 Assignment 19 Assignment 20 Assignment 21 Assignment 22 Assignment 23 Assignment 24 Assignment 25 Chapter 2: ASSIGNMENT KEYS Assignment 1 Assignment 2 Assignment 3 Assignment 4 Assignment 5 Assignment 6 Assignment 7 Assignment 8 Assignment 8 1 2 2 11 21 27 34 49 49 51 54 55 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 65 66 67 68 70 71 73 73 74 76 77 78 78 79 81 81 82 84 85 86 87 89 90 90

Assignment 10 Assignment 11 Assignment 12 Assignment 13 Assignment 14 Assignment 15 Assignment 16 Assignment 17 Assignment 18 Assignment 19 Assignment 20 Assignment 21 Assignment 22 Assignment 23 Assignment 24 Assignment 25 References

91 92 94 95 96 98 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 106 107 107 109

Thng tin v tc gi ca gio trnh: - H v tn: Nguyn Vn Tun - Sinh nm: 1963 - C quan cng tc: T Bin-phin dch, Khoa Ting Anh, Trng i hc Ngoi Ng Hu - a ch email: tuannguyen11863@yahoo.com Phm vi v i tng s dng gio trnh: - Gio trnh Translation 1&2 ch yu s dng dy cho sinh vin ngnh Ting Anh, chuyn ngnh Bin phin dch. Gio trnh ny cn c th dng dy hoc dng nh ngun tham kho cho sinh vin ngnh Quc t hc, Vit Nam hc. - Gio trnh c th dng cho cc trng i hc ngoi ng, i hc s phm ngoi ng, Hc vin quan h quc t. - Yu cu kin thc trc lc hc mn ny: hc tt mn ny, ngi hc cn phi c kin thc c bn v ng ngha, ng dng v din ngn. Ngoi ra ngi hc cn c kinh nghim t nhiu v cng tc bin-phin dch hoc l ang tham gia cng vic ny hoc l sinh vin ang hc cc mn bin-phin dch thc hnh - Cc t kha tra cu: Source language, Target language, Meaning-based translation, Literal translation, Translation errors, Exegesis, Translation evaluation, Strategies for translators, Paraphrase, The 4 T's in translation - xut bn nm 2001 ti NXB i hc Hu, ti bn nm 2006 ti NXB Nng